Notesale: Turn your study into money

Document Preview

Extracts from the notes are below, to see the PDF you'll receive please use the links above

---

Secrets of Stage Hypnosis – Street Hypnotism Hypnotherapy – NLP – Complete Mind Therapy
And Marketing For Hypnotists
With Contributions from Jonathan Royle
& Many of His Colleagues
Compiled By: Dr
...
Jonathan Royle
(All Rights Reserved & All Copyrights Claimed)
www
...
com
www
...
com
www
...
com
www
...
net
VERY SILENTLY I CREPT FORWARD, I HEARD A SNARLING GRUNTING SOUND FROM
ABOVE ME, NOW I LOOKED UPWARDS, THERE WAS THE TIGER, ITS MOUTH OPEN
WIDE SHOWING LARGE TEARING FANGS, THE BLACK PATCHES ON THE ROOF OF ITS
MOUTH STOOD OUT WITH STARTLING CLARITY, WITHOUT ANOTHER SOUND, IT
LEAPT DOWN TOWARDS ME, I CROUCHED LOWER, AND IT PASSED OVER ME,
BEFORE THE TIGER COULD TURN, I LEAPT ONTO ITS BACK, CIRCLED ITS THROAT
WITH MY LEFT ARM, AND RAISED MY RIGHT ARM WITH THE LONG DAGGER IN IT,
VERY HIGH, READY TO STRIKE INTO THE TIGERS JUGULAR
...
A LESSON BEFORE YOU HAVE EVEN STARTED TO READ THE
BOOK
...
Jonathan Royle – www
...
com
As is well known within the Psychotherapy world “We are all products of
our environment” or to be more accurate:
“We are all products of our environment, unless we are given the tools
and opportunities to positively expand beyond the confines of our
direct environment”
You see to function Positively, Happily and Harmoniously in life (on all
levels) we need to as human beings (especially as we are growing up) to
feel:
Loved – Wanted – Needed – Appreciated – Cared For – Cherished and
Valued
If there is a lacking of or disruption in any of those 7 Positive Pillars then
it will most likely lead to that individual suffering a negative impact on
their:
Self-Confidence, Self-Esteem, Self-Image and/or Self-Control
(Willpower)
And sadly when there is a disruption or negative impact on one or more of
those 4 vitally important Foundations of “Self-Worth” then this can and
often does regretfully lead to the individual feeling…

Negativity, Trapped, Worthless, Like A Failure, Angry, Resentful,
Frightened,
And even more depressing is the very real fact that when one or more of
those 7 Negative Pillars is in place that it can often lead in one or more
ways to the individual going into
SELF-DESTRUCT MODE
And that combined with negative environmental factors can be the straw
that breaks the camels back so to speak and can lead to a downward spiral
which could include things as extreme as them turning to a life of:
Crime, Self-Harming, Drugs, Alcholism, Domestic Violence, Prostitution,
Homelessness or even worse in extreme cases Suicide…
These are most always destructive behaviours and actions that manifest
themselves either as an extreme reaction to or negative result of the
Emotional impact of what has been going on in and/or lacking in their
life’s
...

And once the downward spiral starts it can and often does lead to a
lifetime of destruction which negatively impacts not just the individual, but
also their family, friends and even often many members of the community
as a whole (in the instances of crime etc)

HOWEVER THERE IS A WAY WE CAN HELP
STOP THIS HAPPENING
But the great news is that when an individual is helped to discover ways to
expand their horizons, try new things, gain a sense of achievement, given a
chance to grow as a person and starts to realize that there are better options
available for them and that a brighter future is a possibility for them then
this can work wonders in helping them to positively impact and develop
their:
Self-Confidence, Self-Esteem, Self-Image and/or Self-Control
(Willpower)
And when they grow in these areas, the 4 vitally important Foundations of
“Self-Worth” they can then start to feel a sense of:
Positivity, Personal Freedom, Positive Self-Worth, Success, Courage,
Achievement, Happiness
And perhaps not surprisingly as a positive side effect of these beneficial
changes they will finally be able to learn to LOVE THEMSELVES and
of course gain SELF-RESPECT
This can lead to a whole new perspective and positive approach to life, can
help the individual to gain a whole new positive support and positive
social network and so ultimately can also lead them in the long term to a
more Positive Environment and thus consequently help them to gain the
7 Positive Pillars in their life’s of positively feeling:
Loved – Wanted – Needed – Appreciated – Cared For – Cherished and
Valued
Now fortunately for the majority of people, a lacking in one or more of the

Positive Pillars does not usually lead to such negative results as the few
examples given earlier, however it is my experience that this is always
without doubt or exception the Ultimate under lying reason and cause that
people develop Bad Habits, Addictions and other personally Negative and
also Self Destructive Behaviours
...

Therefore it is also true to note that doing therapeutic work in order to
enable the lacking or imbalances in those areas to be eliminated so that the
person feels fully 100% Positive and Complete in the areas of:
Self-Confidence, Self-Esteem, Self-Image and/or Self-Control
(Willpower)
Will then ultimately mean that any previous lacking or imbalances in the
following Seven Positive Pillars will set themselves right and thus enable
the person to be the Perfect Them:
Loved – Wanted – Needed – Appreciated – Cared For – Cherished and
Valued
It is with this model that I created (as outlined above) that I formulated my
creation of “Complete Mind Therapy” and is exactly what the “Non
Specific Treatment Script” which you will find later in this book is all
about targeting
...


If you think deeply about this, you will, I am sure also realise that offering
a person the chance to be the centre of attention and creating an On Stage
environment where they feel:
Loved – Wanted – Needed – Appreciated – Cared For – Cherished and
Valued
Is also the True Key Motivating Secret of how and why a Successful Stage
Hypnosis show works and when you bear this in mind I am sure your
shows will become more successful, just as your results with therapy
sessions will also
...

Consider that the negative end of this scale can also be called “Out of
Control” and the positive end termed “Self-Control” and perhaps things
become even clearer for you?
And then consider that the negative end can be termed as “Trapped” and
the Positive end as “Freedom”
Or indeed it could be “Unhappy or Depressed” at the Negative End and
HAPPY & JOYFUL at the positive end
...

And now I have to say that without doubt to understand this fully and the
sheer possibilities of what I have just taught you, right now you would be
wise to go on Amazon and order a copy of the excellent book PsychoCybernetics, A New Way to Get More Living Out of Life by Maxwell
Maltz
...
Then at the other end of the scale SUCCESS in
life occurs due to the following:
S – ense of direction
U – nderstanding

C – ourage
C - almness
E – steem
S – elf – Confidence
S – elf - Acceptance
Again I am sure you can see how that all relates back to the Positive Pillars
I mentioned before
...

The following are Six Further Books that I also consider vitally important
to your success in Hypnosis and would say that you should read as soon as
possible:
01) They Call It Hypnosis by Robert A
...

02) If This Be Magic – The Forgotten Power of Hypnosis by Guy Lyon
Playfair
...


04) Bad Medicine: Misconceptions and Misuses Revealed, from Distance
Healing to Vitamin O (Wiley Bad Science Series) by Christopher Wanjek
...

06) Influence: The Psychology of Persuasion (Collins Business Essentials)
by Robert B
...

And of course if for some Strange reason you got your hands onto this,
Volume Two of “The Encyclopedia of Hypnotherapy, Stage-Hypnosis and
Complete Mind Therapy” before having read Volume One then it goes
without saying that you should order a copy of Volume One as a matter of
Priority in order to make your Hypnosis Education complete
...

NOTE = The Above Was Extracted from “The Encyclopedia of
Hypnotherapy, Stage-Hypnosis and Complete Mind Therapy” Volume Two
by Dr
...


“BACK TO FRONT”
By: Dr
...
EliteHypnosisBootcamp
...

As you will discover in this chapter the key secret to hypnosis is the belief
and expectancy within your subjects mind, may the general public remain
ignorant to the way their minds work otherwise we hypnotists will be out
of business!

COURSE IN COMPLETE MIND THERAPY
“The Professional Art of Stage Hypnosis and Hypnotherapy”
IMPORTANT WARNING TO ALL WHO STUDY THIS COURSE
...

We would not wish this course to get into the wrong hands as Hypnosis
really is a far more powerful force than you could possibly imagine, as
such anyone studying this course and putting the enclosed contents to use
do so at their own personal risk
...

In this part I will reveal all the key secrets of Hypnosis
...

However as you will have, I presume, no previous knowledge of the
subjects in hand you may think that the next few pages over simplify the
art
...

As such when you have read the last part of this course you will then
realise and more importantly understand just how easy and simple it really
is to hypnotise someone
...
This
will mean that you will automatically know more than a great number of
Stage Hypnotists who just know the outcome of what they do and not what
has caused it to happen
...


·STAGE HYPNOTISM
Boiled down to the basics Stage Hypnosis is IDENTICAL to all other
forms of Hypnosis
...
There are seven key points to follow for
Therapeutic Hypnosis and below I shall explain how these key points also
apply to the use of Hypnotism on stage
...
”

2

Induction of the hypnotic trance state
...


4

Ego-strengthening Therapy
...


6

Implant the major post Hypnotic suggestion
...


·SEVEN STEPS TO STAGE-HYPNOSIS
1
...

2
...
(Any fast method after handclasp)
...
Deepening of trance (giving suggestion that each time they are told to
return to sleep they will go deeper
...
Ego strengthening Therapy (butter them up/compliments etc)
...
Do the Therapy (in this case the comedy routines of your act)
...
Implant the major post Hypnotic suggestion
...
B
...


7
...

So you see, the basic structure is the same
...
Study them and also consult a
Hypnotherapist and then you will see with your own eyes just how similar
the two forms of Hypnosis really are
...
Basically speaking if you did what they did
word for word and with similar actions on someone whom had been made
to believe in your abilities then they would go into a trance state and react
to your various suggestions
...
BELIEF and EXPECTANCY
B
...
SUGGESTION and REPETITION
D
...

Step B means that once they are in the correct state of mind to be
Hypnotised you then use methods of disorientation and confusion to

convince them they are starting to go into trance, and that’s why they are
feeling these strange effects
...

Step C means that once these things are starting to convince them they are
beginning to slip into trance then you use methods of suggestion and
repetition to confuse and disorientate them even further and also to
convince them that they are going under more
...

Step D is the end result of carrying out steps A, B & C and should be that
if they believe what you have done to be Hypnosis and expect it to work
then this will have the result of relaxation and sleep
...

So you see the secret to all induction’s of any kind whether Stage or
Therapy and whether slow, rapid or instantaneous is that if the subject
sincerely believes that what you are doing does work and they also
sincerely believe and expect it to work on them, then the end result will
always be that it works on them
...

BELIEF AND EXPECTANCY EQUALS HYPNOSIS
...
By the same token if you place someone into trance via a rapid
or instantaneous induction then they will slip out of the trance state very
quickly
...
Use your instant induction’s and place everyone into the trance
...
Then use the group deepening method as detailed later to deepen the
trance to such a level whereby they will not slip out of it
...


·THE SECRET OF SPEED
The secret of speed induction’s is just to make sure that you follow the
keys which I have mentioned already and also to have an enormous
amount of confidence
...


You must also carry out the instantaneous induction’s with no doubt in
your mind that they WILL work!
This is so that this personal belief is transmitted to the subjects and they
are then in no doubt in their minds that it will work
...

An element of shock is also used with instant induction’s in order to catch
them off guard and as such “shock” them into deep hypnosis so to speak
...
They must know that you are a Professional Hypnotist and can
therefore do as you claim
...
Ask them to close their eyes and to breathe deeply and regularly
...
Suggest ideas of heaviness, sleep, tiredness and relaxation to them for a
few minutes and then THEY WILL BE IN A HYPNOTIC TRANCE
...


·PEER GROUP PRESSURE
A small percentage of people will react to your suggestions due to peer
group pressure and the fear that if they don’t then they will be tormented
and subjected to ridicule by their friends as they are unable to at that time
be a good Hypnotic subject
...
I
...
SYNDROME
A phrase which I always use in my opening patter is this: “If you’ve got
good powers of intelligence, imagination and concentration then you will
be a good Hypnotic subject!” The psychological effect of this is that if
they come up to try and be Hypnotised and did not react, then they think it
will make them look an even bigger fool by not reacting than by taking
part and being a “good” subject in the show
...
So again in a way, this
relates back to peer group pressure
...
In fact the secret dream of many people is to perform on stage
even if they do make a fool of themselves
...
Those people
that get up know they are awful singers and are making a complete fool of
themselves and yet to them, its an escape from everyday life, a step into the
world of fantasy and the chance to be a star! The fact other people are also
prepared to make fools of themselves brings the sheep effect into play, so it
then doesn’t bother them either to make a fool of themselves
...


·THE SHEEP EFFECT

The sheep effect is such that if one person is prepared to do something or
make a fool of themselves, then others will “follow the leader” and they
become one of the sheep following the crowd and doing what all the others
upon the stage or in life are doing
...
As entertainment is the
key word on stage, if they look convincing you would of course allow
them to remain on the stage
...
These
people of course should be dismissed from the stage at the earliest
opportunity
...
This friend
can then, if they spot anyone, give you a hand signal which you would of
course have prearranged between you to indicate which person is and in
which chair they are sitting
...
By the way if this observant friend is trained in Hypnosis also,
they can then also give you hand signals to indicate which of the on stage
volunteers will be good to place into trance, which ones not to bother with
and those which are under deepest when Hypnotised
...
In effect we are “directors” of the film
and the subjects become the “actors” doing as we say
...
So much for the 1952 Hypnotism act, 1989
guidelines and 1996 government review then! These are covered later
...
One important thing that applies only to Therapeutic work, is that
of the placebo effect
...
It then takes a lot of courage to phone you and book an
appointment for Therapy as this is then a conscious decision within
themselves that things must change and will change for the better
...

However when a client does show up as happens in 99% of the cases they
are almost cured of their problem the moment they step into your
consulting room, as they have already made a conscious decision by
booking the appointment and attending on time that things must change!
The other piece in the jigsaw is when you get them to hand over the
payment for the session before you even start the Therapy
...
The final 25% of the Therapeutic process is the actual
treatment which you give them, although even if this were to be
fundamentally worthless (which it is not), if the client is made to believe it
will be beneficial then indeed it will!

·GOLDEN RULES TO FOLLOW
RULE ONE: Have total confidence in yourself and your skilful abilities
...


RULE THREE: Monotony and repetition is the trade of the Hypnotist so
repeat, repeat and then repeat it again
...

RULE FIVE: Follow the steps and instructions detailed within this course
to the letter and your success is guaranteed
...
These are the only tools available
to you
...
So
learn to handle these tools with finesse for they are the start, middle and
end of all that you must do and know
...
Hypnotists are not Hypnotists, they are merely actors playing the part of
the image of a Hypnotist which people expect to see and as such react to
...
All Hypnosis whether Stage or Therapeutic is really just self hypnosis
...
Hypnosis occurs due to co-operation and not confrontation or
challenge
...
As Hypnosis is just a state of mind and compliance based on the
subjects levels of belief and expectancy, there is no such thing as a
“Hypnotised” feeling and this is because each person experiences
everything that happens during the course of their life differently
...
Belief and expectancy are the most powerful keys of all to success
...
Suggestion correctly expressed is Hypnosis
...
The correct way to express suggestion is in a commanding and
demanding voice, and to keep on repeating it to the subject
...
One willing co-operative volunteer is worth more than a hundred
pressed men
...
To make life easy for you, use the suggestibility test of hands locking
together to find those subjects who will be the easiest to Hypnotise and
who are obviously in the correct co-operative state of mind
...
A Hypnotist is perceived as being a person of authority and people in
general expect to be ordered by and to obey as a person of authority says
...

11
...

12
...

13
...

14
...

15
...


16
...

17
...

18
...

19
...
So if you can get a
person to focus their mind on something to the exclusion of everything
else, you are then able to bypass the critical area of their minds and firmly
embed a suggestion into their imagination without any conscious conflict!
Then afterwards even if the conscious mind were to try and oppose the
suggestion the far stronger force of the imagination would always win and
the suggestion would be acted upon
...
Hypnosis merely shuts down the analytical (critical) area of the mind
that is located between the conscious and subconscious
...

21
...

22
...

23
...

24
...

In this state, get the subjects to visualise your suggestions with implicit
faith that it is so and so and it will be
...
Co-operations with a highly developed imagination are the best
qualities your subject can have for successful acceptance of your Hypnotic
suggestions
...
You want your subjects to have confidence, belief and faith with
expectation of success, but it is no use just telling them this
...

27
...
These are the four
stages of inducing a Hypnotic trance
...

28
...

29
...
Tone of voice is
essential in all communication and indeed in Hypnosis also
...

30
...
Show that you and
you alone are in charge
...
Give them orders and expect them to be
obeyed, talk and act in an authoritative manner and look at ease with all
you do
...

31
...
They are in a strange situation and environment (whether on stage or
in therapy) whereas you feel at ease
...

You make them feel important, needed and appreciated whilst also
conditioning them so that they sincerely believe they are only clever and
intelligent if they co-operate with you
...
You know what’s going to happen and they don’t so you are already

ahead of them
...

34
...
You
are the salesman selling the great idea of Hypnosis to them
...

35
...

36
...
You then direct all applause to them and this reward makes them
feel good and also conditions them to react throughout
...
On stage always paint a verbal picture, so that the subjects know what
is expected of them
...
The suggestions you give must also have one meaning
only so that they cannot be misinterpreted
...
A Hypnotist to be successful must be a self-motivated, strong minded,
egotistical individual, who is confident in their skills
...
A smooth talker, persuasionist,
salesman
...
In other words you
must be able to think on your feet, use your common sense and have the
gift of the gab
...
Hypnosis is co-operation and not confrontation and the nature of your
game should be imagination not humiliation
...
You cannot see Hypnosis, you can only see the effects of it
...

41
...
Also let me explain briefly how the human mind works, we’ll
elaborate later on
...
The conscious mind and/or human will
...
The analytical and/or critical area
...
The subconscious and/or imagination
We use the conscious mind to speak etc, the subconscious deals with the
automatic actions of our blood circulation and breathing as well as being
our imagination area of the mind
...
I will now make the analogy of the mind
being a computer
...
The analytical area analyses it for any mistakes in
much the same way as a spell checker, then the “corrected” data, if of an
acceptable nature, is allowed to enter the subconscious mind where it is
stored forever in much the same way as storing data onto a floppy disc
...
All this of course takes only a fraction of a
second to occur
...
As such when told that on a snap of the
fingers they will be Elvis the mind is then unable to process the
information and find out that it is untrue and consequently it is believed to
be true
...


If only in a very light state of trance the will of the person may still go into
conflict with the imagination or subconscious, but as we stated earlier
when the imagination and will are in conflict the imagination always wins
...
Just as with any computer, programs placed into the
memory which in the long term could be dangerous or more harm than
good MUST be cancelled out or erased so that things revert to normality
...

Otherwise they will remain in the computers memory bank to be
automatically acted upon long into the future! Imagine the scene as the
subject is driving home and Elvis comes onto the radio
...
They then do so and Crash! This is obviously an extreme example
but expressed to implant firmly into your mind the importance of removing
all suggestions and commands from your subject’s minds except those of a
beneficial nature such as in Therapy before they leave the room
...
If you do this and abide
fully by the 1952 Hypnotism Act, the 1989 guidelines and the 1996
Government review and generally put the safety of your volunteers first
then you should be a most successful performer
...
Observe
Figure A and you will see the Hypnotist facing the subject
...

The Hypnotist suggests things to the subject who in turn accepts and reacts
to these verbal suggestions
...
The subject accepts and reacts to these, the Hypnotist observes
the effects and then feeds back the observations as new suggestions to the
subjects and so the Biofeedback computer effect continues until the subject
is in a deep state of trance
...

THE BIOFEEDBACK COMPUTER EFFECT
An example of this so that you fully understand how it works would be as
follows
...

They then start to breathe more deeply and regularly and perhaps also start
to close their eyes
...

This now means that you really do know how to Hypnotise someone, as
with this technique the wording of your induction must always be ad lib
and worded so as to contain your observations and as such capitalise upon
them
...
And remember the key words associated
by most people with Hypnosis and a trance state are: sleep, relax, drifting,
deeper, falling, resting, calm, heavy, tired and all other words associated
which mean similar things to these
...
Now that

you have the keys to Hypnotic success, lets look at them all separately and
in depth so that your understanding and knowledge of the subject is total
...

As such, this course has been written, not only to be enjoyable to read, but
rather in a way that you learn the maximum amount possible in the shortest
space of time possible
...
I promise that after reading
the last page of this course, listening to the instructional audio-tapes,
viewing the videos and possibly attending your personal training day, you
will be in a position to, if you so desire achieve this same level of financial
freedom and success
...

NOTE = The Chapter Above was extracted from “The Encyclopedia of
Hypnotherapy, Stage-Hypnosis and Complete Mind Therapy” Volume One
which is available on Amazon
...
UltimateHypnosisCourse
...
elitehypnosisbootcamp
...


‘Running The Numbers’
by Robert Temple

As hypnotists we are probably one of the luckiest breeds in the world
...

Whether you’re a stage hypnotist or a hypnotherapist, chances are that
you’ve been asked to stop someone from smoking or make them ‘stop eating chocolate’ on more than one occasion
...

That’s precisely what I want to talk to you about here, today
...
Maybe you want to buy a
$1,000,000 home or drive a Lamborghini
...
Or maybe you’d
like to pay off your mortgage and not worry about the bills each month
...

When you started out in hypnosis, chances are you had a couple of things
in mind:

1

To change people’s lives for the better and make a real difference;

To build your own business and make money for yourself, rather than
working for ‘the man’
...

There is only ONE of you and only 24 hours in each day so, even with the
best will in the world, there are only so many clients that you can consult
with per day
...

Your income will always be obstructed by:
1

The amount of money you can charge per session;

2

The number of sessions/clients you can fit into a day;

3

The number of clients you can actually get per day;

4

The local radius from which you can realistically find clients
...

Wouldn’t it be great if there was a way that you could find, attract and treat
literally hundreds of clients per day for dozens of different issues or problems, without taking up any of your time
...

Sounds too good to be true?
Well, it used to be
...

I am, of course, referring to the INTERNET
...

Some of the world’s biggest companies are exploding into bankruptcy,
whilst regular people are building solid 7-figure businesses from the comfort of their home Internet connection
...

Whether you’d be happy to make an extra few hundred bucks per month,
or whether you’re looking to build a multi-million dollar online empire, I
urge you to read on - and consider what I’m about to share with you, very
seriously
...
So I set about learning, designing and
perfecting a system to generate passive income online, which would allow
me to work as much or as little as I wanted
...
I realized that you can actually
package, market and sell your hypnotherapy skills online for HUGE profit
margins as ‘downloadable information products’
...

BUT, we could easily give them some kind of virtual help, whether that’s a
hypnotherapy MP3, video training, an eBook or whatever the best medium
to package your information is
...

The cool thing is that ordinary people like me and you can now create their
own fantastic products, get them up for sale online and start raking in big
cash, for less than $100 and in under a week
...

Imagine you could have a ‘Quit Smoking’ product, which sells for $67 online
...
Once
the ‘system’ is set up, it takes NO effort to complete those sales
...
What if you had 5 of those products
...

When I discovered this possibility, I knew that I had stumbled onto something that would change my life
...


Over the past few years I’ve generated over $1
...
Best of all, the overheads and set up costs
are super-low and literally ANYONE can copy my success
...

Not only are you helping hundreds of people worldwide to change their
lives for the better but you’re also making fantastic money along the way
...
Cool, right?
All you need to know is the ‘system’, which I have conveniently broken
down into 5 simple, bite-size chunks, ready for you to implement
...
All you have to do is to choose one of your favorite, or most popular, issues that you can treat as a hypnotherapist
...

There are literally hundreds of issues which can be easily treated with hypnotherapy, so you can simply pick one of your preferred
...


Either way, if you can make money from it as a hypnotherapist doing oneon-one sessions, then you can make 100x the money from it as a downloadable information product
...

Step #2: Create your product
Most people have never (and will never) create their own product
...

Truthfully, as a hypnotist, you are probably in one of the most powerful
positions to create a fantastic information product effortlessly
...
Every single time you treat a private client for any
particular issue, you are effectively creating an audio product, live
...

You’re sitting, in a room, and talking for 60-120 minutes, hypnotizing,
treating and re-awakening your clients
...
for a microphone
...

An hour or two later, you have your very own perfect information product
ready to sell
...


That was easy!
If you wanted to take this a step further, you could also create a manual or
video course to accompany the hypnosis MP3, detailing further tips, tricks
and tools to help them beat their issue
...

With the product created, simply give it a snazzy name and it’s ready for
sale
...
Now what’s your excuse?
Go make your product, otherwise you’re missing out!
Step #3: Build an automated sales process
Once your product is complete, the next step is to build a simple online
sales presence to enable you to convert visitors into customers
...
It would also
have an ‘Add To Cart’ button, so that your customers can buy the
product
...
Whether it’s $10 or $1000, you need
some kind of merchant provider
...

1

You can simply create a free account with any of these services and create an order form to add to your sales process within minutes
...
It’s a simple web page which contains a download link for the MP3, eBook or video course
...
It’s very straightforward to create and can even be entirely outsourced (recommended!) to a professional graphic designer
...

You’ll also need website hosting and a domain name for your product, but
you can also find these with a simple Google search
...
The more traffic you receive to your site, the more sales you’ll
make and the more money goes into your pocket
...


Affiliates are other internet marketers or information publishers who
already have a business in your niche area
...

They could add a banner to their website or e-mail their subscriber list
about your product
...

There are literally thousands of successful affiliates around the world who
are hungry for quality products to promote, in every niche or topic you
could possibly think of
...
Cool,
right?
If you use ClickBank or JVZoo to run your payments (see above) then you
already have a built-in and ready-to-go affiliate program to handle all of
the sales tracking and commission payouts, too
...

I’d recommend spending 20-30 minutes per day just looking for (and contacting) new potential affiliates
...

Step #5: Rinse and repeat

Believe it or not, it’s actually completely possible to have steps 1-4 up and
running within 7-28 days, starting from scratch
...

Literally start from the beginning and run through this entire system again
...

Why have 1 product making $100 per day, when you could have 10? The
more products you have out there, the more money you could make, even
if you put less work into each individual product promotion
...
There is absolutely no reason why you couldn’t release a new product every 2-3
months
...

That’s an extra $85,775 per year in hands-free, passive income!
Oh, and that’s only with ONE product
...

People are becoming more and more familiar and comfortable with the
idea of online purchases and downloadable digital products every day
...


Which would you rather be?
As a hypnotist, you have one of the most powerful abilities to change
people’s lives and generate huge cash
...

There is NO reason why you can’t build your very own five, six or seven
figure online income with the system that I’ve detailed in this chapter
...
my students are doing it
...

If you’re interested in learning more about this system, you can check
out our 100% free coaching on ‘Passive Hypnosis Profits’ by visiting:
http://www
...
com/free/
or http://www
...
com/platinum/

Reg Blackwood's Ten Street Hypnosis Show Tips
http://www
...
com
Reg Blackwood is a British professional hypnotist, resident for most of the
year in New Zealand
...

1
...
Look around at the number of
people who start out saying "I'm a Street Hypnotist
...

Before you go out, be clear of your purpose
...

Set yourself some simple goals and not only will your confidence and
technique improve no end, but you'll also end up giving much richer
experiences to the people you meet and you won't be boring or get bored
...
Nothing else
...

Slowly, little by little, add different routines, find what works best, most of
the time, what spectators enjoy most and before long you'll have a street
show to be proud of and well worth watching!
One of your goals can be to practice some of the new inductions your keen
to try as re-inductions
...
Aim for groups of people
Stage hypnosis has been successful for many years, so don't make things
hard for yourself by trying to reinvent the wheel
...

The most obvious thing is the number of potential volunteers you will have
to select from
...

Lunchtime on weekdays is hardly ever good!
Don't approach individuals
...
It's not really about suggestibility testing, it's more about

finding out who is best able to focus on and follow your instructions in the
environment
...
Think of some creative
ways you can set up and get people to approach you
...

The first volunteer is always the hardest to get
...

You could take your favourite somnambulist friend along with you and
begin by hypnotising them
...
Expect failure and deal with it
Too many trainers will tell you to go out there with balls of steel and an
invincible, no-fail attitude
...
Act as though you can hypnotise every
man, woman, child and animal on the planet and you will be successful
...
Sometimes you will fail more than you succeed
...

When you can't hypnotise them, don't stress about it
...

Remember, very few people out there know as much about hypnosis as
you do
...
By jumping
between icebreakers and inductions, everything can be framed as an
experiment (some of them entertaining in their own right) and nobody
really notices or cares when you fail
...
When you fail to hypnotise someone, there is one
response you will hear more than any other
...
"
THEY apologise to YOU
...
Don't go for dramatic inductions
So you've seen everything from arm-pulls to drop-backs, to neck-snapping
head-twists and you're keen to drop people on the dirty ground to gasps
from the gathered crowd?
Do us all a favour, stay away from hypnosis and go take some martial arts
classes
...

By gentle inductions, I mean something like a simple Elman Eye Closure
or Magnetic Hands which relies on the focus, imagination and
concentration of the participant rather than a shock induction
...

5
...


That really is the best way to view those we call "somnambulist
...

So treat them as such
...

Try not to be annoyed with your star participant when suggestions aren't
carried out successfully (which could and does happen) and keep your
hypnotist/hypnotee relationship on an even keel by requesting simple acts
of compliance between suggestions
...

6
...

It involves performing in a defined area (the stage) in front of a group of
spectators (the audience) from which people are invited to join the
performer in the defined performance area and become a part of the show
...

As well as making for a safer performance in an area away from cars and
other potential hazards (and by being able to tell your participant not to
wander outside of the area) you'll look more professional and find it easier
to attract a crowd
...
Remember it is a performance/demonstration
Not much point speaking quietly or whispering in the ear of your
volunteer
...

So remember you have an audience (or soon will) and deliver suggestions
so that everyone can hear exactly what's going on
...


8
...

If you're experienced in such matters then also offer to deal with something
for them (motivation or minor issues without going into the underlying
cause
...
Do a proper wake-up
You can't always be sure what's going to happen when the person has left
you, so ALWAYS go through a clear and consistent wake-up procedure
with them before they go
...
Nobody
wants to see a concerned or confused looking hypnotist during this stillsuggestible time
...
Even if you cleared each
suggestion after it was carried out, do it here too, as an extra safety
measure
...
Give them a business card/contact details

What? You don't have one? Truly? How do you expect anybody else to
take you seriously? Better go back to juggling, card tricks or accountancy!

Fun With Re-inductions – Reg Blackwood
http://www
...
com
Over the next few minutes I'll be covering the following things:
First I'll talk about exactly what a re-induction is and how it's commonly
used
...
Then finally, we'll look at how you can be creative
with re-inductions and use them as the basis for an infinite number of
street or stage hypnosis skits and routines
...
” This is
what's commonly known as re-induction
...


In its simplest form, a post hypnotic suggestion can be broken down as:
When X happens, You'll do Y
...
” (Why not put
a bit of fractionation in there too?!) Note: Ok, please let's just conveniently
ignore for a moment the fact that the formal set-up of such a post hypnotic
suggestion for re-induction isn't always necessary
...
They enjoy seeing people,
often their friends and family functioning fairly normally one second
then the very next second, apparently slumped over in a hypnotic state
...

So knowing this, we can use our Post Hypnotic Suggestion for reinduction at times during the performance when we know we'll gain the
most dramatic or comic effect from it
...

Let's take the popular stage hypnosis routine of having a hypnotised
subject believe they are not really hypnotised
...
Well, I
like to take this one step further in a routine I call “The Critic” during
which I encourage a particularly vocal subject to openly criticise the very
show they're a part of
...
Then, just when they're beginning to get
really personal (as they often do) and the spectators are starting to show
concern for my fragile ego: “Sleep!” I've managed to get an entertaining 5
minute routine for street or stage hypnosis out of what is essentially, if you
look at the amount of work I had to do, just a simple re-induction
...

Now, we can get really creative with this and really have some fun
because, as a hypnotist, we can transfer that sleep command to someone or
something else
...
“When this person points at you and says
'sleep'” etc
...

Well, I have a teddy bear which I use for a re-induction during my stage
show
...
Then I
reinduce each subject in turn by squeezing the teddy bears paw and
making him utter "Sleep!" For extra comic effect, I'll suggest to one person
they'll realise all of the other people on stage were just instantly hypnotised
by a teddy bear, but oh no, not them
...

Then of course, when they're suitably animated about that fact, I use the
teddy bear to instantly hypnotise or reinduce them
...

What I've done here, is started out with what could have been just a simple
group re-induction lasting a few seconds
...
I've managed to flesh it out out into a
pretty funny 10 minute routine
...
This would give the
appearance of being hypnotised by mail
...
With the right suggestion, we could even reinduce someone by
text message
...
Not just by teddy bear
...
” It can be
just about anything
...
” but
why stop there?
I like to transfer it to something external, something that might happen
spontaneously or something that's outside of the subject's control
...
”
And X can be an infinite number of things
...

When that person lifts their glass, you'll sleep
...

When this remote control device moves, you'll sleep
...

Endless, entertaining routines just from a simple re-induction, limited only
by your imagination
...
How about these:
Dominoes re-induction – when the person next to you falls against you,
you'll sleep
...

Count to 100 in your head, but whenever you reach 50, you'll instantly
sleep, I'll have to wake you and you'll have lost your place and have to

start counting again from 1 – this is great to keep a subject occupied while
you're working with others
...

You could also have a reverse alarm clock – Normally an alarm clock
wakes you up, but when this one rings or bleeps, you'll instantly sleep
...

Hold your breath and the instant you let any breath escape you'll instantly
sleep
...

But even if you're not that adventurous you could just get someone to
recite a children's nursery rhyme, suggesting that when they get to a
particular word, they'll sleep
...
If your interest is Street Hypnosis and you want to
upload videos to really get people thinking, I would imagine you could
create some nice looking videos from the following scenarios:
Give the following suggestion to a hypnotised subject:
When you walk past that public telephone over there, you'll be convinced
you hear it ringing and want to answer it
...
(Now, you start recording after this and just overdub the sound of a
telephone ringing during editing
...

or
In a minute, I'll approach you and you'll greet me as if you've never met me
before, as if you've never been hypnotised but whenever I hand you this
plastic drink bottle, you'll be instantly hypnotised again, your eyes will
remain open but you'll happily give me your watch, wallet, phone and
house keys or anything else I ask for
...

Then, you send them off and only then do you start to record
...
But guess what? That doesn't matter because this will just
convince your viewers that it's real and not always a sure thing
...

Obviously, as I've already said, if you do use any of these examples, you'll
want to adjust the wording of the suggestions to suit your own
performance style
...

So, let's just summarise what I've talked about
...
Then I
gave you some tips about the best times to use a re-induction for
entertainment hypnosis
...

Hopefully, through all of this, I've also helped to get your creative juices
flowing
...
)

JENNAS THUMB THING
Presented by Reg Blackwood
http://www
...
com
Description
With a few carefully selected words, the performer uses a magnetic
influence to quickly and dramatically affect, from a distance, the hand
movements of any number of people, from a single spectator to an
audience of many
...


It can be delivered either to a single spectator or an entire theatre audience
and can even be used as a demonstration on the television or radio where
the home audience participate and experience it for themselves
...

Explanation
This nice little hypnosis-style effect relies on eye fixation, imagination,
suggestion and the ideomotor effect
...

The following is delivered confidently, noting where the language used
encourages disassociation by referring, for example, to the thumb or that
thumb, not your thumb
...

Keep your elbow bent and relaxed, away from your body, lean forwards
slightly and raise the thumb to eye level
...


Keep your eyes focused on the the thumb-nail or the creases of the knuckle
and don't look anywhere else
...

However we can counter that by handing the thumb over to your
subconscious mind with some disassociative thoughts
...
It's no longer your thumb
...

And notice that it just floats there in space in front of you without any
conscious effort and already it doesn't even feel like it's yours any more
...

So watch what happens when I speak directly to your subconscious mind
and simply say:
IT MOVES LEFT, left, left, left, left
...

Are you making that happen yourself?
No
...
And I can also say
Right, right, right, right, right
and watch as that thumb begins to move in the opposite direction!
And I can say
Up, up, up, up, up
and it follows that suggestion too
...

Great!
Note
Because this effect won't work for everyone, it can indicate those in a
group who might make good hypnotic subjects and make for interesting
discussions about why it worked for some and not for others
...

The experienced hypnotist will also see how this can lead naturally into an
induction by encouraging the thumb to drift down toward the lap, the
spectator closing their eyes and drifting down with it
...

Reg Blackwood October 2012 http://regblackwood
...
regblackwood
...
It helps convince a participant of their ability to
be Hypnotized and can easily be converted into an instant induction
...

Here is the transcript for the Two Minute Handlock:

All Hypnosis is, is concentration, imagination and focus
...

Don't focus anywhere else
...

And that single idea is that these hands are becoming tighter and tighter
and tighter
...

Let them become tighter and tighter and tighter simply by you using the
power of your imagination and focusing on those knuckles, those fingers
become tighter and tighter, locking those palms together
...

And now it's like I've spread glue over all of those fingers and under here
under the palms and it's just locking those fingers tighter and tighter
...

Brilliant
...

Fantastic
...

And now it's like they're steel, like they're made of steel and you can feel
those fingers pressing even harder
...

What happens, as soon as you try, is you find they just get tighter and
tighter and tighter
...

1
Feel them getting tighter now as that moment approaches
...

2
Getting even tighter now because on
3

Try and find that you can't pull them apart, they just get tighter and tighter
and tighter
...

Stop thinking about it and they just relax
...
Jonathan Royle – www
...
com
“I want you to imagine in your minds eye that I’ve just cut a lemon into
two halves
...
In fact if you
truly imagined what I suggested for you, this will indeed have occurred in
reality and by the way this is an example of a most simple suggestibility

test!”

·THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE POWER OF
SUGGESTION

In this short chapter we will deal with the subject of Suggestibility tests
...

These suggestibility tests are used whilst the subject is fully conscious at
the start of your act or therapy session if desired in order that you can
easily and quickly decide which of the people will make the best hypnotic
subjects
...

Others who are more confident of their skills ask for volunteers to come up
to the stage and then they do the tests only on those onstage volunteers, the
logic behind this being that one sincere volunteer is worth one hundred
pressed men
...

I would however in your early days advise you to do these tests upon the
entire audience, as then the law of averages will be in your favour
...

It really is all just a numbers game at the end of the day
...

When your career develops and you move onto larger capacity venues, you
will then be able to safely and confidently ask for volunteers who wish to
be hypnotised to come forward to the stage before you have even done any
suggestibility tests
...
Remember that in a
theatre which seats 1000 to 2000 people when you ask for volunteers at the
start you will get around 80 to 100 people coming up to the stage
...

In a theatre situation, you will have almost as many volunteers on stage as
would be in the entire audience during the early days of your career in
pubs and small clubs! So you see, it really is all down to the law of
averages and the numbers game
...

Don’t let this deter you though, as upon having read this course you WILL
be able to do an excellent show in pubs and clubs until you progress to the
larger venues
...
Also in pubs it is not wise to let
your show start too late as, due to the drinking and the fact people who are

drunk cannot be hypnotised, it is wise your show starts before they have all
had one to many to drink
...
In other words, in many of the cases if you got them to do as I
describe then it would be physically impossible to separate their hands or
open their eyes even without the verbal suggestion element coming into
play!
However as these tests are all presented in a manner which makes the
subject believe that whatever occurs is due to our suggestions, when these
things do occur for whatever reason whether physical, physiological or
suggestion, the subject comes to believe that it was all due to your
suggestions and so will more readily accept and react to any future
“genuine” suggestions that we may give them
...
Then when it does occur, as indeed it will, the subject always
believes our verbal suggestions to have been the cause of what they now
are feeling and/or experiencing and so in turn this compounds their belief
in our powers even more and from that moment any “genuine” suggestions
will always get a successful response as the subject is now conditioned to
belief they will and expect they will work and so in turn they will
...

Examine closely all the suggestibility tests and induction’s which I teach

you and you will, without fail, see that each one has an element of it either
being guaranteed to happen or of some part, feeling or sensation being
guaranteed to occur which the subject then comes to believe are due to
your verbal suggestions and in turn cements into their mind the belief and
expectancy that all future suggestions will indeed be 100% effective also
...
This conditions them to react in
a certain way when asked certain things and makes your overall job easier
...
This is because the
key element of trance is fixation of attention and concentration on one
point of focus
...
On
theatre shows however you will have loads of people with their hands
locked together so how do you choose which will be the best subjects to
use?
Well very obviously those people whose hands are shaking violently as
opposed to just locked together are by far the most suggestible subjects, as
indeed they have so far reacted better to your suggestions than anyone else
...


Next you would of course eliminate people who seem drunk or high on
drugs, people who appear under the age of 18, anyone who looks petrified
being on stage and lastly if there are enough people on stage with their
hands locked together those people who just volunteered without their
hands being locked together
...

From the remainder, the “handshakers” are excellent subjects
...

Although experience of performing will give you an almost sixth sense of
who to pick here follow some important signs to look for which are
indicative of a potentially good subject
...

The reason for this being that hypnosis is co-operation and not
confrontation
...

They have experienced the state of hypnosis before so they know it exists

and now they just need a catalyst if you like, to renter the state and you
serve this purpose for them
...

So what actual visual clues are there that people are indeed doing as you
suggest and taking it all seriously? Well basically, it’s a case of using your
common sense here
...
For
example, if you suggest that their hands are getting tighter and tighter
together all the time and you can visually see that their hands are turning
red with the pressure they are using to squeeze their hands together then
obviously they are reacting well to your suggestions
...

Body language plays a part, those that will be good subjects will usually
have similar patterns of body language which of course you will learn
through hands on practical experience
...

Anyway, enough about what the suggestibility test is used for or how to
spot potentially good subjects, lets now explain a few actual suggestibility
tests, which can be used to narrow down the selection process
...

THE ARM DROP TEST

This test, if used at all, is used right at the start to find which people in the
audience are already in a nicely relaxed state and as such would make
potentially good subjects for use upon the stage, it also shows you which
members of the audience are able to relax when they want to, as once again
these type of people make excellent subjects
...
They are then told to place the lower part of their right
arm (near the wrist) resting upon the top of their extended left forefinger
...
Next they are told to relax every muscle in
their bodies and especially in their right arm so that all the weight of the
right arm rests upon the left forefinger
...
You count 1,2,3, and on
the count of three they take their fingers away
...

Their arm will have fallen, as it will be limp, loose, relaxed and heavy and
that’s what you are looking for, the people who have relaxed easily in this
manner
...
So in this test the idea is just to see who
can relax quickly when asked to and indeed those people whose hands fell
into their laps rapidly have passed this test with flying colours! This one is
not a suggestibility test as such it’s more a way to see who follows your
instructions to the letter and who can relax easily
...

FINGERS CLOSING TEST

This is a suggestibility text of a natural type
...
You ask them to interlock their
fingers so that the fingers of the left hand are against the back of the right
hand, and the fingers of the left hand are against the back of the left hand
...

You then ask them to extend their two forefingers, so that the tips of each
outstretched finger are touching
...
You yourself have got your hands in
the same position as their hands, as you suggest that by the count of 3 their
fingers will be touching just as they were beforehand, that should the try to
keep them apart then the fingers will just draw nearer and nearer together
...

A

They are getting so close now, that they are almost touching as those
magnets become so powerful and pull your fingertips together
...


N
...

As you do this, you close your own two fingers together slowly, so that by
the time you say the number three, your own fingertips are touching
...


You then get the people who’s fingertips were touching by the count of
three to place a hand up, this makes it easier for you to gauge the response
level which with this test is usually extremely high
...

I will however, mention how it can be used differently when working in
smaller venues where there is not enough room to have lots of people
coming to join you on the performance area
...
At
this point, you would say, “OK now, everyone, still believing in the worlds
strongest superglue which sticks your hands tightly together, I’d like you
to try and separate your hands (law of reversed effort takes effect here), but
you’ll find the harder you try to separate them the more they will stick
together tightly
...
(give them a few seconds then say) Right,
that’s enough, just relax your hands now and stop trying
...
Also anyone else who just found their hands difficult to
separate who wishes to experience the state of hypnosis, please come this
way towards me
...
B
...
However, it solves the limited space problem
...
Remember though,
as with anything in life, there will always be exceptions to the rules and as
such, you must always use your common sense and learn to think on your
feet
...
You simply suggest that the moment you tap them on the back of the
hands their hands will spring apart, as if two magnets were repelling each
other
...
K
...
”
Just as imagination allowed them to stick together due to suggestion, so it
will also allow them to part due to suggestion
...
As
you will have noticed in the “Know you Lines” chapter, on large theatre
shows only, I separate their hands straight away, if I wish to return them to
the audience, or, if I wish to use one of the induction’s from the next
chapter which requires them to have their hands separate at the time
...
Their hands
would still be locked together and they would be held against their chest
area
...
Once on the floor with their
eyes closed, I would suggest to them, that their eyes will remain tightly
closed at all times until I say otherwise and then, that when I take hold of
their arms, their hands will immediately separate
...
” The moment they separate their hands, you use
this as an opportunity to deepen the light trance they are in by saying, “The
moment I drop your arms to the floor, it will not disturb you, in fact, it will
serve to send you deeper to sleep, 10 times deeper to sleep” (then drop
their arms to floor as you say) “Sleep and Relax”
...
You now
suggest to them that their left hand has got a pile of heavy books upon it,
which are so heavy, that their hand is being pushed downwards
...

You keep suggesting things along these lines, that the left hand holds the
heavy books and right hand is being pulled up into the air by the helium
balloon
...
As such, their left hand will move
downwards, as if a heavy pile of books is upon it, and their right hand will
move upwards, as if tied to a helium filled balloon
...

THE PERFUME BOTTLE TEST
You remove a fancy cut glass bottle from your pocket and explain that it
contains the most powerfully scented perfume in the world
...

You tell everyone to raise their hand into the air the second they smell the
scent come their way, which, as it’s so potent, will take only a few seconds
...
You then drink the contents to
prove your point and people will be amazed as they will swear they smelt
the scent travel around the room, trust me, this does, if presented

convincingly, work
...
You have them place
their arms outstretched in front of them, and get them to place their hands
flat against each other, you then command them to start rubbing their
hands backwards and forwards against each other, as quickly as they can
...
All the time they are to keep rubbing
their hands together and, if they concentrate, then by the count of 1 their
hands will be getting hot and sticky, as if coated with superglue
...
OK everyone, as you hold your hands interlocked, the warmth and
stickiness you felt, is already locking them tightly together (you then go
into normal patter for handclasp)
...
But, as this is so obvious, people don’t realise this to be the case
and attribute it to your suggestions, which not only gives them a greater
belief in your powers, but as they feel their hands are hot and sticky, do not
be surprised if it becomes easier for them to believe that there is super glue
on their hands, sticking them together tightly
...
So the order of tests would go:
1

Arm drop text

2

Finger closing test

3

Warm fingers test

4

Handclasp test

5

Actual induction of Hypnotic Trance

The psychology behind them being placed in this order being that:
ARMDROP TEST
This shows you which can relax easily and quickly, and which do exactly
as you tell them to, it’s just a relaxation exercise, however it gets them
used to doing as you say
...

WARM FINGERS TEST
This takes but a matter of seconds to do prior to the handclasp and should,
as just described, take the belief in your powers, another step further
...

THE ACTUAL INDUCTION

As the people you are using, have probably reacted successfully to tests 1,
2, 3 and 4, you can be sure as they are now conditioned to do as you say,
they will enter the Hypnotic Trance
...
S
...
P
Do as many shows as possible, as soon as possible and once you’ve gained
confidence in your skills, you will then be able to speed up the whole
process
...

The only thing which you may not quite have now, which will enable you
to do this, is 100% faith in yourself and your new skill
...

I will end this chapter by telling you of a “Handclasp” style test in which it
is, if they do as you say, physically impossible for 99% of people to
separate their hands
...

I personally use this method of “Handclasp” at the start of the second half
of my theatre show, in order to get some new people upon the stage, whom
I can then use to demonstrate how I am able to place between 12 and 40
people or more into trance in less than sixty seconds
...
before placing them into trance to
demonstrate your art
...
Fingers
wide open and thumbs up in the air
...
Interlock your fingers and push
in together as closely as you can
...
Now push arms out hard, until elbows crack,
and push your palms away from you as much as you can
...
2, just lift your hands up above your
head now and push your palms up towards the clouds, as high up into the
sky as you possibly can and on 3, keep pushing your hands up high into
the sky, and now just try to separate your hands, the harder you try, they
stick tighter together
...
OK, everyone, firstly I’d like you all to stand up where you are
so that we can all have a good look at each other, now walk this way,
towards the stage, and I promise you, I will not keep you up here if you
don’t want to take part
...
B
At this point, loads of people will come towards the stage and as they do
so you say:
“OK everyone, the moment I touch your hands, they will immediately
spring apart and it will feel as though you’ve received a slight harmless
electric shock in your arms
...
For anyone
who still keeps their hands together, just get them to reverse the procedure
which got their hands into this position in the first place
...

You get between 12 to 24 people to come up, dependant on the stage size
etc
...

It is at this point, that the 12 to 24 people are lined up in a straight line,
when you can follow the details in the next chapter, in order to be able to
place all of them into a trance in less than sixty seconds
...

And that’s where this chapter ends
...
So hold onto your seats and
leave your misconceptions behind, as we enter the hypnotic world, where
there really are NO LIMITS
...
Jonathan Royle which is available from Amazon
...
UltimateHypnosisCourse
...
regblackwood
...
Now it seems there are Street
Hypnotists everywhere and looking at the way most of them do it, that's
really not a good thing
...
I'm highly trained, highly experienced and (I
like to think) highly entertaining, so never thought it would be an issue
...
My issue with it Street Hypnosis
is a completely different one
...
After all, the way I
do it and teach it, there's no reason why it shouldn't be
...

Here are ten reasons why, in my view, most Street Hypnotists are going
about it the wrong way
...
Seriously, you're making all
hypnotists look bad
...

You're meant to be a street performer, entertaining crowds of people, not
molesting individuals
...
Anyone can do it
...

Entertain A Crowd
What's the point of being THE Hypnotist if nobody is watching? It's meant
to be entertainment
...
Even better:
Get paid for doing it
...
So What?
Big deal
...
The question is: What
are you going to do with it? Where to next?
Everything Old Is New Again
There's a so-called new wave of hypnotists saying there's no such thing as
hypnosis, there's no such thing as a hypnotic state
...

Clients and volunteers don't want to be educated, they want to be
hypnotised
...
Entertain them!

Take your new, highly researched, evidence based model of hypnosis and
stick it where it belongs: In a text book
...
Being "a bit like that bloke
off the telly" isn't going to get you anywhere
...
Audiences
love the mystique behind inductions and re-inductions
...

YouTube Is NOT An Audience
Stop performing only for the camera, you're not on TV and probably never
will be
...
And your mate's bedroom? It's neither a street nor a TV studio
...
Get out of the classroom and get some real
experience
...

Don't Be A Clone
A scripted approach to hypnosis makes you look like a pale imitation of
the script-writer
...

Much better to have ten things that will work on one person
...
Fisher
MagicAL EXcellencE
This has been a stock item in my mix and mingle act for over a dozen
years, and not once has ever been questioned nor disputed
...
The intent of this routine is to bridge the gap between
magic and hypnosis allowing the performer to effortlessly lead from one to
the other or to simply create the illusion that you can perform feats of
hypnosis when you might not be ready to so
...
the deck is always shown to be
normal
...

REQUIREMENTS
One Svengali deck of cards and plenty of confidence
...
Also commonly known as the 'short and
long ' deck
...
The force cards are
all the same, for the purpose of this description , we shall refer to the force
card as the 9 of hearts
...
These force cards are all minutely shorter in
height than the indifferent cards and are arranged force card, indifferent ,
force card, indifferent throughout the entire deck
...
g
...
If you flick them the other, then you'll see a whole deck of 9s
...

ROUTINE
Approaching a small group of people , , I always do this with a group
that has at least one lass in it
...
when they say stop , you allow them to take the card
...
Ask the guy to show
everyone the NINE OF HEARTS! This will get a laugh immediately, as
the person to put the card back in the deck, holding the same break from
whence they took the card, so he puts it back in the same place, somewhere
near the middle of the deck
...
Immediately lift the top card and reveal
it to be the 9H !
Allow this moment to sink in, it's a very strong psychological moment and
sets up what is still to come
...

''OKAY, WHEN YOU SEE YOUR CARD IN THE DECK , PLEASE
SHOUT STOP !''
As you do this, lift the deck and riffle through it so that everyone can see
the faces of the cards
...
They will not see
their card
...

''DID YOU LOOK IN THE MIDDLE ? ' they will answer YES
'' YOU SHOULD HAVE BEEN LOOKING ON TOP !" as you do this flip
the top card over to reveal the 9H
...

By riffling down the deck , cut small packets of cards onto the table, 5
maximum
...

''WOULD YOU LIKE PILE NUMBER ONE OR WOULD YOU LIKE TO
MOVE ON"
The first part of this sentence should be spoken quietly with the last two
words almost shouted as a command!
Normally they will choose to move on, if not and they choose pile number
one " JUST GOES TO SHOW , REVERSE PSYCHOLOGY WORKS !''
If they choose to move on, repeat the sentence this time emphasizing no
...

On the third pile just ask QUIETLY '' would you like pile number three?''
at this point normally one person will say yes but the rest will say no take
number 4
...
gather up all the piles that are not
selected and say '' A FREE CHOICE '' and turn over the top card on the
selected pile AGAIN THE 9H !!
Collect the deck together again , cut it a few times
...
Slide off the actual top
card (9H) and table it, ask several of the people to place their hands over
the tabled card covering it completely
...
Closing the deck,
the position you should now be in is as follows, a 9H on the table covered
by several people's hands ( they all believe this to be an indifferent card) ,
you holding a squared up deck with a 9H sticking half way out of it
...
turn your hand over , with the deck , face down in your
open palm grip
...

Let this sink in ! allow them to realise what must be the case and to
remove their hands and turn over the tabled card ! Don't say a word just
smile
...

HYPNOSIS STAGE
Table the deck and , turning to the female of the group , ask if she's ever
been hypnotized
...

Ask one of the group to hold the deck tightly so that no one can do
anything with it
...
From my own personal view I
prefer her to be stood on my right hand side
...

Have the lass hold out her left hand and get her to relax , supporting her
forearm with your left hand, Using your right hand , point to the lines on
her palm and explain how if she focuses enough , she will begin to see
these lines start to move
...

At this point , with confidence, say ''TRY RAISING YOUR HAD A
LITTLE '' as you do this , bring her hand up to approximately 9 inches

from her head
...

'' NOW, I WANT YOU TO IMAGINE THAT YOU HAVE A SET OF
SUPER MAGNETS BOTH SET IN THE ENDS OF YOUR FINGER
TIPS AND IN YOUR EYEBROWS
...
''
Initially use your right hand to direct this motion and then place it on the
nape of the neck of the lass ,palm open , flat onto the nape
...
"
as you do this use your left hand to guide the lass's forearm towards her
head
...
As her fingers do touch her
forehead simultaneously move your left hand to her left hand to act as
support and use your right hand on the nape of her neck to move her head
forward and down
...
AND WHEN I BRING YOU
UP I WANT TO PROVE THIS TO YOU
...

Use your left hand to raise her head back to normal position and then
remove hands immediately
...

Now , draw attention to the cards being held by the other member of the
group
...
riffle
through a few times, turning the cards upside down and back again
...

then place the deck back in the hands of the previous spectator (cutting it
as you do)
...

As she goes to shake your hand with her left hand , immediately grip it and
raise it back to her forehead, your right hand moving back to the nape of
her neck , bringing her back to the 'hypnotised' position ,

AND SLEEP !
This must be done smoothly and quickly firmly but gently
...
again raise her head to normal position,
remove your hands
...

Look at the lass, and say NOW TELL EVERYONE WHAT YOU SAW
...

this should coincide with the lass telling everyone that the whole deck was
the nine of hearts
...
packet the cards and put them away
...


Post Script
...
It is just that, but in this case it is
not intended to actually induce the person
...
you want the maximum
disbelief and confusion to be established
...
please let me know how you got on
with it
...
Fisher - alex@alexdfisher
...
uk

INDUCTION METHODS
By: Dr
...
UltimateHypnosisCourse
...
”
“But you should have learnt the true secret off by heart now and that’s the
fact it’s all down to belief and expectancy and following the simple steps,
which I am explaining to you in this course, then success will be yours
...
By now, you will have hopefully
assimilated all the other knowledge which I have revealed to you, if not,
then please go back to page one, read through it all again and digest until
you do understand what I’ve said
...

Basically speaking, the success of the hypnotic induction relies on the
belief and expectancy within the mind of your potential hypnotic subject
...
also
help in a huge way
...

So step A is the belief and expectancy within the volunteer’s mind
...
They themselves, if carried out
as instructed, will either confuse them, disorientate them, or in some way
do both
...

So follow the guidelines and you’ll have great success with your hypnotic
induction’s
...

1
The more confident you are in your own skills and talents, the more
successful you will be as a result in all that you do
...

So practise, practise and practise some more
...

Instead practise on new faces in bars etc
...
But remember this, you are the only one that will

know this is the first time you’ve ever done this, as far as they are
concerned, you’ve been doing it for years and are a true master of your
craft
...

Anyway, I’ve tried to dispel any doubts which you may still have and
hopefully I’ve done that, if not, you’ll have to pluck up the courage to try it
all out and then hindsight will tell you that what I’m teaching you is 100%
true in every way
...

FALLING BACKWARD INDUCTION
You get the subject to stand with both feet together on the floor, hands
down by their sides unless this is being done after the locked hands in
which case they are told to place their hands closely against their chest
...
You stand to the left of
them and place your right foot flat against the back of their heels so it can
act as a pivot if required
...
”
You have now still got your right middle finger on the centre of their
forehead, just above the bridge of their nose, as you count from one to
three and give the suggestions of relaxing and falling back, as I will
describe in a moment, you draw your middle finger lightly across the
centre of the subjects forehead, so that by the count of 3 it is almost ready
to slide towards the top of their head
...
When you have
given your suggestions and the person starts to fall back, all you need do is
lower your right arm from their head, down to their upper back area and
just cushion their fall back so they don’t hurt themselves
...

On some occasions, if I feel it is a difficult subject, I will prior to getting
them to tilt their head back and close their eyes, get them to take some
really deep breaths in, hold them a few seconds and then out
...
This means that when you tilt
their head back and tell them to close their eyes, they will then feel a little
dizzy already and this brings the self-hypnosis angle into play again
...
This
has the extra effect of knocking them off balance and disorientating them
even more
...

From a verbal point of view, the whole lot would go as follows:
“OK sir (or madam)
...
Tilt your head well back and close your
eyes
...

In a few moments, I’m going to count from 1 to 3 and on the count of 3,
when I say sleep, you will feel yourself falling back, but I won’t let you
fall and hurt yourself, instead you’ll just fall into a beautifully relaxed
state
...

1

You can feel yourself falling backwards now into a beautifully relaxed
sleeplike state
...
”
THEY WILL NOW BE IN THE HYPNOTIC TRANCE

If the subject does not start to fall of their own accord, you can always use
the fact that your feet against the back of their heels acts as a pivot to tip
them back gently, so that to the audience it appears as if they have just
fallen back into your arms
...
This has the effect of
knocking them even more off balance and as a result they then fall
backwards into your arms
...

The great thing with this induction on a theatre stage is that all the
volunteers can be lined up in a straight row and one by one, after each
other, they can be placed into trance using this method
...
In this case, the volunteers would be face on to the
audience and they fall backwards away from the audience
...
For
example, in a funny shaped venue, you might have to have the subjects
standing sideways onto the audience before making them fall backwards
...
It’s quick, safe and works well,
I wish you much luck with it
...
The reason it works is the same, and even
without belief and expectancy being considered, if this is done correctly,
then people will feel themselves falling forwards into your arms
...
They

are told to keep staring directly into your eyes at all times and then you
proceed as follows:
Verbally you say something such as, “I’m going to count backwards from 3
to 1 and on each descending number you’ll feel yourself falling forwards,
but I won’t let you fall and hurt yourself, instead you’ll just fall into a
beautifully relaxed, dreamy, sleeplike state
...

2, You can feel yourself falling forwards, more with every breath you take,
ever noise you hear and every word that I say
...
”
As you say this or similar, the physical element is as follows:
From the moment you start talking, your fingers of each hand are placed
firmly, flatly and gently on the sides of their head in line with their
forehead
...
But, perhaps more importantly,
as your fingers are firmly against their head, it has the effect of gently
pulling their head forwards towards you, and also acts as a non verbal
suggestion to do the same
...
At the same time to
promote this further, you take one small step backwards, as you count each
number and as they are to stare into your eyes at all times, it will have the
effect of their eyes following yours, and as such their body will move
forwards more
...
This means that to keep their
eyes in line with yours, they have to lean over slightly and when they do,

they will reach that point of no return, and will suddenly be falling
forwards into your arms
...
Combine all this with
belief and expectancy and the shock element of you commanding SLEEP,
just as they reach that point of no return and now I’m sure you’ll be able to
understand why this induction works so well
...
You then proceed as
I will detail in a second, although you’ll have to adapt things for each
person
...
The moment their arm has floated up to
their face and touches their nose, it will instantly fall back into their lap
and they drift into an instant deep relaxing sleep
...

The standard phrases, which are used by all hypnotists and which are
detailed at the end of this chapter, are inserted at appropriate points, to
relax them even more
...

“As you breathe deeply and relax more with every breath you take, every
noise you hear and with every word I say, you’ll notice that the deeper you
go over the next few minutes, the better you will feel and the better you
feel, the deeper you will go
...
And just notice that with each breath you
take and ever noise you hear, your finger now becomes so light with that
helium balloon attached, that it is lifting up off your lap and up into the air
...
(Proceed in this fashion until their hand is up off
their lap, and starts moving upwards) You now notice that as your hand
floats up higher, being pulled up higher into the air all the time by the
helium filled balloon, that your arm is now so light and follows suit
...
Now just notice that your hand is floating towards your face, nearer
and nearer to your nose, all the time (Continue in this vein etc
...
(Continue in
this vein etc)
...
B
...
Remember, paint a picture with your
words, leave no doubt in their minds what you wish to occur and as such
belief, expectancy and the power of suggestion will do the rest
...

You place your right hand middle finger, firmly onto the central area of the
head, just above the top of their forehead
...
To do this they will have to push their eyeballs
upwards underneath their eyelids
...
As long as you make it clear that even when you ask them
to try and open their eyes that they must in actual fact keep staring
upwards with their eyes as if staring through the hole in their head, then
this will work
...

The subject will believe his failure in opening his eyes is due to your
suggestions, and then so that it comes very unexpectedly, you suddenly tilt
the subjects head forward onto their chest as you say, ”Eyes tightly closed
at all times and just sleep”
...

INSTANT INDUCTION
Here follows the wording of a very effective and quick, induction method
...

They will become tightly stuck, in fact, you cannot open your eyes
...
Try if you
want to, but you cannot open yours eyes
...

Then continue up the line saying “And neither can you, or you, or you, etc
...
OK, now everyone, eyes stuck together, but your feet are
now stuck to the floor, yes your feet are stuck, rigid to the floor, you
cannot move from where you are standing, however hard you try
...
Relax, relax, stop trying and relax as you go down completely into
trance
...
Whenever I say, 1, 2, wide-awake you will instantly be
wide-awake, and do whatever I have told you to do
...
And whenever I say
SLEEP, as quickly as this, (snap fingers) a snap of the fingers, you will
instantly return into a deep sleep, but each time you re-enter it, for you it
will be 100 times deeper and 100 times more enjoyable
...
B
...
It is for this reason, that the harder
to do routines are left until near the end of the act, as by then everyone will
have gone in and out of trance several times and now will be so deep that
almost anything is possible
...
I will also take this opportunity to give you the address of a
company, who can supply you with numerous books on Stage Hypnosis
...
BS3 4SN
...
A
...

HYPNOTIZING HECKLERS (CEREBRAL ANOXIA)
Allow me to point out here and now, that this method is included for
information purposes only, I would never, ever dream of using it myself
and anyone who does try it, does so at their own risk
...
BE WARNED
...
You
may be asking what has that got to do with you? Well, it is very easy to
render someone unconscious by pressure on the Carotoid Arteries, leading
to the brain
...
Under many byelaws, laws of a country etc
...
In fact, part of a permission to perform in the UK will read
that only psychological methods may be used to induce hypnosis
...
It is absolutely
forbidden, for any member of P
...
S
...
or A
...
H
...
to use it in any
circumstances, any reputable person would never dream of using it on
someone
...
Here’s how it is done for information purposes only
...
Do
this with their head tilted way, way back
...
There is
one on each side of their neck, you can often see them, and if not, you can
feel them very easily as they pulsate and throb beneath your fingers
...
Now ask the
person to breath deeply, keep the pressure on until the person goes limp, if
the word sleep is shouted at this time, as far as the crowd watching will be
concerned you have just placed that person under hypnosis
...
However, should you
accidentally keep the pressure on a few seconds later, the person may end
up dead or a cabbage for life, with permanent brain damage
...
If you did not kill them you
can be convicted of attempted murder or assault, with intention to
endanger life, or grievous bodily harm
...
Should you
ever see someone use this method then please report them to the Mindcare
Organisation and we will investigate, as anyone using this method is not fit
to call themselves a hypnotist
...


THE CRAIG WILLIAMS MICROPHONE INDUCTION
This is an induction method, which is excellent and a very good up and
coming hypnotist, by the name of Craig Williams, has made it a
masterpiece in his hands
...

This induction is very quick and looks amazing to the audience, it is
usually done whilst the subjects hands are still locked together
...
You tell the subject to stretch out their arms, straight out in front of
themselves, this means that the distance between you must be such that it
gives them room to do this
...
In your own right
hand, you have got hold of the microphone
...
You also instil into them the belief
and expectancy that the moment the microphone taps them on the head
they will instantly relax every muscle in their body from the tips of their
toes to the tips of their fingers and that their eyes will immediately shut
and remain closed until you say otherwise
...
It is held at a slanted angle, pointing towards the subject’s
forehead
...
You then count backwards from three to one and use the
standard phrases as you would in the falling backwards induction etc
...
Then on each descending
number you bring the mike closer towards their eyes, so that by the count
of one, and the word sleep, the microphone will tap them upon the head

and act as the trigger to enter hypnosis
...
As they do so, if you take a small step towards
them, then they will start to fall backwards anyway, but as you have a firm
grip of their arm you don’t let them fall, instead you just allow them to
lower to the ground in a smooth, steady motion
...

Once again, as with all things detailed in this course, experience will teach
you more in one show, than any book, video or audiotape ever could
...

THE BODY FLOP INDUCTION
For this dramatic looking induction, your subject is sitting in a chair with a
low back, this is so that you will be able to push the upper area of their
body forwards by leaning against their back area, so obviously if the chair
back was too high then this would not be possible
...
You then get them to close their eyes and
at this point you must be standing directly behind them and the chair in
which they are sitting
...


“OK, (subjects name here) just relax
...
(Here pacing, leading and rapport come into play strongly)
...
The moment that I say sleep, you will
instantly drift into a deeply relaxed sleeplike state
...

Three : With every breath you take, every noise that you hear and every
word that I say, you are relaxing more and more as you concentrate only on
your rhythm of breathing which is now so deep and regular
...

And on……
One: Sleep, deeper, deeper and deeper to sleep
...
As you are coming to the words “And on one”,
prior to saying the trigger word sleep (drawn out), this is the point of
importance
...
As you say the word sleep (which is drawn out), your hands lift
their arms up off their lap and sweep them off, so that they quickly fall off
and down besides them hanging in mid air, at exactly the same time you
lean forward so that your chest area pushes the upper area of their body
over and their head flops down almost into their own lap
...
This is a disorientation method par excellence, as one
minute they are being massaged on the shoulders and the next second they
are simultaneously flopping forwards with their head falling towards their
own lap and their arms have fallen off their lap at exactly the same time
...
To the audience it looks so
impressive, as the subject suddenly seems to flop forward in their chair
like a rag doll as you command sleep
...
This is 100% reliant on belief, expectancy and your supreme
self-confidence as are all instantaneous induction techniques, which you
will ever use
...
” You suddenly, whilst facing
the subject, place your right arm on the back of their neck and pull them
gently towards you, with the end result of their head being rested upon
your shoulder
...
As their mind is already on something
else, it’s already distracted (see keys to hypnosis) and with the shock
element of suddenly moving towards you and commanded to sleep and
very quickly followed up with commands to go deeper etc
...
The moment they do have their head
against your shoulder, you must follow up immediately with a quick trance
deepening method, as explained elsewhere
...

This induction works because of the shock element being so unexpected at
the time it occurs and as they have been trying to separate their hands with
no success they have no reason to disbelieve any further commands as

such they will be acted upon instantly
...
You ask your on stage subjects, if any of
them have been hypnotised before
...
During this,
the people who have been hypnotised before are watching and this takes
the belief and expectancy concept one step further
...
You then return to the subjects who have been placed under
hypnosis before and ask three quick questions
...
”
As you say this, your right hand is lifted up in front of their face and as

you command sleep, in a raised tone of voice, your right hand moves in a
downwards motion in front of their face, so that the fingers are
outstretched and move down from above head, past their eyes and
downwards, which in itself, is a powerful non verbal suggestion of sleep
...
Remember, that as they’ve
been under hypnosis before, they know exactly how to react and your three
questions prior to the instant induction have done two things
...

B
It has acted as a brief reminder to them of how to act in trance
...

Someone who has been hypnotised before is, by far the best type of person
on whom to do instantaneous inductions, as they know how to act in trance
and their belief is 100% complete, as they have experienced it first hand
...
I’m sure
you can now see why you need to have enormous confidence in your
abilities in order to make instant inductions work
...
As long as the subjects’ belief and expectancy in your powers is
totally 100% complete and as long as you truly have tremendous
confidence in your skills, and this is transmitted to the subjects through
your actions etc
...
As such the Handwave and Handshake
instant inductions can be done without asking any questions
...
However, the point which I am trying to make here is,
done with belief, they will instantly re-enter trance without any additional
psychological conditioning
...
You of course would only use instant
inductions on the most susceptible subjects (see elsewhere) this means the
odds are then even greater in your favour of it working
...
This really is as simple as it sounds,
you approach a subject, who you have observed will be very susceptible
after having unlocked their shaking hands etc
...
”
As you say the word sleep, you lift their arm into the air slightly, and then
move it down rapidly towards their lap, as you command in a loud voice,
“sleep
...

Incidentally, I have found from experience, that the downwards motion of
the handshake is more effective when made on an outbreath of the subject
(as they breathe out), all suggestions of relaxation and sleep are more
effective also when made as the subject breathes out, as this
psychologically implies letting go etc
...
In our version, we simply go up to a subject, ask
their name, the moment they reply, we extend our hand and clasp theirs
and then do the handshake motion, as we say “Ok (their name), just sleep
and relax
...
Lastly, if the
person says no when you ask if they will allow you to hypnotise them
quickly, you simply reply by saying “Well in that case (their name), I can’t
be bothered wasting my time on you
...
Because he feels he has one
up on you by saying no, he suddenly feels small when you say you can’t be
bothered wasting your time with him and here, the shock/surprise factor
comes in, as you shake his hand and in a raised voice command him to
sleep
...

CAN’T BE BOTHERED WITH YOU INDUCTION
This induction only works, because what you do comes as a real shock to
the subject and because you do it with such faith, confidence and
conviction, that they will instantly enter the trance
...

They would of course have just seen you place other people into trance and
will be waiting, anticipating, almost rearing, when you’ll come and do the
same thing to them
...
You do an induction such as the falling backwards
technique and prior to this you’ve had several susceptible subjects stand
directly in front of their chairs, which you’ve said they will sit in
...
You have just placed

someone into trance, and now walk along the line as if deciding whom to
pick to hypnotise next
...
You walk along the line
and when you reach the subject whom you are going to use this induction
upon, you stop for a moment which you did not do with the others, you say
nothing and just stare at him for a couple of seconds, this will scare him to
death, he will be so relieved 2 seconds later when you continue along the
line, that he will relax more, and let his defences down
...
“Oh, I can’t be
bothered with you, Sleep
...
It works due to shock, belief and
expectancy, in short, it’s the power of the moment and the power of the
unexpected which will make him close his eyes as he’s seen the others do
(he’s been conditioned), and he then enters trance
...
Remember this and you can
always adapt to suit any venue, audience or show situation
...
You then tell them to watch
the microphone as the moment is taps them upon the head, their heavy eyes
will shut tightly, their head will fall forwards onto their chest and they’ll
breathe deeply as they go to sleep
...
and make
funny noises as if the mike is an aeroplane
...
This “aeroplane” gag, can also be
used when the person has already been placed under hypnosis and you just

want to add a little variation, so, instead of using the trigger word sleep for
them to re enter trance, you use the aeroplane induction which takes only a
few seconds and helps add an extra little comedy elements to the
proceedings
...
Of course,
the real reason they’ve gone back under is because you’ve used a stage
whisper to put them back under by quickly and audibly to them (but not
through the mike) saying sleep
...

Yet another comical way you make them re enter trance is to say to them
“You wouldn’t go to sleep if you slapped yourself across the face would
you?” (They say no) “Of course you wouldn’t
...
” He then slaps himself across the face and as he does, so
instantly re enters trance, he would do anyway, but if in doubt, use a stage
whisper to say sleep to ensure that he goes under as he slaps his own face
...

They should be sitting on a chair, feet together firmly flat on the floor,
upright and looking directly at you, the hypnotist
...
You extend your own right arm and then extend your own right
hand index finger, whilst the rest of the hand remains like a clenched fist
...

You explain that you want them to stare at all times at your fingertip, they
must not move their head, only their eyes in order to follow the route
which your fingertip will take
...
The moment
that I say sleep, and tap you upon the head, you’ll instantly drift into a
deep, relaxing, dreamlike state
...
On 2, you can
feel your eyes starting to strain as they get so heavy and so tired, it’s so
much easier to just relax and let go
...
Now that you’re asleep, in a few moments I
am going to tap you on the head
...
”
NB
As they start off staring at your fingertip, which is above their eye line, the
key here is to strain their eyes as much as possible, as quickly as possible
...
So on 3 it starts above their eyeline, on
2 in line with their nose and 1 in line with their chin, which means by this
time, as they will still be trying to keep their eyes on your finger, their eye
lids will have shut naturally anyway, and because their eyes have been
very strained, it’s so much easier to leave them shut as you say sleep
...
This usually has the
effect of pushing their head back a bit, they resist and as such push forward

onto your fingertip with their forehead and then you suddenly remove your
finger as you say sleep and go deeper, which means that their head then
falls down onto their chest
...
” Whilst saying this, you simply use
your fingers as a lever against the front and back or their neck to make
them move their head down against their chest
...

THE SWAYING HANDCLAP INDUCTION
For this induction you have the subject standing just in front of their chair
...
You then say something such as:
“As you stand here, with your eyes closed, you notice that with each and
every breath that you take your body is relaxing more each second that
passes by
...
” (This
you then actually do) “So breathe in and out, in and out
...
”
N
...

Throughout all this talking, you’ve been progressively swaying them
further backwards and forwards, so much so, that if you were to set them
off swaying backwards again and did not stop them falling with your hand,
then they would indeed, fall backwards into their chair, or at least it would
be very difficult to stop themselves
...
The moment they are moving backwards, you clap
your hands by the person’s ear, as you simultaneously and very loudly
command sleep
...
” As you clap in the direction
they are going anyway, the sheer shock of the noise knocks them off
balance and they’ll fall all the way back into their chair, it also quite
literally shocks them into hypnosis
...
It
is the type of induction which can be suitably used in the therapists
consulting rooms, as well as upon the performance stage
...
For these styles of inductions the subjects must be sitting on
their chairs, feet together and flat on the floor, with hands and arms resting
upon their laps, with palms facing upwards and they should be sitting up
straight, as comfortably as is possible
...

What you say to the subject/s will be different each time and dictated by
the way in which the subject/s react to you suggestions
...
) Of course the standard phrases, which all
hypnotists use at some time, and are included at the end of this chapter,
will come in extremely useful during a progressive relaxation induction
...
As you
will by now know, the basic techniques of what makes an induction work
and of how rapport, observation, recognition and leadership dictate what
you say to the subjects in a progressive relaxation induction, I will now
give a few examples of additional distractions which can be offered to the
subjects mind to promote the onset of trance more rapidly
...
R
...

This is in essence a progressive relaxation induction (P
...
I), which is also
combined with a method to strain the subject’s eyes
...
R
...
’s and are told to focus upon a spotlight, or a point
on the ceiling, which they are not to take their eyes off (this also helps
strain the eyes)
...
You also explain that on each odd number as you count, they should
close their eyes and on each even number, they should re open their eyes
...
eyes shut
On 2……
...
eyes shut
On 4……
...
eyes shut
On 6……
...
Combine this with the
fact they are staring at one point all the time and I’m sure, you can
understand why their eyes become strained so quickly
...
You use your normal patter,
which is formulated at the time through a combination of the standard
phrases and the things that come to mind, due to rapport, observation,
recognition and leadership
...
By
the count of thirty, most, if not all people, will have had their eyes closed
for a while already, however, if their should still be the odd one or two

with eyes open, this is now the time to command everyone to close their
eyes, and you then proceed directly into your trance deepening patter, to
take them all to a deeper level of trance, in a very short space of time
...
R
...

To cut a long story short, the principles used are identical to any other
P
...
I
...

The lights should be in the fly’s (the area above your head at front of stage)
or front of house
...
In either case, the lights should be above the subjects
normal eye levels, so that they must strain their eyes in the first place in
order to see the light
...

MUSCULAR RELAXATION P
...
I
...
You start with their feet, and move around
their body, getting them to imagine the same thing happening for their
ankles, lower leg area, knees, upper leg area, hips and thighs, groin area,
stomach, chest, back, spine, shoulders, shoulder blades, the whole arm
area, wrist, hands, fingertips, neck, jaw, cheeks, brow muscles etc
...

You also, at various intervals along the way, insert some of the standard

phrases, such as “The deeper you go, the better you feel and the better you
feel, the deeper you will go
...
At the end, you would then say “Sleep”
firmly and implant your post-hypnotic suggestions
...
R
...
, should take between
six to ten minutes, dependent upon your speed of delivery
...

THE COUNTING BACKWARDS INDUCTION
To do this induction upon the stage to best effect, you should have your
voice recorded onto the background music, which you would use for any
normal style of induction
...
For example:
“As you stand up straight upon the stage, or sit comfortably in your chair,
you will retain perfect balance at all times
...

Now, you don’t know if you will go into a trance quickly, or if it will take
some time
...
”
YOU THEN CONTINUE, AS
PSYCHOLOGY CHAPTER
...
Your pace of wording should be such that it suggests
relaxation and then you end the induction as per the example in verbal
psychology chapter
...
This
whole induction should last no more than five minutes in total, from start
to finish and is “overdubbed” onto the induction music such as Jean
Michelle Jarres “OXYGENE” or TRANQUILITY, which is a tape
available from new age supply centres
...

Now imagine this, you have completed a few quick inductions and placed
a couple of people into trance, but still have about 60 or more people upon
the theatre stage, who have come up to have their hands separated
...
Anyone who is
standing up and not already in trance is told to stand with feet slightly
apart, so that they stand firm and steady, hands down by their sides (unless
still locked together) and then everyone in the audience is told to remain
silent for the next few minutes whilst people enter the trance state or
hypnosis, and then the fun will begin
...
You also
say that should you touch them upon the shoulder at anytime they will pay
special attention to what you say and ignore what you tell everyone else,
whilst still counting backwards in their minds
...
This dim
atmosphere in itself helps to promote the onset of trance
...
The audience will assume what they hear coming out
of the speakers at the time is what you are saying live, there and then
...
I will leave you to work some of this out for yourself, but they’ve
already been told, if you look back through what I’ve said at the start, that
should I touch them upon the shoulder they will ignore what you say to
everyone else and will know you are speaking to them and them only
...
This means that you
can touch people on the shoulder, talk to them and as the radio mike is
switched off, the audience will be unable to hear you and will assume that
what you are saying, is what they hear coming through the speakers
...

As the audience will only be able to see an outline of each person, it will
look most impressive to them as they listen to the induction, which they
assume is you speaking live, to also see people falling backwards onto the
stage or flopping forwards in their chairs like rag dolls, it will look most
impressive indeed
...

The post hypnotic suggestions are then given to everyone and lastly, in
order to narrow down the onstage 60 people to the best 12 subjects, you go
through a quick process of mind imagination screening, which is also quite
entertaining to the audience, as well as serving it’s required purpose
...
You will be able to
tell visually, by the subjects reactions to these simple, yet fairly amusing
tests, who will make the best subjects, and of course these are the people
who are kept on stage, the rest being slowly dismissed, once fully out of
trance
...
This means that the fun, entertaining routines start a lot quicker and
from the point of view of the audience, the show is much slicker and
quicker than many I could mention
...
You, at the end of
all this will already have extracted many laughs from the audience, who
will be thoroughly enjoying themselves and also will have selected your
best subjects for use throughout the remainder of the evening
...

1

Intro music with voice over introduction recorded upon it
...


3

Your opening comedy lines and talk about hypnosis
...


5

People have got to the stage area, whilst loud and exciting music plays
...
and establish rapport
...
to get about five
people into trance very quickly and to establish total belief and expectancy
...

8

9

Group deepening of induction is done in normal way
...

10

Everyone is awoken and obviously unresponsive subjects returned to
seats
...

12

13

The mind/imagination screening begins and good subjects selected
...
It saves the time needed to go to each person in turn and snap you
fingers prior to saying sleep, it also looks a little more dramatic than just
facing everyone and saying “OK everyone, I’m talking to you all now, so
just Sleep” (This is said as you snap your fingers in a downwards
movement, facing the whole group, they then all go back under at the same
time)
...
It’s quick and very impressive
...
This should not worry you however, as by this stage of the show,
all the onstage subjects should be real diamonds and worth their weight in
gold many times over
...
5mins)
(1
...
The interval in a theatre show realistically ends up being 20 to 30
minutes and then the second half of the show is done, which also keeps to
the one hour each way format, this makes the complete theatre show,
including intervals, two and a half hours inclusive, which for a stage
hypnotism show is standard practise these days
...
This means 10 minutes into the second
half, the show starts again properly, leaving 50 minutes in which to do
comedy sketches
...
The end result being,
however, that you have more volunteers to use if you wish, it kills time and
there would then only be 32 minutes to fill up with comedy sketch
routines
...

Please note, this is just an example running order, you are free to devise
your own and indeed, I would advise you to do so
...
The hypnotic induction can be made as much a
part of the show as the comedy routines you get the subjects to do
...
In a club
or pub show you would have a smaller audience and you’d have less
people to deal with, as result the whole procedure being much quicker
...


I hope this has not only given you an excellent idea for use of the verbal
psychology induction, but also, I hope it has given you a better
understanding in the way a hypnotic show is engineered and routined to
make a “whole” that is both fascinating and entertaining whilst looking
slick and professional
...
However, I hope you have
noticed that with all of the methods I’ve detailed, belief and expectancy in
the subjects mind is the biggest factor which works in our favour
...

I would stand upon a chair, with the subject on the left hand side of me,
with their right arm stretched up into the air, as high as they can get it
...
They are to stare at this
point at all times, you are now ready for the induction
...

“So on 3, as you stare intently at the bright white light, your eyes begin to
strain and you just want to fall into a beautifully relaxed state
...
But I won’t let you fall and hurt
yourself, instead I’ll just let you fall into a beautifully relaxed state
...
(the word sleep is drawn out
...
B
...
This does two things, it acts as a
disorientation method and a distraction for their conscious mind and also,
for some strange reason, it blurs your vision
...
Well,
obviously, we are using nowhere near that kind of pressure and the
pressure which we are using is indirect, as opposed to being directly on the
pressure point
...

What I have said may seem hard to believe, in this case I leave it to your
experience to give you a true picture
...
This
method although effective, is really just included for completeness,
although I’m sure at some point in the future a performer will make a
masterpiece of it
...

Well, now to an induction which relies totally on confusion and
disorientation, I will only explain how to do this induction briefly, because
if you’ve already really studied the rest of this course, then you will be
more than capable of working the rest out for yourself
...

Now experience the sensation of your hot, right hand becoming cold and
your cold, left hand becoming hot, as your heavy, left leg becomes lighter
and your light, right leg is becoming heavier all the time
...
, all this becomes too much and within a
short time the conscious mind shuts down and doesn’t even bother to
analyse the rubbish which you are presenting to it
...
The rest, as I am sure, you can
work out for yourself, to finish however, here’s an example of how to start
adding sleep/relaxation suggestions to the confusion script
...
”

SHOCK HYPNOSIS
This is just literally finding a most susceptible subject, whose hands have
locked together well, observing their body language to check that they feel
uneasy upon the stage, and then suddenly and most unexpectedly going up
to them and both loudly and firmly, shouting sleep into their ear as your
right arm pulls them back from a standing position to the floor, which
disorientates them
...


I have seen a very well known adult stage hypnotist do this very
successfully, on a regular basis, but believe me, it takes enormous
confidence and works because you shock the person into hypnosis, you
literally scare the person so much by your sudden actions, that they do
everything you say and are in fact then scared to do otherwise
...
To the audience it looks as
though Mr? just walks up to the subject, who is staring at their shaking
locked hands and knocks them on the back of the neck with the flat part of
his right palm, as he commands in a loud authoritative voice “sleep
...
Yes, your absolutely right, it looks very impressive,
one moment they are standing up, the word sleep is said, and suddenly
their legs fly up into the air and they fall down to the floor like a sack of
potatoes, asleep
...
However, for information purposes only, here’s what you do
...
You however,
have got your right hand on the back of their neck and can “cushion” their
fall to the floor
...
It should go without saying that this is a very dangerous stunt to use
and my advice would be not to use it, anyone doing so, does so at their
own risk
...
As I am sure you can imagine the shock of hearing the
word sleep shouted into your ear is very extreme to say the least, let alone
the shock of flying up into the air and then down to the floor
...
Impressive as this looks, and despite the fact I
have, in the early days of my career, used this technique, USE AT YOUR
OWN RISK
...
As you verbally suggest that the people are relaxing etc
...
Yes, just imagine that, you are
standing nowhere near them at the time, but they all start to collapse to the
floor “asleep” as if their legs have turned to jelly or rubber
...
So how is this miraculous induction
done, I can hear you say? Well, you would proceed as follows:
You choose the 12 most susceptible subjects from those whose hands
locked together and they are spread out around the stage, so that there is
room surrounding each of them when they fall to the floor “asleep”
...
By that, I mean their feet are
crossed over and are placed next to each other in this position, whilst flat
upon the floor
...
Once all of the people are in this
position, you explain that this is one of the fastest and most powerful
forms of Hypnosis known to mankind
...
As this music is loud and exciting and as we know

excitement breeds excitement, the onstage volunteers will be getting more
apprehensive all the time about what is to occur (belief/expectancy)
...
The lighting should also change to
suggest that something dramatic is about to occur
...

In fact, the more they shake, the more you will be going deeper to sleep
with every breath you take, every noise you hear and with every word I
say
...
You’ll
enjoy every minute of it, as the deeper you go, the better you will feel and
the better you feel, the deeper you will go to sleep
...
B
...
“Well, ladies and
gentlemen, be prepared to be amazed, as this one of the most powerful and
dramatic forms of Hypnosis know to mankind
...
”
(Turn back to the subjects and say) “ OK, now everyone, so on 3, already
many of you will be experiencing that rather strange sensation as your
whole body becomes so relaxed and as you stare intently at your hands,
your legs are becoming like rubber, so weak they cannot hold your body
up any longer and you just want to go to sleep
...
You cannot keep your balance, you can feel yourself falling, as your
legs become more weak and rubbery with every breath you take, every
noise you hear and every word that I say, so it is so much easier to relax
and sleep
...

N
...
At this point, anyone who may be standing up is approached from
the rear, so that they don’t see you coming and you hit the upper side area
of their right leg sharply with the side of your hand, as if doing a karate
chop
...

Most people will have gone under and fallen to the floor by then however
and of course, this additional “push” can be given to those that you feel
may be resisting a little, as you actually deliver the count back with patter
from 3 to 1
...

Then see what happens when someone knocks you on the side of the leg as
detailed, whilst they also shout, sleep, firmly into your ear, this time I’m
100% certain you’ll end up on the floor
...
As
they move towards the floor, their legs will naturally bend at the knee,
which brings them nearer to the floor, before they “fall” properly, which
means they will not freefall as far
...
Try it yourself, and
you'll see what I mean, it’s almost an automatic thing to “fall” to the floor
in this way, which is very similar to a sideways fall which some stuntmen
use, so that they do not get hurt
...
To do this many hypnotists who work theatres regularly,
have a nice soft carpet (size of an average stage) which they fix to the floor
with gaffer tape, along all four edges, so that no one can trip up
accidentally
...

However, as with all I describe in this course, proceed at your own risk
...

They are then told to close their eyes and relax their arms, so that you are
then holding the full weight of their arms and if you were to let go of them,
they would fall down into their lap
...

All this should take but a few seconds to sort out and then you physically
proceed by rotating their hands around in a circular motion, which in turn
will move their arms in the same way also
...
The rotation must be done “rhythmically” and at the same speed
throughout, so that it both distracts them consciously and also acts as a
very low level disorientation method, whilst having a calming “rock a bye
baby” affect
...
The moment you
command sleep, you simultaneously pull the subjects hands apart and, as
you will be holding each of their wrists in a separate hand, you not only
pull their hands apart, but also in a smooth motion you pull their arms
slightly towards yourself and downwards at the same time
...


The moment you have done this, you allow their arms to drop down by
their sides so that they feel lots of physical movements of their body which
act as non verbal suggestions of sleep, as they are downwards movements
...
In other words, you must be able to do it
without any hesitation
...
Verbally, you would do the
normal thing of, “I’ll count from 3 to 1 and on 1, when I say sleep you’ll
instantly enter a beautifully relaxed state and your eyes will remain closed
at all times, until I say otherwise
...
I hope you have noticed, that
besides belief and expectancy, another reason why this and most
inductions work is because of the ritualistic actions you carry out and the
importance which you attach to them, which in itself also heightens their
belief and expectancy
...
As
we said earlier, co-operation is a key word in hypnosis
...
And,
indeed, to them, that is exactly what it will appear to be
...
You do the “guaranteed
hand clasp test” prior to getting people up to be instantly entranced for
your world record attempt
...
The people whose hands are locked
together, via the guaranteed hand clasp, are brought up to the stage and
their hands are then separated, as detailed in the last chapter
...
So, when you ask for between 12 to 20
volunteers to remain on the stage and take part in the world record high
speed hypnosis attempt, you will have many takers, as they will want to
grab this second chance to be a star in any way that they possibly can
...

The people are standing with a slight gap between each of them, in a
straight row across the stage
...
You
then use the I
...
C
...
You then make sure they are standing
feet together and hands down by their side, as in the falling backwards test
...
All front of
house lights are switched off and the stage lighting is also made quite dim,
so that the light which they are staring at intently literally “blinds” them
and blurs their vision
...
In fact, if you have a
modern image, a pair of dark sunglasses would not go amiss during this
routine, so you can continue with no risk to your own vision
...
You then do your psychological

conditioning of what will occur by saying something such as:
“Ladies and Gentlemen, in 1993, a famous television hypnotist, by the
name of Alex LeRoy set a world record for high speed hypnosis
...
Well,
tonight, ladies and gentlemen, I don’t intend to break that record, oh no, I
intend to smash it
...
It
is also the most powerful method of hypnosis
...
” (Now turn to your subjects)
...
In a few moments I shall
touch each of you upon the forehead, and the moment that I do, you’ll
instantly fall back into my arms and enter a deep, deep hypnotic state, as
this is the fastest form of hypnosis known
...
”
(Turn to audience)
...
”
At this point the induction starts and everyone is placed under hypnosis as
I will detail in a moment
...
” (Here take a bow at your applause)
...
Or, implant the post hypnotic suggestion that, when you say
goodnight at the end of the show, they will all jump up out of their chairs
and shout out loudly,
“WE LOVE THE WORLDS GREATEST HYPNOTIST JONATHAN

ROYLE, OH YES WE DO!”
The moment they have done this and leave the building, all suggestions
will, of course, then be completely cancelled out
...

OK, so what do you do physically? Well, quite simply, if the people saw
you coming to touch their foreheads, then they would anticipate it
occurring and could try to resist
...

Instead, we start at the left hand side of the stage, working along the row
rapidly until we reach the right hand side
...
Your right hand is then lifted up behind the subject’s
back and above their head
...
So as your right hand pushes your subjec’s head backwards, your
left hand pushes their stomach area forwards, they then very quickly reach
that point of no return and fall back to the floor, with you cushioning their
fall slightly
...
All this, in
practise, should take one to two seconds to carry out, as detailed
...
Add to all this, belief, expectancy and suggestions and you
really do have a most powerful technique to add to your repertoire
...
This is a very impressive demonstration of hypnosis, which
can also get you much free, large scale publicity to promote your theatre
show in each town you go to
...

HYPNOTISING THE AUDIENCE
The induction used for this would be a progressive relaxation induction of
an eye straining nature
...
The standard kind of
phrases are used as suggestions along with the classic suggestions of “Your
eyelids are so heavy and so tired, that they want to close, in fact the harder
you try to keep them open the quicker they will close
...
The
whole audience is told to stare directly at the spinning disc as your
suggestions of relaxation are given in the usual way
...

I saw a hypnotist called Mark Maverick, use this method most successfully
in early 1994 at The Garrick Playhouse in Altringham, and it was most
successful for him, with a large majority of the audience going to “sleep”
in their seat
...
A
...

THE EYE TO EYE FASCINATION INDUCTION
Watch the Jungle Book film and witness the snake staring at the young
boy, as he says “look into my eyes”, and you’ll have an idea of how this
eye to eye fascination induction works
...
Then using the method explained earlier in the
course, make them think that I am staring directly into their eyes and at no
point do I blink or lose eye contact, this has a strong psychological effect
upon them and, not only makes them feel slightly uncomfortable, but also
makes their eyes become heavy and tired, via the eyestrain technique,
already explained
...

Continue along these lines, only stopping for a second to take breath
...
At which point, you quickly deepen the trance, as usual,
and they will then be your suggestible subject
...
The
suggestion of sinking and a sensation of falling down a black hole creates
powerful pictures in the imagination and, as we know, when the
imagination and the will are in conflict, the imagination will always win
...
It’s funny, but I’ve noticed that lots
of women want to be around you when they find out you are a professional
hypnotist
...

INDIRECT INDUCTION METHOD
Another powerful technique, which I have found always seems to work, is
to say the following sentence at the start of your show
...
”
By implanting this suggestion into the whole audience’s mind, it will go
into some peoples subconscious and in a short time have the effect of
making them react to the sleep suggestions you are giving to the onstage
subjects
...
This, too, is the reason
why the full hypnotic induction cannot be shown on TV or broadcast over
the radio, as people would most certainly enter trance around the country
...


Incidentally, Mr Peter Casson, The Chairman of the Federation of Ethical
Stage Hypnotists, was on BBC 1 many years ago, with the end result of
cameramen and the production crew entering the hypnotic trance during
the live broadcast, yes, it looked amazing and caused a sensation, but, it
also lead to a ruling that the full hypnotic induction could not be broadcast
on TV or radio
...
This in itself is a most important point, you must be
relaxed in all that you do, then you will appear more confident and
professional and so ultimately, you will have more success
...

Instead, you suddenly just say one and sleep, and they will, if a good,
responsive subject, still fall back into your arms and enter trance
...

Another example, is they stand as with the falling backwards induction,
but with eyes open, you tell them to follow the microphone with their eyes
and the moment you command sleep to close their eyes, enter trance and
fall back into your arms
...

CREATING YOUR OWN INDUCTIONS
By using the tried, tested and proven to work principles which have

detailed in this course and the example inductions which are in this
chapter, you should be more than capable of creating your own new unique
to induction
...
A good source of material is any
literature/books/tapes etc
...
S
...
, called Mr Gil Boyne
...
He has literally hundreds of
quickie inductions and any literature which you can obtain detailing his
methods would be of immense use to you
...
O
...
H
...

Another subject, which I would recommend you to learn, in order to
become an expert at rapid induction, is anything on the subject of Neuro
Linguistic Programming (N
...
P
...
It is
also a very useful subject to have knowledge of for use in the
hypnotherapist’s consulting room, should you wish to pursue that avenue
of financial gain
...

You may also wish to consider adding subliminal messages within the
sounds of your induction music that you use to place them into trance
...
How useful it would be to have suggestions of relaxation and sleep
subliminally recorded within your induction music
...
These can be used both as just mentioned, and also, to make
therapy tapes, which can be sold separayely
...
A
...
from:
Mr Martin Windebank
6 Gwynne Close

Windsor
Berkshire
SL4 5PY
Another supplier of very unusual Hypnosis related items, which may be of
use is:
Lifetools
Freepost KS1852
Poynton
Stockport
Cheshire
SK12 1FZ
...

They supply relaxation music suitable for induction, subliminal tapes,
books and training materials on hypnotherapy and mind control
techniques
...

The very best audio tapes I have come across to date, which include
countless different subjects for therapy including cancer treatment,
childbirth, infertility, exams, esteem, alcohol abuse and much more are
available (free catalogue on request) from:
PILGRIM TAPES PTY
P
...
Box 107
SHREWSBURY
SY1 1ZZ

I would also advise you to obtain, either from a book shop or your library,
about 2 or 3 books by the following people:
Sigmund Freud, Carl Jung, Milton Erikson and anything, also by prolific
psychology writers on the subject of personality types and the human
mind
...

You will have a thorough understanding of how the human mind works
and how the damage caused by everyday stresses can be repaired in the
consulting room and
A

You will also have learned how to spot different kinds of people, how to
get them to do different things etc
...

B

So if anyone falsely accuses you of having no knowledge of hypnosis and
psychotherapy, then having studied this course and acting upon my advice,
will be a qualified hypnotherapist, with a sound knowledge of psychology
and the human mind
...
You are advised by me to study several other peoples
viewpoints on hypnosis and to then make your own decisions, then, and
only then, will you be happy and confident in all that you do
...
Should you join a
stage hypnotism society, whether it is P
...
S
...
, or some other, never be
influenced by what other members say, they are no better than you,
although they may think they are God
...
You must never talk about people behind
their backs, you must never spread nasty rumours and certainly you should

never try to stop a fellow hypnotist from getting work
...
Soldiers and police do it, when they
make people stand with their hands flat on the wall and feet wide apart
...
Another technique is to place subjects into a
tank with warm water as the only support, deprive them of all external
stimuli, they cannot see, hear or feel anything, and after short time, they
will be at your mercy
...

Place a microphone at the top of the tank, so that it is unidirectional in
effect, now, giving any commands that you wish to have carried out,
repeatedly, giving them in a slow, quiet, monotonous, firm tone of voice
...
Remove their blindfold
and let them out of the dark warehouse
...
Nice to Evil
...

Anything is possible with brain washing and that’s why these details are
included, for information purposes only, and have been kept deliberately
vague, so that you will not be tempted to use them
...
If they were to then hear music, which contained
subliminal commands within this, then the hidden commands would most
certainly be enacted on
...
I detailed Carotid Artery
induction earlier in the course and also the Little Boy induction, both of
which rely on pressure, either directly or indirectly upon pressure points,
which are all capable of knocking you unconscious
...
So I wouldn’t use these techniques
...

To hypnotise yourself, the easiest way is to use the audio cassette supplied
with your course or alternatively make up your own on which you record
the hypnotic induction, (P
...
I
...

Full details of all the components that make up the finished whole are
contained within this course
...

Just like medicine, although not dangerous in anyway, the tapes should
only be used by the person it is intended for and as a hypnotic induction
process is used upon these tapes, they should never be listened to in the car
whilst driving or when operating machinery
...
Listening to them, you can learn first hand, how the
hypnotic induction is correctly delivered verbally and how different
suggestions have different effects
...

These tapes can be sold individually, or given to clients attending for
therapy to help reinforce the treatment they receive
...

To induce self hypnosis, the procedure is similar to a guided induction and
is as follows:
Make yourself comfortable somewhere warm where you will not be
disturbed
...
Make sure
your feet are not touching each other and your hands are resting slightly
away from your body
...
Then release it slowly, all the way out, as far as you can, all
the way to the bottom of your stomach
...

Each time you exhale, allow yourself to relax and just “let go”
...

It is very important not to try too hard, as the secret is to allow things to
happen naturally, with no effort at all
...
Let
your mind just drift away to anywhere you like and your body to become
heavier and more relaxed with every number
...

Next you need to bring in the visualisation technique
...
Let them go limp and heavy
...

Then move up slowly through your calves, the tops of your legs, your
buttocks, your stomach, your chest, your shoulders and neck, down your
arms and into your fingers and thumbs, up the back of your head, over the
top and down your forehead
...
You
may find, at this point that your jaw sags open slightly with the pleasant
feelings of total relaxation
...
The idea is to program your
mind to slip into relaxation to the trigger of backwards counting and
physical relaxation
...
But when
you have mastered the technique, the state can be entered very quickly
indeed, in a matter of seconds with some people
...

I am gaining in confidence
...

Every day in every way I am getting better and better
...

I will be appreciative and receptive to people
...

Suppose you have an important meeting or a public speech to make
...
Go through, in your mind, all the things
you will do on that particular day, right from getting up in the morning, but
this time you are calm, relaxed, in control and not at all agitated (almost a
new you)
...

This is an accepted form of therapy and is equally effective when used
with self hypnosis
...
Then simply say to yourself 1, feeling relaxed
...
3, feeling revitalised and starting to wake up
...
5, feeling
full of energy, eyes open wide awake feeling on top of the world
...
It’s almost like a wonder drug which will not go in a bottle but
with no side effects!
STANDARD PHRASES WHICH HYPNOTISTS USE
To end this chapter on induction methods, I will give you some examples
on the kind of “Standard Phrases” which would be used by a hypnotist
during the induction process
...

Firstly though, allow me to recap a little
...


2

The execution of certain passes that the hypnotist must know
...

3

The ability of the hypnotist to concentrate on the suggestion which he
wishes to impart
...

5

Another piece of advice is this, your nose will tell you an awful lot about a
person, very often, what they eat on a regular basis, do they smoke? Their
place of work (eg
...
) Now
go out and do the same, you will, with a little practice be able to smell the
odour of fear, when someone is terrified upon coming to the stage, or
coming to visit you in your consulting room
...
Bad body odour can, and
will interfere with your image and you may not, at the time, realise why
...
You will then almost be psychic and will have mastered E
...
P
...
These
sorts of powers are within reach of all of us
...
Why do you think a
dog smells the genitals? It tells him just how powerful you are, your
position in the family group
...
Atmosphere is another component, a successful
hypnotist must use to best effect
...
Let me present you with an example of how
atmosphere works, then you will not be able to tell me that you cannot
sense atmospheres, as you in fact do this every single day of you life
...
However, you
could cut that atmosphere with a knife, couldn’t you?
So ensure that the subjects are always seated comfortably, no tight items
around the throat
...

The last subject I feel that must recap in, is something, which even some
very experienced hypnotists seem to forget, and that is to cancel out all the
commands which you have given to the subjects after they have been
carried out
...

This is a most important point and one which you forget at your own risk
...
, all my
commands will be completely cancelled out
...
You will not have any headaches or side
effects of any kind
...
When you leave
here tonight, all my commands and suggestions to you will be completely
cancelled out, in other words, you will be as you were when you first came
in here tonight
...
During therapy sessions you
should reinforce all suggestions as much as possible and encourage your
client to REMEMBER the messages for the rest of their life
...
This kind of emphasis must continue all
the way through, it is you, the hypnotist, that they must relate to all the
time
...

Anyway, back to the original subject in hand, that of standard phrases
which you can use during your hypnotic induction
...
”
“With every breath you take, every noise you hear, every word I say and

every thought that you think, you’ll go deeper and deeper to sleep
...
”
“Each and every muscle in your body, now becoming so heavy and so
tired
...
”
As you sit (or lie) there in the comfortable chair, it almost feels as though
every movement would be a great effort, as though you are sinking down
deeply into the chair and into calm, satisfying, relaxation
...
”
All the worries, stresses and tensions of days gone by, are leaving your
mind and leaving your body now, allowing you to relax completely
...
”
“Just as your subconscious makes you breathe at night, or circulates the
blood around your body, in just the same way you can faithfully rely upon
your subconscious mind to help you eliminate this problem from your
every day life
...
”
“Each morning when you awake, from this moment forward, you will
awaken with an inner warm glow of confidence, a renewed optimism to
life and a more positive attitude to get things done
...
”
“You have made a promise to yourself to (whatever) and whilst it may be
alright, on occasion, to break a promise to a friend, your subconscious
mind will not allow you to break a promise to yourself and, as such,
success is guaranteed
...

Common sense and a little thought is all you require to word your own
suggestions to give your own on stage subjects, just remember the golden
rule, that there must never be any doubt in their mind of what you want
them to do
...
This is OK on stage, but if
it is carried over into your personal life, then you’ll end up with no friends
and your family will turn against you
...


HANDSHAKE TECHNIQUE
This is basically just a way to tell, in the time it takes to shake a subject’s
hand, whether or not they will make a good subject
...
The drier their hand is, the more relaxed the person is
already and, as such, the easier it will usually be to hypnotise them
...
These people, with waterlogged palms, are either not used to, or
are shocked into hypnosis, as they are already too tense for the slow P
...
I
...
At the start of your act, once the subjects are
on stage ready to be hypnotised, you say
...
The reason
being, they don’t have the correct powers of I
...
C
...
I won’t point them out however, as they might surprise us and
start concentrating a bit more
...

Now your chances of success are considerably increased
...
My experience shows me
they are more likely to remain on stage and act hypnotised and take part in
the show before looking a complete fool and returning to audience
...


NOTE = The Section Above was extracted from “The Encyclopedia of
Hypnotherapy, Stage-Hypnosis and Complete Mind Therapy” Volume One
by Dr
...


The $1000 Hypnotic Show Plan
By Devin Knight
Devin Knight is regarded as one of magic's most prolific inventors
...

Most of his effects are run-away best sellers and have received rave
reviews
...

Some of his best known effects are Blindsight, Farsight and AutoBendSpoon
...

In addition to over 50 marketed items, Devin is the author of three books;
Glass Box Revisited, The Blindfold Car and Cloudbusting Secrets (with
Jerome Finley)
...
The majority of his effects rely more on clever ideas,
rather than difficult sleights
...

He is also an established authority in the world of Effective Internet
Marketing and you would be wise to seek out his ebooks on Marketing for
Performers, which along with his many other creations are available from
most Magic Shops Worldwide
...
lybrary
...
html
This is a plan that you can easily use to make at least thousand dollars off
one hypnotic show and possibly much, much more
...
This plan
practically sells itself; you tell them about your comedy hypnosis show and
they will be ready to book you on the spot! Comments about this have
been mentioned in the past on online forums, but this is the REAL WORK
and a proven method that will make you big dollars fast
...

If you wanted to, you could set this up in several different venues doing a
show each weeknight
...

Please note this is not pie in the sky or pipe dreams, there are professional
hypnotists working this plan right now and bringing home five to seven
thousand dollars each week
...
You
book the show, do a little prep work, show up on the day of the gig, and
collect your fee
...
It is possible and is easily done if
you follow this plan and are willing to travel to do gigs
...
Most important, your show must appeal to ALL ages
...


You need to do a professional show that is a minimum of 70 minutes up to
90 minutes or longer
...

Make sure your show LOOKS PROFESSIONAL
...
When people come in
to see your show, you want them to think they are about to see a
professional show
...


What You Are Offering
This is a fund-raising show, but not quite like what you have heard about
in the past, as this actually works
...
The standard method used in the past
was to contact a civic club such as the Lions Club or a fraternal group such
as the Moose Club
...

The problem was that many civic clubs only had 15 to 20 members and
most of them do not want to sell tickets
...
This is not going to happen as a rule, unless you have lots of
effective and expensive advertising
...
I know from
experience that in most civic clubs, the members are lazy and it is difficult
to get them to sell tickets
...

This looks bad on you, as low attendance makes it seem you must not be
very good or popular
...
I do not recommend civic clubs for fundraisers
...

Fraternal clubs are a bit better, especially if you have a Moose club, as
these groups often have several hundred members and their own building
in which to hold the show
...

I know from experience, that I have tried both civic and fraternal clubs
fundraisers in the past and been very disappointed with the money and the
attendance
...
It was
the perfect set up and easily made a thousand dollars or more for every
show
...
So
easy, that they will be jumping at the bait and eager to book your act
...
That is
right, high school band departments
...

Local high school bands conduct on average 8 to 12 fundraisers a year
...
Bands need money for school trips and a
many other things
...

This is an easy sell, because high school students think hypnotism is cool!
They sometimes feel that a magic show is for little kids and beneath them
...

Depending on the school’s size, most high school bands have from 80 to
200 student members, with the average being about 130 students
...
Most students will sell
an average of four to eight tickets each and that goes for almost every
student in the band!
Band students are some of the best ticket sellers in the world
...
Family members want to support the
band their child is involved in and wind up buying almost everything the
band has for sale
...
The worse case
scenario is that you are stuck doing your show in the gym, but there is no
rent for the group to pay, so that is an important selling point when you
approach them
...
The fact is these other clubs do not work as
well
...
This can be hard
...

All you need to do is get each member to sell two tickets to his parents and
the fundraiser is already successful
...
Stick with the high
school bands and you cannot go wrong with this plan
...
He will be eager to have
a meeting with you because he is always looking for ways to make more
money for the band
...
Sometimes a letter is sent home with the band members letting
the parents know that the students will be conducting a show fundraiser
...
If booking shows outside your area,
then you will need to conduct all the booking over the phone and through
e-mails
...
The school
makes no financial guarantee to you, but arranges for a place to do the
show and for the band students to sell the tickets
...
Avoid
weekend shows if possible, as the school is normally closed and custodian
personnel have to be paid to come in, open the school and clean up
afterward
...
Many of these people stay on after the school
is closed and into the early evening cleaning the school
...

The tickets to your show are priced at $10
...
Some of you may want

to drop tickets to $8
...
00 because that is the
average price people pay to see a movie
...
00 for a live professional show is a bargain
...
If it is too cheap, people will think it is no good
...
Usually $10 for adults and $8
...
No one is going to beef about a $10 ticket for a professional
show
...
This is easily done, as if the band has 100
members, each member sells one ticket and your fee is paid
...
You tell him that your regular fee for the show is
$1500, but you only require the first $1000 in sales
...
Therefore, for the second
hundred tickets sold, the band gets $800 and you get $200
...
First $1000
plus 20% of 200 tickets sold after that
...

With this deal, you cannot lose as you get a thousand dollars from the first
100 tickets and the band will not stop with only 100 tickets sold
...
This
becomes a major fundraiser for the band
...

NOTE: Some people often ask me what you do if the band does not sell
100 tickets
...
If the band has over a 100
members, they will sell 100 tickets
...
The
band does not get a cut
...
I have never had this
happen
...


The Door Split
The deal with the band department is that door sales are split 50/50
...
Usually, I
suggest letting other students in for $8
...
Your tickets MUST look professional
...
Your
ticket must be in FULL COLOR and preferably with a picture of you on it
...
Do a search for show ticket printers and you will find
a huge selection to choose from
...

I cannot stress enough the importance of having a full color ticket
...
They realize this is a
professional hypnotic show and appears to be worth the $10
...
In
other words, the full color glossy ticket projects the image of a high-class
show with a perceived value
...
Do not skimp here, as it is not worth it
...


POSTERS
You will also need a supply of full color posters
...
You can make
acceptable full color posters using your computer and printer if you have
the right software
...

Better yet, go online and search for large commercial web printers that will
print you 1000 posters for a little over $200
...
Have these printed with a
large white space at the bottom, so you can fill in information about the
date and show location
...
Try to use photos showing
people having fun
...

When you send the posters to the band director, DO NOT LEAVE them
blank in the white space
...
5” x 11” stickers
...

Using your computer printer, print the show date, school sponsor, time and
location on the label
...
This will give
your posters a uniform and professional look
These posters are placed in the high school along the various hallways so
you can sell the students on attending the show
...
That seldom works
...
Doing
this is a waste of time and money
...
This is costly and expensive and will not pay for itself for a
small high school hypnosis show
...
This has proved to be the most effective method
way to use the posters
...

The only place I recommend putting up posters outside the school that has
a fighting chance of the public seeing them are on church community
bulletin boards
...
I have found
that the congregation will take time to read these posters and it can affect
door sales in a positive manner, especially if the band member’s family
attends that church
...


Sale Of Items At The Show
Both you and the band department sell things at the show to make
additional money
...
The band members can sell refreshments either
before the show or during the show if you have an intermission
...

You in turn can have back of the room (BOR) sales after the show
...


The Plan In Action
Once you have booked the band department, arrange to have the show five
to six weeks from then
...
You do not want
people to forget about the show
...

Print up the full color tickets as soon as possible and send them to the band
director
...
Make sure
he keeps a list of which students have tickets and how many each student
took
...
Be sure to tell him
that the band is responsible for returning all UNSOLD tickets and that they
are accountable and must pay for any unreturned tickets, as you must
consider them as sold
...
This is an
easy and realistic goal, as most students can sell five tickets to family
members and neighbors
...
00 gross ticket sales
...
That
gives you $1800 for doing the show! The band makes a whopping $3200!
See why this is such an easy sell
...
The
80/20 split with the school getting 80% is why they jump on this deal
...
When the students
know they are getting 80% for the band, they try harder
...
Sometimes the
sponsors have made only 5 to 10% of gross ticket sales
...
When the student can say that the band is getting
80% of the ticket sales, this will make the show look good and will
greatly increase the ticket sales
...


You should call the band director at the end of each week to see how ticket
sales are going
...

Have the band director ask the students on Facebook to post on their
walls about the show
...

Have the band director arrange with the principle to announce the show
over the intercom during morning announcements
...
These
announcements will help generate student door sales
...
This way, it allows any students
who forgot to bring the money or tickets an extra day or so to turn in
everything
...

On the day of the show, arrange to have a meeting with the band director in
the early afternoon after school and divvy out the money
...

That is the plan, and you can do this year after year for the same school
and have a steady route of shows to do
...
Most large cities have five to six high schools
...
Remember, this is a low-key show catering to
that school and the student’s family members
...
This is the secret behind why this
plan is so successful and allows you to work the plan several times in the
same town with different schools
...
I will see you at the top!
FOR MORE DEVIN KNIGHT EBOOKS PLEASE VISIT:
http://www
...
com/devin-knight-m-86331
...

Whether you are designing your own artwork, having it designed by a
printing company or outsourcing the work to an independent graphic
designer, there are a few things to consider at the beginning of the process,
so that the final printed poster is as effective as possible
...

Who Should Design Your Poster?

Choosing the right graphic designer is essential
...
Many graphic designers offering their
services on the internet may have never seen a stage hypnosis show, so are
not really in a position to be able to help you promote your show
successfully
...
But be careful that you
are not too emotionally attached to your own act to create a design that
fulfils the true requirements of the poster
...

One solution in this case would be to create a rough draft, which can then
be sent to your designer for completion
...
A good designer will happily take on board ideas
from a client, and develop these into a final design that works well
...
Many sites such as Elance, Odesk and even Fiverr will
connect you with an individual willing to take on a design project
...

Another option would be to approach a local college, to see if a student

would work on the design, in return for payment and the right to use the
final designs in their course portfolio
...
The more they understand about the show, the better they can
represent the show within the design
...
After all, just as you are
paid to provide a first class show every time, you are paying for a first
class design
...
If
your show is bright, lively and cheesy, then the advertising needs to reflect
this
...
Giving your designer photos and video clips of
recent shows may help them to understand your show better
...

Design Quality & Print Set Up
If you are designing your own promotional literature, it is essential that
you understand the requirements of your print company
...


Getting these wrong during the design process can create extra work for
you down the line, or worse still lead to a poor quality printed material
which will of course reflect on you
...
Many will have
these details on their website, or be happy to email them across on request
...
hypnotic-consultants
...
uk & www
...
com & of course we will be more than happy to advise new
customers on the best way to set up their artwork correctly for printing
...

This means that photos and other images lifted from a website will look
pixelated or blurry when added to a poster design
...

Sacrificing Your Ego for a Larger Audience
If you already have existing artwork for your show, consider the relative
space you have assigned to each of the following – Your Name, Your
Photo, What You Do, Where & When You Are Doing It, Your Contact
Details & Website, Any Other Information
...

Just as a good website will capture the viewer’s interest within 30 seconds
or less, a poster should do the same in 5 seconds or less, from across a
crowded room, AND share all the important information required for them
to make the decision to attend an event
...
This is far from the case, and because it’s been happening for
many, many years, it has now become the standard – and not just with
hypnotists, but with other entertainers including magicians, singers,
comedians etc…
It might sound harsh, but unless you are a very well known, recognised
celebrity in your own field, your name is unlikely to fill a venue on its own
merits
...
Yet time and
time again entertainers insist on using artwork to promote themselves
where their name is two or three times larger than the description of the
act
...
Unless you have a very distinct
appearance, and the image on the poster is clearly that of you in the role of
a hypnotist then you must ask yourself if it warrants the space being used,
or if that space could be better utilised
...
Even
if they have seen your show before, it’s not really you they are after seeing
– it’s what you do
...
They
will remember the fun time they spent watching a hypnotist on holiday
over 10 years ago though
...
Use this to your
advantage – and sell the word “Hypnosis” and the imagery associated with
it as much as possible
...
Those who have made a huge
career, with big venues, TV appearances and massive advertising budgets,
can afford to trade on their name and image as the primary attraction on
their publicity
...
But in the majority of
cases, people seeing your show couldn’t care less what your name is, or
what you look like
...

I’m not saying that your name or image is completely irrelevant, just
suggesting that you consider how much importance you give to these on a
poster compared to other items which may be more important to your
audience
...
Select
any images (including photographs) carefully to maximise the impact of
your poster
...
Perhaps the inclusion of
some show props in your photo might help demonstrate what you do… or
maybe a “posed” photo of you and some volunteers clearly taking part in a
routine
...
To you as an entertainer, in the hypnosis industry, it might
seem very clichéd and “old fashioned”, but to a member of the public,
spirals and pocket watches are instantly associated with hypnosis
...

Fonts & Typography
The subject of fonts & typography is vast and has been covered more than
adequately in other books
...
So to keep
this section brief – consider how the font you choose reflects on you, and
your personality
...
In the wrong context, they can look
messy, amateur & cheap
...

Calligraphy & Decorative Fonts – Unless you are “playing the part” of a
19th Century Mesmerist then it’s probably best to leave these alone
...

Essentially, the most important thing to remember when choosing a font is
that it must be easily read, and that certain individual letters must not be
mistaken for others
...

Another way to ensure that the lettering in your design stands out is to use
a thin dark line around the lettering, known as a stroke or keyline
...
com are a great resource for additional
lettering styles
...
If you are being
employed by a venue, for a one night gig – or a short run of shows, and
have the opportunity to drop the posters into the venue, it is worthwhile
offering to help the venue out by offering to put the posters up, or at the
very least suggest good locations in which to display the posters
...
In a pub, club or nightclub, I would recommend placing a
poster in the main areas where people congregate, visit and pass through
...

With an additional few posters around the main venue, you are almost
guaranteed that nearly every customer passing through the venue, will
have an opportunity to see your posters, and hopefully make the decision
to come to the show
...
hypnotic-consultants
...
hypnotic-consultants
...
uk

GETTING STARTED IN HYPNOSIS
By: Cheryly Quinlan
Have you ever been thrown into the deep end of a pool without knowing
how to swim? That’s kind of how I felt when I started in the hypnosis
business
...
Sort of a ‘Now what?
What do I do next?’ I’m hoping by contributing to this book, some of you
will be helped by what I have been through to get started
...
My earliest recollection was as
a child watching television
...
As the years
passed, this fascination remained but moved to the back burner while my
life took many different paths
...
I was also involved in drama and music clubs
...

Two times stand out during this early period
...
I decided to ‘hypnotize’ my brother by
telling him to look into my eyes, waving my hands in his face like I’d seen
done on television and telling him over and over ‘you are getting sleepy,
you are getting very sleepy
...
He actually had to get out and stretch his legs
...
My two roommates and I were bored so I decided to
‘hypnotize’ one of them
...
Her arm
became like a stiff rod of steel and the suggestion of ‘at 10:00 you will
start singing the Howdy Doody theme song’ actually worked
...

I retired after a career with the Government but always kept entertaining as
an outside interest and eventual full-time business
...

Getting Started
I’ve never been one to do anything half way and have actually been
accused of being anal about things
...

When I started my DJ business, I didn’t just get a cd player, I got the best
cd player, the best computers, the best lights and lots of them, the best
speakers, etc
...
This is
only mentioned so you know where I’m coming from
...

Having been in business, it has also been an exercise in laying the
groundwork needed to make it successful
...
As I see it, there are two
aspects involved; the business side and the hypnosis side and hypnosis
HAS to be treated like a business
...
I am a firm believer in
it
...
It’s important
...
Way back in 1624, John Donne said ‘No
man is an island’ and he was right
...
You need a
network of people who understand when you say the back of room sales
aren’t great, or people you can turn to when you need support
...
So,
attend training-if not every year; then every other year
...
e
...
As my background is in entertainment, I am
focusing on stage hypnosis as a primary career with clinical work as
secondary
...
thehypnosiscompany
...
After passing
the course, I purchased liability insurance through NAME
...

My feeling is we live in a litigious society and people will sue for
anything
...

Then I took a stand-up comedy class
...
Additionally, it helped me to be ‘fast on
my feet’
...
You can see the final results at YouTube
under Cheryl Q at the Improv (www
...
com/watch?
v=naEaO8Kwv3A)
...


After deciding on the stage name of The Amazing Cheryl Q, I got what is
called a URL (domain)
...
Some places
to purchase a domain name is from Go Daddy or Webmasters
...

Just prior to all of this, I registered the business name with the State and
got a business license
...
I am registered as a LLC
...
Always
remember, the way to be a Professional is to act like one
...

I gathered up basic contracts from friends in the industry and talked to
them about addendums
...
I then made my
own contract
...
Initial contracts should be reviewed by a lawyer to make sure you are
protected
...
They are fairly low in cost so what I
did was get two distinctly different cards; one focusing on the
stage/entertainment part with the second focusing on the therapy/clinical
side
...

Companies offering printing service are all over the internet
...

From there, CD’s for back of room and on-line sales were made
...
Jonathan

Royle
...
Available are
Weight Loss, Stop Smoking, Stress Reduction, and Confidence Building
...
)
Finding scripts for therapy sessions have proven interesting
...
It offered a
couple of session ideas that I took and modified slightly
...
If the client is under-age or mentally
incapacitated a guardian needs to sign them
...
This contains name,
address, and other general information as well as a ‘what ails them’ section
that will be used during the session
...

A good voice/video recorder has been purchased both for clinical sessions
as well as stage work
...

You’ll also need a long lasting battery
...
Some hypnotists make show
DVD’s for resale right at the venue while others take orders and send them
out
...
A good assistant or two is/are also needed
...

Taking credit cards is up to you but it can facilitate sales
...
I currently use Intuit and have the
ability to process cards either on line or through a small card swiper added
to my cell phone
...

Their rates are reasonable and a business account can be easily set up
...
By the way, a bank account
dedicated to your business is a necessity
...
It tends to upset accountants and tax
auditors
...
Sometimes it’s best not to leave anything to chance - you never
know who or how your stage introductions will be made
...
This has worked
well and was worth the money
...

(http://www
...
com/watch?v=jz7jaKyyfwk)
Using social media to promote your business is so very important
...
Anytime you can get
your name out there, do it
...
If you can get your name on sites for free,
then do so
...

Once you plan out your show, you’ll need to figure out not only your
music and sound effects but how you are going to play it
...
I bring both a
CD and computer to a show and use a hand-held remote if I’m doing the
show by myself
...
I now have a couple of them that are put
around the stage area as prompters to help keep me on track during the
show
...

And Then…
...
This is the anal me preparing for anything that may
happen
...
You might
consider having something as a backup for yourself
...

I’m sure I’ve forgotten to mention something like having professional
promo photographs taken so I hope you will forgive me
...
Consider speaking with an accountant early in your career and
periodically thereafter so you know what you will need for taxes
...
Make sure it protects you
...

Keep it business even for friends or acquaintances
...
Trust me you will be respected more for it and
taken advantage of less
...
There are a lot of decisions to make and lots to do to get started
but if you do the groundwork you will be a huge success
...
theamazingcherylq
...
facebook
...
szeles
...

This ran for several years from the mid 1990's and indeed if you use an
internet site such as “The Wayback Machine” or “Web Archive” you can
type in James Szeles website domain name and look at it as it was then,
thus meaning you can read at no charge all of the back issues which were
filled full of useful information
...
szeles
...
hypnothoughts
...
youtube
...


Please remember that where Fees are mentioned, these articles were
originally written in the mid to late 90's and thus generally speaking Fees
are higher these days, however the principles for getting shows and all the
other advice, in the main remains the same and bang up to date!

Stage Hypnotist Clones – James Szeles
If you watch enough stage hypnosis tapes you will see a trend in shows
...
It seems there are some stage hypnotists out there that teach
their act to an 'intern' and charge as much as $5000
...

The problem gets worse when the clone gets cloned and then they in turn
get cloned
...

The problem is, the show works great for the original hypnotist because it's
tailored to that person, but when the second or third or fourth persons does
it, it sucks because they don't have the charisma of the original hypnotist to
carry it off successfully
...
Now not
everyone who does this skit is a clone, but it's a good indication that they
might be
...

There's nothing wrong with a person learning from another stage
hypnotist, but they should know enough about hypnosis to be able to
change the show to fit their own unique personality and stage presence
...
J
...


...
Now
not everyone who does this skit is a clone, but it's a good indication
that they might be
...
"
I believe that the hot/cold routine is in so many peoples acts for one
very important reason, though many don't realize the reason
...
As a subject begins to relax and is under the
lights of a stage he/she actually becomes warmer
...

Therefore they are having physical confirmation that the suggestion is
working, thereby deepening the state of suggestibility (if this suggestion
works, others will work) and their own belief in the process, which is
crucial to accessing the desired state
...

This is why the routine, in a properly structured show, is one of the very
first demonstrations of phenomenon I think the routine could actually be

considered one of the final phases of the induction
...

I would argue that the Hot/Cold routine is an almost essential part of
an induction when properly placed in a show -- many hypnotists just
don't realize this and use it merely as a routine
...

I just thought I'd throw in my two cents worth for your consideration I'd love to hear your thoughts on the matter
...
J
...

Master Hypnotist & Illusionist
Email: hypnotist@cjjohnson
...
cjjohnson
...

10
...
They will take your money
and might, if you're lucky, show you some of the basics of stage hypnosis
...
00 up to $5000
...

You could learn just as much from several good books or even a good
"how to" video tape for under $50
...
So how do you learn stage
hypnosis? You can find a lot of great information on how to get started by
reading Howard Morgan's and other stage hypnotist articles in
HypnoStage, a FREE on-line stage hypnosis magazine
...


hook-up with a stage hypnotist who is willing to teach you
...
Or, you teach yourself as I and many
others did
...

It's going to take at least one or two years before you make any money
doing stage hypnosis and up to five years to make a good living at it
...
You will spend most of your
time trying to get bookings
...


There is a Catch 22 in stage hypnosis
...
So what do you do? You start doing shows for your
friends' partys and for anyone you can get to watch you
...

7
...
Get used to it, your ego is going to take
a beating
...
When you ask for people to come
on stage and no one does you know you have your work cut out for you
...

6
...
You will
need a good induction but that is only a small part of the show
...
Once they get them under they don't know
how to pace the show and the show starts to drag
...
Keep in mind that they are the people who help you
5
...

Don't bitch when someone takes a skit you came up with, it happens all
the time
...
Having them act like
little kids or forget the number seven is a classic example of what I'm
talking about
...


Once you find a good gig there will be other hypnotist trying to under
cut your price and take it away from you
...

3
...


Should you be lucky enough to make a good living doing stage hypnosis
there will come a day when a newbe will ask you to help him/her with a
few questions they might have
...
There is always room for one more good hypnotist
...

1
...
I don't know about you, but I have performed under some
very trying conditions
...
Arizona at night at that
time of the year can be either very warm (in the 70's) or it could snow
...


After about 15 minutes of working up a crowd, I had 10 people in the
audience and 5 volunteers on stage
...

On the weekend nights at the fair the weather was warmer, but like a lot of
small fairs they had several events going on at the same time as my show
and one of the events was a band that was playing very loud music
...
Here's what happens
...

The volunteers on stage are great, the audience is really into the show and
it has a flow to it
...
For example, I did a high school grad night
show last month
...
I arrived at the location only to see the DJ
breaking down his equipment, so I have no PA system or CD player, the
parents knew I needed the equipment, it was in the contract
...
It was my
third show that night at three different schools and I was tired
...


The show started at 3:25am and a funny thing happened, once I got the
show going the zone hit and things just fell into place
...
The two hundred kids
watching the show were very quite when I was talking so they could hear
what I was saying and the show turned out great
...
It's
shows like that which make you forget all the times you really have to
work hard to get it going
...
While it
certainly is the majority of the show, the induction is also an integral part
of the show, as long as it's not boring to your audience any hypnotic
induction will work
...

Now I've seen several hypnotists who take forty five minutes to an hour to
get people under and that is a little too long
...

When you lose sight of the fact that you are there to entertain, and if you
do not have a well planned, fast paced show, you will find the audience
getting bored
...

So how long is too long of an induction? I would try to keep it under
twenty minutes tops
...
You would need a longer induction for
a corporate show and a shorter one for a high school
...

Some hypnotists only do group skits and that's ok, but I like to interact
with the people on stage on a one-to-one basis
...
When working with a large group and you are taping the
show for sale you want to try to work with everyone on stage so that you
sell the most tapes
...
I still see hypnotists making people bark
like a dog
...
My answer is always
No
...

Here are just a few things people are doing on stage
...
These are examples (in my opinion) of
negative suggestions that have a potential of doing more harm than good
...

BEHIND EVERY GREAT MAN
...
Time now to think about April 15 and Uncle
Sam’s cut of your business
...

One of my New Year’s resolutions last year was to organize my husband’s
business
...
We would literally spend days looking,
sorting and stressing in an effort to get everything in some sort of logical
order for the accountant
...
I was hell bent on having a stress free time of it this
year!
I started out in December of 1999 by purchasing accounting and database
management software
...
So, software in hand and
determination on my side, I stated out on my venture
...
There are only 2 things I ask of my
husband when it comes to keeping track of the receipts when he’s on the
road:
1)
2)
it!

Write the date and location on the back of each receipt
Diligently put all of the receipts in a large envelope - and don’t loose

When he gets back I enter everything into our accounting program and file
the receipts in the appropriate hanging files
...

Our accountant’s fee will be less, because the accountant won’t inherit a

huge mess to sort through, we probably can deduct more on our taxes
because we can account for everything and we have a wonderful sense of
accomplishment; but for me the best part is no stress!
The database management software proved itself invaluable this year
...
We loaded it onto the laptop took it to trade shows and
entered our contact information right there at the booth
...
We now
have a complete history of the last year compiled in such a way that we can
pull up anyone in the database and there is their history with us!
When we got home, it took only minutes to print out our follow up letters
...
I really like the reminder
function, which pops up on the PC desktop, so follow up calls or verbal
confirmations are never missed or late
...
It’s a little overwhelming at first,
but once you’re on it and in the rhythm it’s easy
...
hypnosis or surf the internet, you will run
across stage hypnotists who claim to be the "World's Greatest", World's
Fastest", "World's Best" and "Official Hypnotist of the New Millennium"
...


Recently, in the alt
...
One even claimed he could get someone under in 3 seconds! Most
of the fast inductions use a confusion technique that requires the hypnotist
to pull or jerk the volunteer very quickly when the volunteer does not
expect it
...

Most of the shows I've seen, it takes the hypnotist 20 to 30 minutes to get
the show started and perform the first skit
...
When I got started
I thought the audience would get bored watching my induction (8 to 15
minutes long depending on the group), but I found that the audience loves
to see how their friends go from sitting next to them into a deep trance
...
I have just
returned from the IAFE and had a chance to meet lots of hypnotists I had
gotten to know solely by way of the telephone and/or email
...
Stage hypnotists are a unique
group of people and when we get together we like to talk about one thing,
money
...
We all need to work, but when some of us
work for next to nothing, two things will happen:
By under cutting fees, it makes it difficult for seasoned hypnotists to get
the fees their shows demand, and
1)

As the novice hypnotists gain experience and exposure they are going to
find that it will become difficult for them to raise their fees, because their
clients won't want to pay more for the same show they booked previously
(if they get re-booked)
...
There is a need for all of us to set and
keep standards not only for our fees, but also with the caliber of our
performances
...
Will your performance be an asset
to this industry or a detriment - the choice lays with you
...
They are fun and easy shows to
do, the only drawback being many times the shows start as late as
4:00am
...
This year I worked with two new schools, both
schools have been open for less than a year, had their first grad
night and both schools were not prepared
...
In Northern California it gets cold at night,
even as late as July
...

The night of the show was very cold
...
One of the shows I got was from a hypnotist who swore at
the kids and still another show because the hypnotist was "hitting
up" on one of the parents
...
The kid's at the shows can be very rowdy
and boisterous and you need to take control from the start
...

Are stage hypnotists going the way of the stand up comic?
In the 80's stand up comedy was all the rage and comics were in great
demand
...
So, the comedy clubs
started to use anyone they could get to perform and when people paid good
money and saw bad comics the clubs went out of business
...
Just as the
clubs hired bad comics, the same thing is happening with hypnotists
...
The problem is, some inexperienced
hypnotist's are selling themselves as pros and when they bomb at the
events the people who booked them don't know they are beginners and
never want to use a hypnotist again
...

These new hypnosists perform a show or two at a school, or for a small
groups of friends and think they are ready for the big shows
...

A real pro knows what to expect and is able to handle whatever situation
comes up and still perform a great show
...
I recently performed for a New Year's Eve party and did two shows
...
During the induction,
people were popping balloons and blowing noise-makers
...
By
drawing on my experience, I got the crowd to help me keep it quiet until I

could get them under
...

Putting my money where my mouth is
...
Hypnosis you've read about performing at
corporate events and how hard they can be
...

The shows were in a very large exhibition hall with a trade show going on
at the time and several of the booths had hawaiian tribal dancers complete
with drums performing dances every hour, the noise level was very high
...
I was told by the promoter that this is pretty
typical of the island people, in fact he said when people like Ricky Martin
come to town, they stop their concert and ask what's wrong with the
crowd, why aren't they "into it"
...
There were only 40 people in the audience and I was
lucky to get ten people on stage
...

The next day I had an idea of what to expect and the second show was
much better
...
With two men and one woman under I started to get
the crowd into the show
...

This was great because the older people in hawaii do not like to be touched
- the reactions were classic!

In the middle of the second show one of the two Hawaii drum bands
started to play even though they had been asked to wait until my show was
over
...
The drums
were very loud and I knew I could not talk over them so I had to think fast
...
This did the trick and they stopped playing
...
I did manage to do a great second show
and was asked back next year
...
com

BEWARE THE OVER ANXIOUS
...
Saratoga Springs, NY

...

Those of us who are performing, or soon will be, will experience (if they
have not already) those who are more than willing to become a participant
in your show
...


...
There are at least two
problems associated with this type of individual
...

First, they can disrupt your induction technique by over acting
...
This person is already trying to entertain his/her
friends
...
Distracted not only by the loud exhale of the volunteer, but also

by the laughter of the few "buddies" in the audience
...

Second, If the subject is actually kept on stage, he/she will tend to overact
during every skit! Sometimes this can be very funny
...
Needless to say, if the comic is being funny
...

THIS ONE SCARED ME
...
(helium balloons, etc
...
A minute later she excused herself from the stage
...
Though I
hate to break the flow of the show, I went to her seat to investigate
...
I calmed her and returned to the stage
...


...
The
show continued
...
She was still obviously shaken
...
I
let her know that she was scaring her friends and this worked to bring her
back to normalcy
...
It seems that she had ingested a handful
of UPPERS just prior to the show
...
The school principal
was sure that they would have representatives attend just looking for one
hint that I too was evil and to justify their beliefs
...

It was not in the least my fault but it could easily have been misconstrued

as such
...


...
The only thing that will help you to create this character
judgement is actually encountering these "problem children
...


...
Until then
...
capital
...
HTM

Controvesies in Hypnosis by Ramelle Macoy
Central Pennsylvania—Mifflitown

...
While I was
unable to attend, I did listen to the tapes of the discussions
...

Before commenting I should confess my own lack of credentials
...
I
have been a stage hypnotist for the past thirty years and have hypnotized
thousands of volunteers and while I am as disinclined as the next CSICOP
member to be much impressed by anecdotal evidence, perhaps experience
and observation is not without some value
...


...
There is a mystery and it is a
mystery, I think, that will continue to be extraordinarily difficult of
illumination
...

Suggestions that may have been given a subject prior to an experiment
together with varying interpretations of the same suggestion by different
subjects--or by different interpretations of the same suggestion by the same
subject at different times--may well combine to render reliable replication
impossible
...


...
In passing I would like to suggest to Kreskin
that he immediately claim his own $100,000 prize for himself
...


...
I believe it because I know it to be a
phenomenon common to hypnosis
...


...
I call it a hypnotic state rather
than a hypnotic trance because I think most people find "state" less
mysterious and scary than "trance"
...
What is
important is that we try to agree on terms
...


...
The difference between a "hypnotic suggestion" and a
"suggestion" is, I think, simply a matter of degree
...
It was, I
would argue, the hypnotic state that produced the relaxation and rendered
the suggestions more reliably effective than an ordinary suggestion
...

What's going on in hypnosis? My own guess is that through suggestion we
can produce an extraordinarily relaxed state during which it is possible to
reliably communicate with the sub-conscious
...

Freud's theory states, if I remember correctly, that it is possible for the
human mind to contain information--and for a person to act on that
information--without being aware of the information
...
I think there is additional evidence
...

It takes an incredibly long period of time for us to consciously initiate
many motor functions
...
The reflex
time for the same finger motion is a fraction of that
...
Equally
obvious, or so it seems to me, a great mass of data and information for
automatically controlling and regulating such actions must be stored in the
brain someplace and I don't think we have any direct access to that
information or are even aware of its existence in any meaningful way
...

Damage to specific areas of the brain can sometimes result in a "blind
spot" in a person's field of vision
...
The person is actually physiologically blind in that spot or area
...


...
The subject will give every indication of being unable to
see the invisible person (and have on occasion slapped me in the face when
I had the invisible person pinch her on the fanny) and yet, on some level
and in some way, must be able to see the person in order to identify whom
it is that they can not see
...

When the invisible person is seated in one of several otherwise empty
chairs and the subject is asked to "imagine" who would be seated in each
of the chairs if there were someone seated there, he or she will usually
"imagine" the invisible person in the chair in which they are in fact seated
...

I find it difficult to resist the conclusion that the visual information in both
cases is stored in more than one area of the brain and that we have
conscious access to the information in one area but not the other
...

Can everyone be hypnotized? My answer would be a rather tenuous "yes"
...
I think so because I believe that
everyone is to some degree suggestible and that people's brains function in
very similar fashions
...

I frequently hypnotize groups of from 20 to 30 people
...
No selection is involved
...
I work only with
volunteers and my untested assumption has always been that highly
suggestible people are more likely to volunteer
...
A goodly percentage of the volunteers are people eager to
"prove" that they can not be hypnotized
...


...
An excellent answer
...
I feel
confident that I am a better hypnotist today than I was five years ago
...


...
In the
first place, I'm not sure how the "no induction" portion of the experiment
could be arranged
...
The induction does not have to be complicated or
follow any particular format
...
It is not a terribly
effective procedure but for me, so far, it has been infallible and I take care
that it remain so by employing it sparingly and only when I know it will
work
...

If you want to study the effectiveness of induction, first find yourself a
good hypnotist
...
If you insist on
doing it yourself, start off with several years of practice and then when
you're fully confident that you have mastered the art, give yourself a test
by walking out in front of several hundred skeptical people in an
auditorium and giving a demonstration
...

I agree fully with the reservations expressed about the unreliability and

potential dangers of memories and testimony elicited under hypnosis
...
I would imagine
that such a witness would pass a lie detector test without difficulty
...

Past lives regression I regard as blatant nonsense
...
The two will then proceed to invent a language
(mostly, but not always entirely, gibberish) and give confident answers and
translations to all manner of questions about life on Venus
...


...
Most subjects remember little if anything that
happened
...
The best and what
seems to me the most accurate report I have ever seen is contained in the
autobiography of one of my subjects, the late Richard Feynman's, "Surely
You're Joking, Mr
...


...


...
To make that point to a class
of college students, I once turned to a member of the class, Doug Smith,
and asked him if he had ever been hypnotized
...
While I
confidently expected him to insist that he had never been hypnotized,
Doug surprised me by answering "Yes"
...
"

...
Ted was fond of
cats and I had several times given him the post-hypnotic suggestion that
upon awakening he would be petting a cat
...
For more than half an hour Ted sat comfortably and
contentedly in a chair stroking the cat before turning to me and, as he
hefted the imaginary cat, saying: "This is mind boggling
...
I
feel the weight of the cat
...
I feel the texture of
the cat's fur
...
And yet I know there is
no cat
...

Is it necessary for the subject to "believe" in order for hypnosis to work? I
don't think so
...
I assume that the former
remember nothing of what is said while the latter remember some or all
...
When I touch my mouth a
typical response is: "Oh, no
...
I wasn't hypnotized
...
It
didn't work with me
...
But it doesn't have anything to
do with you touching your mouth; I'm really thirsty
...

And I think they are really thirsty
...


...
I
think it not "merely suggestion"
...
I think that's
what hypnosis is
...
or hypnosis
...

I also think there's quite a bit of suggestion (or hypnosis
...
Many nurses who have patients in intense
pain but to whom they can give no more morphine, sometimes administer
injections of distilled water and find that the suggestion of a morphine
injection is often as effective as morphine itself
...
"Take
one before every meal"
...
and sometimes it does
...

Some medical doctors have told me that they would consider it a violation
of medical ethics to prescribe a placebo
...
Placebos are cheap and have no side effects
...
Both are viral infections
...


...
I will not bore nor strain the credulity of SCICOP members
with a recitation of some of the benefits claimed
...


...
What they
see is so very hard to believe that most audiences tend to explain it as
"acting" or "faking"
...

I seldom encounter faking and if they're acting then my suggestion to any
Hollywood talent scouts out there is to follow me around for a while
...
I recently gave a young man a pair of "X-ray
glasses" that permitted him to see through people's clothing so that

everyone appeared nude
...
I asked him to return to his chair and as he stood up I
saw immediately why he had sat down
...
Faking?
Acting? Please
...

Macoy
Email macoy@nmax
...

The Stage Perspective: Confidence to Success!
My experience as a stage hypnotist has been very trying at times
...
In the past few years I have made several observations while
watching other stage hypnotists perform and found that they have
difficulties as well
...
That is your main objective and your main
concern
...

As I observe other stage hypnotists, I notice that they freeze or panic when
there are small numbers of people at their show
...
One hypnotist
said to me that he has a better show but he blamed poor attendance for his
lack of enthusiasm
...
You should use the same amount of energy (if not more) to
entertain the crowd
...
Take
responsibility as the entertainer
...

I had no idea that there would be a blizzard
...
I was amazed that there was a crowd of
even 30 people given the weather conditions
...
Of course, I started to panic
...
I did it differently that night
...
Instead, I talked to
the audience individually and in small groups and explained the basics of
hypnosis to them
...

I didn’t use the stage and instead I chose to put the volunteers in a circle on
the dance floor
...
I had to work extra hard and had to use
extra energy to get the remaining crowd to applaud and cheer for the
volunteers
...
After the show, I found out that there
was a reporter in the room and later gave him an interview
...
When I read the paper the
next day, I discovered he had given me a great review and wrote a big
article
...

As you can see, it doesn’t matter what the circumstances are
...


I feel that this experience has made me a better entertainer
...

So remember, YOU ARE AN ENTERTAINER! Always do your best!!!
Happy Trancing,
Krisztina

...
com
and visit my web page: http://www
...
com/

Stepping Up – Howard Morgan
Let's be honest
...
Not only do we love doing it, but
to someone who's never seen a show, it's nothing short of amazing
...
The
problem is, far too often, we ride the wake of the venue, and give up being
showmen (and women for you politically correct types out there)
...
At the time
I discovered that audiences were captivated by watching their spouses run
from imaginary mice or forget their names
...
At that time I was getting
what would probably amount to $200 in today's money per show, and was
ecstatic
...
Then I started thinking, and a few simple changes in my routine
suddenly made my show easily marketable at my current rate of $2500+ a
show
...

I remember my post grad years in theater when in college
...
Boring would be an understatement
...


...
Rogers and Hammerstein being
massacred by the director's friends
...

These shows were usually performed for audiences of less than 200 people
in small cramped rooms with no air conditioning
...
If it wasn't for regularly scheduled handouts
from overly generous patrons and city halls that wanted to boast of having
a theater in their community, these places would never have survived
...

And then there was real theater
...
Actors who had dedicated most of their lives to learning how
to project and captivate
...
Countless hours memorizing lines
...

The director then surrounded the cast with very expensive sets and special
effects and spared no expense in promoting the show
...


2000-3000 patrons gladly lined up 5 or 6 times a week to each pay from
$50 for balcony seats to $200 a person for private viewing boxes
...
And audiences left convinced they had gotten a
bargain
...

Back in my $200 a show days I offered a show that probably fit
somewhere in the community theater category
...
About the only
time I actually thought about my show was when I was on stage having
problems during an induction period
...
And only a very small
portion of my clients ever called back
...

Then I decided to make it a career
...
I started considering what made my
show sell (as little as it did) and what might make it sell better
...
And
suddenly I found myself slipping into the "real theater" mode
...
I carefully considered when was
the best moment to pull the microphone out of the stand
...
I
remember spending hours trying to imagine myself sitting in an audience
watching my show
...

I even experimented with various concepts for streamlining the induction
period and actually found you can do most of the induction "talk" before
ever telling anybody to close their eyes, provided you can get their
undivided attention
...

I also overhauled my show
...
And instead of simply tossing a bunch of
unrelated "bits" together, I started thinking in terms of captivating opening
bits, exciting middles, and climactic endings
...


...

Instead of just having someone "Speak Like A Martian", I began by
interviewing a deep south family (with a strong Southern Drawl) about a
UFO that had landed on their property
...

My body motion and "story teller" persona made it impossible for even the
non hypnotized audience members to not see the stars
...
I'd guide them through seeing a
space ship coming close enough for them to see the "creatures" inside
...
"You think it's funny", "you're
very scared", "you want them to take you up as an abductee", etc
...

I then had everybody imagine they were all Martians on the space ship,
each doing their own weird body contortions and making high pitched
squeaky sounds while landing and looking out of portholes at the "funny
looking humans" in the audience
...

I even had people drop dry ice in hot water buckets off stage during some
of my higher paying shows to get the eerie "smoke on the floor" effect
...

Watching each person trying to outdo all the others with facial expressions
and body motions definitely offered a high quality "climax" to the 15 to 20
minute "bit" we had just experienced
...
A sharp
translator could easily make this one of the more memorable parts of the
show
...

Whereas my cheaper show usually sold only to one time buyers, once I
took the time to do it up right, I suddenly found that my large number of
repeat customers allowed me to cut down on promotion costs
...

Most corporate events are given for other corporate leaders
...
I found that it
was rare for me to make it through a corporate event without having at
least 4 or 5 CEO's or event planners ask for my card
...
And as business got better, I could now afford to turn
down lower paying shows (without offending my landlord)
...
I make a point of charging enough so I can afford to dedicate
my time to truly fine tuning the show
...
" I then go on and tell them what I offer
...

This is a far cry from a time when I was regularly stuck begging clients to
believe I was worth $200 when deep down even I didn't believe it myself
...


...
A few
years ago we used to run an agency in Reno and worked pretty close with
the Reno and Vegas markets
...
If you do
a "great" job, all you'll need to "break in" is one private show seen by an
Entertainment Director at a bigger showroom
...
If, on the other
hand, your show is less than top notch, you may not realize it, but soon
after you leave the building, an Entertainment director is probably on the
phone calling his buddies down the strip to warn them
...
Either you make it a lifestyle or you agree to settle for
the leftover peanuts that fall after the elephants leave town
...

Email:howardmorgan@witty
...
merlynarts
...
html

The Unknown Hypnotist
Behind The Scenes of an Entertainer
By Michael Giannantonio

...

I am The Unknown Hypnotist, a stage hypnotist / Illusionist, and the
questions I get asked most often aren't that of what most would think, they
are of a more realistic nature, and it's time to put these questions to the test
...
The performances
which are taken for a few hundred bucks, just to pay for hotel rooms, food
and gas to get from town to town, the late nights and lonely days and for
what you may ask?
To gain the experience and notoriety due as a performer in hopes of getting
that big break? This could possibly be one of the loneliest occupation one
can embark in
...

As an entertainer your first obligation is to your audiences, on a standard
tour of we'll say three states and twenty-five shows in five to six weeks
time
...

The nightclub run for instance would be extremely difficult, not so much
for just a hypnotist who walks in with a boom box and a few tapes,
however for an entertainer this can be a difficult task
...

The show begins at we'll say 9:00 p
...
and continues on until roughly
11:00 - 11:30, when afterwards you mingle with the fans, have a drink,
relax for a bit and then the club is closed, so it's 1:00 a
...
and now time for
you to tear down the stage, easy task for a 5 or 6 man crew, but let's face it,
you don't have a 5 man crew, if you're lucky, you have a 2 man crew, that's
you and someone else, after taking the stage props down and packing the

vehicle ( usually a large uncomfortable van with terrible suspension ) you
glance at you watch to realize it is now 3:30 a
...
, and you need to be on
the road at 8:00 a
...
to make your next performance at 10:00 p
...
that
night
...
After five nights straight in four different
cities, you get a night off, and believe me the last thing you want to do is
go out for a night on the town, You tend to be more worried with getting
the feeling back into your feet before the next group of shows comes up
...
Then the adult show, fun
crowd, usually very late performance and wild and crazy audience, these
shows tend to "drain" you as your energy level is extremely high
...
Pepper and hit the road again
...
You have planned for this performance for 2 months and know
exactly what you want to do, however the thing you didn't plan for was the
fact that you have been on the road for four weeks and have set up and tore
down all your illusions and staging somewhere around twenty times in the
past four weeks, you have driven 2,000 miles, changes hotels 9 times and
eaten Taco Bell for 3 weeks, not to speak of the fact that you average 4 to 6
hours of sleep per night
...

After relaxing for a day, you decide to set up your stage and take your time
rehearsing and making sure everything is perfect for the client
...


Once this performance is finished, it's time to kick off the final phase of
the tour, three or four more shows in which you want to give your all to
finish up a great note
...
This brings me to the
point of the story, remember the questions I asked in the beginning?
Here's where it all pays off, because behind the lights, the costumes and
the glitz is what you saw when you shook that hand for the first time, the
smile, because without that, you can't go on, it's not the art that I push for,
it's the audience
...
And
you can believe that the smile is real, because the joy that a true entertainer
gains from seeing an audience having a great time is unmatched by
anything you could possibly imagine
...

That is the payoff that I seek, be it a show for 150 people in a club, or a
performance for 12,000 in an arena, the payoff is the same, and as we grow
as entertainers and "make it" in the business, it is the true entertainer who
never loses sight of what is important, the fans, because it is the fans who
make you what you are and if there is respect to be given, don't feel it
belongs to the entertainer, because the truth is, it belongs to each and every
one of you, who support the cause and stand by in awe wondering what it
would be like to be that entertainer
...

Sincerely,
Michael Giannantonio
The Unknown Hypnotist
http://www
...
com/
The Very Best Advertising
Let's face it
...
I can tell you my show was great, that the audiences loved it,
that people will be talking about it for years to come
...

Of course, if someone else says it, it takes on a whole new meaning
...
And the good news is, that if you know
how to do it, getting quality testimonials isn't anywhere near as hard as
most would think
...

They've come from General Managers and CEO's of major corporations,
The Activities Directors for world famous amusement parks, Sales and
Catering Directors at 4 Star Hotels and Resorts, Doctors, Lawyers,
Celebrities and countless others
...

When a potential client is busy considering whether or not to use my
services, there are two things they're busy trying to find out
...
The logical place to find these things out is to ask
respected people that have already experienced my show their opinion
...

The hidden secret that somehow seems to allude most entertainers when
getting letters of referral is really very simple, just ask
...
And there's more than one place in the process of doing a show
where a well placed request is sure to get a letter
...
Federal law says you aren't
supposed to use quotes in your advertising unless you currently have
copies of signed letters including them
...
It is legal, however, to quote sources, and
even to use a simple trick I'll explain in a minute, to quote yourself,
provided you can get someone important to sign the letter
...
I know
this to be true, because I actually wrote the letters myself, and then had
these people sign them
...

Just this past week I did a show for a VIP Party (high rollers club) at
Harrah's Casino just outside of Topeka, Kansas
...
Everybody in the room was being honored as being part
of the high class casino "elite"
...
And then I come up and tell them to
bark like dogs
...

But the show did go off, and the 5 people I ended up with worked out
fairly well
...
I'm not sure how the manager felt about the show on
his own, but after having a few of his "high rollers" come up and tell me
how great it was (what else are you supposed to say to the performer at the
back of the room??) he developed a big smile and started congratulating
the lady who coordinated the event on putting together a winning package
...

He told me it was great
...
" He
immediately assured me that he'd be very glad to draft up a letter and get it
right out to me
...
But I added, "If I know your letter is coming, I'll go on and
hold up on putting my mailer together for a week so I can quote you if you
don't mind
...

He agreed to get right on it
...
But that still
wasn't enough
...
As expected, she told me
he'd be busy, but assured me that she would see to it that he got it done real
soon
...

Yes, the casino's marketing department already had it, but it won't hurt for
her to be able to casually walk in when he has a few moments and remind

him about the letter
...
My
chances just jumped to probably 95%
...

This is the traditional way of asking for letters
...
Without being obnoxious, I'm willing to do all I can to get
a good letter
...
Over the next few years, this one letter,
which took less than 10 minutes of the GM's time, will probably sell
$40,000 worth of shows for me
...
And all the
upper class establishments (cruise ships, resorts and the like) will
definitely respect his opinions
...
If you've
already done a good show for someone, and you know they'll probably be
calling you again, there's nothing wrong with calling them up and asking
for references
...
That will probably never happen
...
Once they agree, ask
them if they'll mind giving you a few moments to answer some questions
...

I've never had anybody say no
...
Don't ask "did you like the show?" ask "how did you
like the show, and why"
...
This might also be a good place, as you're wrapping it up,
to request a referral or two
...


As soon as you finish the telephone interview, explain that federal law
prohibits you from quoting him if you don't have his quotes in writing, so
if he doesn't mind, you'll draw up a simple letter, reflecting his answers,
and mail it right off to him
...

When I do this, I also include a special thank you note and offer him an
incentive as a way of showing my appreciation
...
It the letter is
extra good, I might even toss in a night's stay at a local resort which I
traded work for (I explain this in the next paragraph)
...
That guarantees that he'll get the note, sign it and place
it in the self addressed stamped envelope immediately
...
But cassette tapes are a lot harder to save than
letters are
...

Most of my larger shows get me letters of recommendation, and there's a
simple reason why
...
Their budget was more in the $1500 league and they're not
sure if they can get this amount approved
...

Starting with $2500 and then letting them talk you down to $1000 is a sure
way to convince the client that your show isn't as good as you think it is
...
And the first
thing I ask for, is a letter of recommendation
...

CLIENT: "You know, I really would like to use your show, but the truth is,
that price is a little out of our budget"
ME: "Well, Cathy, the truth is, I've been at this for quite a while now, and I
have enough people that are very willing to pay that price
...
I'll tell you what I would be willing to do,
though
...
"
CLIENT: "Even $200 won't be enough" (Notice I now have her
negotiating for me
...
")
ME: "How much do you feel you can afford?"
CLIENT: "I can probably go as high as $2000"
ME: "$2000
...
If you'll agree to get that letter out to me,
and give me a week's stay at your resort that I can use any time I want, I'll
knock my price down to $2000
...
"
ME: "Okay, I'll hold your date for a week and expect to hear back from
you by next Wednesday
...
I'll immediately fax her a contract with all the details of
the show, and add at the bottom an extra paragraph that reads something to
the effect of:
"Client further agrees to forward a letter to Howard, written on company
letterhead, no later than one week (5 working days) after the completion of
the show
...
"

I also have a bunch of these comped hotel vouchers
...
I also use them as "thank
you" gifts for better clients at the end of the year
...
in exchange for lowering my price enough so they
can sell it to their clients); traded performances (local DJ's etc
...
I'm sure to need a DJ somewhere during my next holiday
season, so I'll probably make a profit on the deal
...
And
I have a stack of them
...

The Director of Marketing at the San Diego Zoo is one of the busiest
people in town
...
He definitely
does not have the time to stop everything and write a letter
...
My letter from him, on the other hand, is perfect
...
It says just what I'd want it to say,
because I wrote it
...
He
explained that as a policy he usually doesn't write letters because he
doesn't want to get bogged down with a long list of people that all want his
recommendations
...
I
then told him, if he didn't mind, that I'd be willing to write up a letter for
him, send it out to him, and if he felt it adequately represented his feelings,
all he had to do was sign it
...

Typically, in this kind of situation, I begin by swinging by his office and
ask someone for a piece of stationary because "Mr
...
They give it to me, I go home, write
up something realistic but full of sound bites (he was captivating, I was
amazed, the energy level was incredible, I've never laughed so hard in my
life, etc
...
What he's really wondering is
whether anything you've quoted him as saying will be incriminating (stay
away from comments like "there's no other entertainer in town that I'd
recommend more than
...
If the letter is "safe" you'll get a
great letter
...

Personally I shy away from this method, because, although it's legal, the
ethics are questionable
...

Basically, when you read one of those quotes from, say, the L
...
Times,
that lists a person as "America's foremost Hypnotist", there's a decent
chance the person isn't really quoting an editorial in the L
...
Times
...

They basically took out an ad in the paper, or ran a spot on the radio, and
then quoted something they wrote about themselves
...
And
considering how easy it is to get press releases published (which then do,
officially, become the opinion of the paper) and the number of quality
letters you can get elsewhere, personally I don't feel this method is needed
...

It takes a bit of work, but after all is said and done, show business is like

any other business
...

Selling Therapy at Shows by Howard Morgan
Okay, let's be honest
...
We've just managed to take total strangers and somehow
talk them into doing some mighty strange things
...
So why not take
advantage and sell some therapy on the side, now that we've overcome the
image issues?
I do it all the time
...
And
it's not uncommon for people to schedule sessions for the next morning, as
well
...
But first, it's vitally important that we don't go around
selling snake oil
...
Once we have the induction part down, it's hard to not
assume that means we qualify to cure all the illnesses of the world
...

We've all gone around telling people for years that Hypnosis is harmless,
that nobody gets hurt, and many of us have even come to believe it, to
some degree, ourselves
...
In a stage setting, where volunteers come to
have fun, and don't expect any long lasting suggestions, most of what
we're doing is, relatively harmless
...

We do need to be careful with time regression, and the possibility of taking
someone back to some repressed memory
...
All
the relatives managed to live with the distorted truth, because nobody
wanted to see "little Johnny" suffer any more than he had to
...
John, a 45 year old manager for a major engineering
firm
...

Now suddenly, during a show by the Magnificent Dr
...
In fact, he's now at his 5th birthday party
...

He's very expressive, and the audience is eating it up
...
He mentally
walks to the door, opens it, and suddenly, years of repressed fears and
imagined monsters, all come flying out of your exposed Pandora's Box
...
There lies his father, with
brains and guts splattered all over the sidewalk
...

Taking people back in time is something we all need to do with the utmost
care, if at all
...
Even the
slightest hint of an unexpected emotion is your signal to immediately move
to a different time in their past
...
If, as you start to hypnotize a
person, you find someone is having mild convulsive reactions to
suggestions, you may want to send that person back immediately
...
Which of them should focus? Should one of them listen in as the
other obeys? Is it possible for one to focus completely, when in fact a full
half of their thinking power is being used by a second personality? Don't
play with this, it too is dangerous
...
You'll see a person trying to focus, while at the same time, creating a
troubled look on their face
...
It's almost as if a person were
shooting back and forth from a trance to a faking it state
...
This can cause problems
...

Make them feel safe
...
At the count
of three, feeling alert and alive, One
...
aaaaaand
...

If you choose to do therapy, be sure you take the time to understand what
you're doing
...
Be aware that the therapeutic setting is a
lot more permanent
...
One
careless word can leave its impression
...
The lady was very nervous, and obviously expected something
terrible to happen
...
The Doctor is here and
is taking care of you
...
The Doctor
loves you too much to let you suffer any pain
...


The woman came out of the session convinced not only that she had in fact
been abducted and severely abused by probing aliens, but unknowingly the
therapist had also created a causal response that made her assume that the
only reason she had survived, the only reason these terrible "monsters"
hadn't gotten the better of her, was because of the incredible love of her
knight in shinning armor, the therapist
...
It
wasn't easy for him to call her up and ask if she had been feeling any
misplaced love feelings for him
...
He had her come in immediately and
dealt with the potentially neurotic response
...

Figure out how to use metaphors and which ones to use
...
Instead of telling someone that every time
they see a cigarette they're going to think of a worm (I actually heard of a
guy doing that), tell them they are a lot stronger, a lot more capable of
taking control of their life
...

Where the negative metaphors might stop the smoking, in the long run, it
will simply ruin their lives
...
It'll make
them feel gross, insecure and unsocial
...
Every time they
take a breath, they'll be convinced it's a lot fresher, and they are more in
control of their lives
...

Across the board, we had an 82% success rate, without ever having to ruin
anybody's day
...
Our
successes with in other areas are just as impressive
...
For a year or two after I gained my
"40's" weight, I felt like a hypocrite offering to help others do what I
obviously wasn't doing myself
...
Make sure you know what you're
doing, and then start making plenty of extra money
...
Smoking and weight loss usually take 2
sessions, phobias take 3 and most sexual issues take 3 to 4
...
When
I do therapy on the road, I usually sell a 90 minute session for $150,
explaining that we'll need to really dig in deep and make this one session
effective
...
Clients walk in convinced I can do anything, as opposed to
wondering if I'm a con man who's only going to steal their money, as often
is the case in an office setting
...

And the fact that they've watched me do multiple rapid induction's on stage
makes it acceptable to do a rapid induction rather than having to drag out a
slow, full body, induction
...

So how do you go about getting all this extra money? It all starts long
before you walk on stage
...

In that setting, it sounds like an endorsement for your competency as a
hypnotist
...
Several locals who have always wished they could find
the right "miracle worker" capable of helping them deal with, say, their
fear of flying, may come just to meet you, wondering deep down, what
they'd have to do to get you to help them
...
I use either small 1/3 page flyers or fancy table
toppers (depending on the setting)
...
Comments like "He's
performed in clubs nationally for over 25 years and has successfully
practiced hypnotherapy for 27" again suggest that I know what I'm doing
...
Please talk to
him after the show if you are interested
...
The flyer also suggests
that clients can mail order therapy tapes at a future date
...

Then the show begins
...
People who entered believing hypnosis is a bunch of Mumbo
Jumbo, suddenly watch their wives falling in love with brooms, and decide
maybe it is real
...
Anybody who has ever
wondered if a hypnotist could "heal them" is suddenly wondering if they
can afford my services
...
available at the back of the room
...
I know
after shows like this one I usually get quite a few people interested in
private therapy sessions
...
"
After that line, I've actually watched wives turn to their husband, quickly
beg, and then start working their way up to the front of the room even
before the show was over
...
First,
most of your clients are going to be women
...
If you happen to be
a guy, you might consider adopting a policy I use where I refuse to do
therapy on a woman where I'm stuck in a room with her alone
...
With all the misconceptions
about hypnosis floating around, I want to make sure nobody ever wonders
what went on during our session
...

When they enter the room, I become a doctor
...
I ask plenty of questions before diving in, and make sure she's
comfortable with what's about to happen
...

I make a point of remaining unemotional even is she happens to be talking
about personal sexual issues or some other potentially awkward topic
...
She can be honest, and we'll soon get down to dealing with the
issues
...


Remember you aren't a doctor
...

As a hypnotist, you do have the ability to take away most any kind of pain,
but that isn't always the advisable way to go
...

Without an actual written permission from a Doctor saying it's okay to
relieve any kind of pain, it's usually a good policy to explain you really
don't want to risk creating a dangerous situation
...

Remember, there's a lot of money to be make here, but along with any
ability, comes a certain level of responsibility
...
It'll
not only bankrupt you in the long run, it'll also make it impossible for any
of the rest of us to do business in the areas where you've given hypnotists a
bad reputation
...
I
must have hit a hot spot
...
So I decided to break down and offer some of
the marketing tid bits you learn after making every mistake in the book
(more than once) over the course of 27 years
...

Actually, most of my methods are probably considered "radical" by the

mainstream, but they've worked for many others, and me
...
During the
past couple months I've done Harrah's Casino just outside of Topeka
(where I made $2600 plus expenses for a show), Cisco Systems (the
internet giants) where they paid $3600 for a one hour show at Pinehurst,
NC, and three other $2000 plus shows
...
I
was also a successful stunt coordinator and stunt man with the National
Association of Stunt Actors for 2 years
...
But most of all, my know
how is built on a bunch of scars and skinned knees I've inherited after
years of false starts
...
Several years ago I used to do a seminar called
"This Business Called Show Business" where I helped starting actors,
magicians, clowns, stunt men and the likes get going in their careers
...

In order to try and cover as much material as possible in the limited space I
have, I'm going to move quickly here, so hang on
...
This month's section will
discuss getting organized and choosing the market(s) you might be
interested in
...
Should you direct mail, take an ad out in the
yellow pages or maybe pay for a billboard? It'll all be in next month's
issue
...

Before going any further, you need to be sure you know, without a
question, what your mission statement is
...
If you don't
know, without question, where you're hoping to end up, at best your career
might succeed by mistake
...
Or maybe, a bit more immediate, you might want to,
"Sell at least one $1500 show next year
...

My own personal goal is, again, a bit unethical
...
" Of
course I also have goals as a writer (which I've done successfully most of
my life) and a promoter
...
If you
want to be famous in your community, then start donating shows around
town
...
If you want to make a living as a performer, then stop
chasing the poor
...
If you're goal is to consistently command more than $1000
a show, then quit sending mailers to Civic Clubs
...
If you're looking to build a reputation that will allow
your phone to ring (as mine did earlier today) and have someone apologize
because they can only afford $1500 for a one hour show, then focus all
your promotion on the markets that have that kind of budget
...
I'm not saying there isn't a place for lower paying

shows, but you should only do them when they work in well with the
bigger picture
...

Take a moment and consider what market you want to tackle, and
PLEEEEEAAAAASE, if you get anything out of this article, be sure you
get this
...
Most performers are so afraid of failing at any
one of several ventures that they try to spread themselves out so thin that
they never stand a chance of making it in any field
...

That means one year to get them to know you well, another to get them to
hire you and a third to get them to hire you again, while referring you to
friends
...
They keep you in town and save a lot on long
distance phone calling
...
The problem is there are only two, maybe three working
weekends before Christmas (depending on what day the 25th lands)
...
But that still only gives you
12 to 14 shows all year
...
You can
add a few extra shows by working the colleges and military
...

1
...


State Fairs and Public Events
...
Your local Chamber of Commerce can direct you to events in your
state
...

They don't pay as much per show (probably anywhere from $200 to $400)
but you can usually sneak in a bunch of shows in a week's run
...

Cruise Ships
...
They usually want a long term commitment, and they
1
...
You're expected
to play PR 24 hours a day and the pay isn't great
...
The advantages include the
feeling of being a "celebrity" (it's hard not to be when you have a captive
audience)
...
Typically, you'll
be working on board for 6 months, with no expenses, which means your
$150 each shows done 3 times a week nets you a $12000 check as you get
ready to take your month break before starting it all over
...
By themselves they pay nearly nothing
...
When I did
assemblies, I used to make some good money off the package
...
High and High Schools in the area on a discounted show
...
It'd then come in and do 15 or 20 assemblies in a larger town,
all within a couple weeks
...
Tickets for this show were sold by the
sponsoring organization (usually the PTA or SBTO or whatever the local
parent teacher organization was
...
With enough hype and a good
enough take home flyer, it wasn't hard to sell a third or so of each school
...
You multiply that times 15
schools, you now have 3900 students
...
I'd make $2 a ticket for students,
$3 for adults
...
If
this package sold, just the way it's outlined above, I would gross $15,600
at the door
...
Even if you allow for half that amount (say there
aren't as many schools), you'd still make $8,925
...


sound, but regardless, for relatively little work, you just made $6,425
...
Raise the overall ticket price
by a dollar, and then hire a local phone mill company (telephone solicitors)
to call every home in the neighborhood offering to sell them tickets to a
show that will help benefit the local "home for abused children" or
whatever
...
Plenty of people will pay for tickets
to help the cause; maybe a quarter of them will show up
...
Breaking $10,000 for this one night show is very
doable
...

The week I was doing the larger auditorium I was busy doing the
assemblies at the next town
...
They all happen within a little more than a
month somewhere around June
...
Again, these shows don't pay an
awful lot, but they do seem to add up quickly
...
I'll
make $800 a show, but can usually sneak in at least 2 shows a night, 4 or 5
nights a week for 4 to 5 weeks
...

1
...
This is where the big money is
...
This is one of my
main markets
...
I have one
company that flies me around the country monthly to finish off their
weekend of marketing efforts to local banks
...
Several others use me quarterly or biannually
...
Once you're doing it, you have to continue your marketing
effort
...

1
...


Comedy Clubs
...
There are a lot

of comics trying to get in, and most clubs will only use you, at most, twice
a year
...
After they do, you're faced with the task
of talking them into even taking the time to look at your tape
...
That usually takes 5 or 6 years
...
I try to do as
many of my clubs as possible during a yearly Spring Tour, which helps
cover the otherwise slower Jan through May months
...
Comedy clubs, again, don't pay that well
...
A decent act can usually get
between $300 and $400 a show
...
That's provided you can carry a
show without them having to pay for an opener or closer, which basically
means you have to keep a very demanding audience entertained for a
complete 90 minutes
...
It used to be that working a casino meant traveling to Atlantic
City or somewhere in Nevada
...
Casinos are springing up all over the place
...
Casinos are fun, but don't be fooled
...
They usually have a larger room reserved for
famous celebrities and at least on Cabaret room they have to keep full
...
You can plan on working
pretty cheap the first time or two, until you prove yourself
...
The entire casino
Entertainment Directors know each other, and invariably discuss the good
and bad acts that appear in their clubs
...
If you
deserve it, they do have the money
...

It basically boiled down to 4 hours of sitting in the break room waiting for
1
...

Working for Agents
...
Not all agents are as nice as they
seem
...

Tell agents you'll work for them but they need to understand that you're
working for other agents as well
...
Agents are supposed to take between 10% and 20% of what you
make
...
I know even in Southern
California, where the movie industry has forced agents into some pretty
strict guidelines, and they can lose their license for charging you 25%, it's
a common practice for agents to take anywhere from 40% to 80% of your
fee
...
The agent calls you a week later to announce he managed to
get you $600 on a show
...
The truth is, he sold the show for $1500 and is pocketing
$900
...
There are some good ones out there though
...
I send out fruit baskets during
Thanksgiving, cards at X-mass and birthday gifts to their kids
...

1
...
That's the industry term for "doing your own thing"
...

Basically you find a local auditorium and you put the whole package
together yourself
...
When I 4 wall, I usually stack the
deck in my favor
...
I buy a
banquet room for usage every Friday night for 3 months
...
Basically,
if you bring your dinner receipt from one of these restaurants, we'll give
you so much off at the door
...


tables announcing the show
...
I then comp a big show to all the local theater people, magic
clubs, clown clubs, etc
...
I then offer all the local media free meals, on me (actually, I
get Sales and Catering to spread out the cost over the 3 month run, as part
of their package)
...
One good show, a good press
package and plenty of quick exposure make this an easy kick off
...
We
hypnotize co-anchors, do open lines, the works
...

Obviously these are just some of the possible markets you can aim at, but
hopefully it's enough to stimulate your imagination
...
Just get busy and do it now
...
We'll cover all the
marketing possibilities (radio, television, yellow pages, newspaper, etc
...
We'll even include a section on how to get plenty
of free or next to free publicity
...
I know it's
hard to believe, but if you know how to do it, there are very few shows you
can't sell at a price well above the norm
...

Last month, in part one of Promoting the Show, we discussed the various
markets where a Stage Hypnotist can work
...
Over the years I've found myself working everywhere
...
I can
usually plan on making anywhere from $150 to $200 for an hour show
done to a street audience
...
There are definite advantages to street
performing
...
But it's hard to

make a consistent living in a market that's controlled by weather and bus
schedules
...
And
as you start pointing at specific markets, you suddenly find yourself
defining the nature of your promotional efforts
...
How much should you plan on spending to
promote your show? If I were trying to sell lollypops, where you'd
probably make a 3 cent or so profit on each sale, you'd find yourself
having to sell 13,333 lollypops to pay for each $400 newspaper ad you
took out
...

Basically, most of the overhead involved in your shows are covered by
your client or the club you work for
...
Personally, I plan on spending about 1/3 of my gross income
promoting my show
...
It may sound like a lot, but in my case, my
shows usually start at a low of probably $1800 plus expenses and a high of
around $4000 plus
...

And that's the first, cardinal rule, in promotion
...
It's just that simple
...
If you try a venue and find that for every $100 you spend
you make $200, then you can feel safe dumping as much money as you'd
like to double into that area
...

Once you do, work it like crazy
...
If, say, you're spending $10,000 promoting heavily for the
Holiday Season, you're going to find that regardless of how good you are,

you're still going to find yourself trying to cram as many shows as you can
into the 3 weekends before Christmas
...
You'd have to
make $834 per show just to break even
...
If you do the kind
of show that keeps clients calling you back, it may be worth it to do a
"break even" season
...
Referrals will also help push down the promotional cost
...
I recently moved from San Diego
to Oklahoma City
...
To make my name recognizable
locally, I'm a lot more open to high visibility ads, even if they don't seem to
gather an immediate profit
...
They
can't really afford our cost, but I'm trying to negotiate in several of the
large ads they run before the movies on their screens
...
I honestly would be
shocked if I got a single call from these ads
...
But a lot of people will sit up and
take notice when they see a hypnotist advertising at the movies
...
It'll also help me
immensely when I go to sell these packages
...

Not to mention that several of their staff are probably going to remember
the ads the moment the name comes up
...


The first concept to keep in mind as you plan a promotional campaign, is
that fame is very fleeting
...
In practical terms this means you
need to begin by deciding which of the markets we discussed in last
months issue you are interested in reaching
...

Promoters usually agree that the typical prospect won't buy until they've
had at least 6 exposures to your name and/or product
...
Typically, if you're looking to attract the local convention
business, you'll probably want to join your local "Visitors and Convention"
Bureau
...
You can roughly consider this one
line (or small ad, if you choose to pay for it) as your first exposure
...

As a member, you'll also get a list of everybody schedule to do an event in
your town
...
At this point, try to avoid talking to this person
...
Follow up your call by dropping a nice, brief, teaser package in
the mail to them
...
The package should offer them the
chance to request a demo tape, but don't expect any call backs
...
Obviously, if anybody happens to call, you drop them a
package in the mail ASAP
...

For those that don't, wait about 4 days after they are scheduled to receive
your information and then give them a call
...
As you talk, ask casually if they are having a
banquet or other function during their event where your services might be

needed
...
Don't try to sell
anything here
...
Your goal here is simply to be a helpful friend
...
It's also a good idea to assume if
you're going to ask for higher ticket prices, you want them to be as sold as
possible before you break the price to them
...

In my case, I try to establish perceived value
...
I
don't know your credentials, but this is where they come in handy
...
I explain that although my show does usually run for $2500 or
more, I can guarantee it'll be an experience they won't soon forget
...
"At 15 or so dollars a plate times 200 people, you're now paying
$3000 for something most of your guests won't even notice
...
I then ask if $2500 is within their budget
...

I'm sure you realize that most of these guys are planning on maybe $200
max
...
I always leave
them with a statement that really is true
...
I explain that
I'm sure we can work something out that will bring it into their budget, but
if we can't, I don't mind recommending quality performers that might be
able to work at a lower rate for them
...
I explain that in the long run, it works to my

advantage to have people out there seeing quality shows
...

Next month, when we talk negotiating, we'll discuss how to "bring it into
their budget" without ever having to haggle or lower your prices
...
What would
you do if someone told you they were mailing you a demo tape of a $3000
show? You'd probably wait at the mailroom each day, wondering what kind
of show was worth that kind of money
...

If they don't ask price, I don't bring it up until about a week after they get
my demo tape
...
I try to avoid
hard sells here
...

Either way, when they get my promo material and demo tape, it better be
good
...
I can usually find a
local person who can do a "2 camera shoot" where one camera is stationary
and the other one is hand held and roaming for about $250
...
The 10 minute or less tape is great because you can get blank
10 minute tapes for less than a dollar (I buy them in bulk for $0
...
It's
also a lot easier to convince the average buyer to take "ten minutes" to see
what your show looks like
...
Pay to have it
done professionally, and plan on sitting in the editing room while it's being
done, directing the editor concerning your needs and desires
...
I end up with one digital

master (for future editing) and a regular master
...

That's the basic sales formula for probably 90% or my shows
...
Cruise ships will be
interested in the 30 minute tapes and more references
...
You'll
probably notice that I didn't pay a penny for yellow pages or magazine
advertising
...
In fact, quickly, let me give you a breakdown of
the experience my company has had with various forms of advertising
...
I usually upgrade that
to a small ($20 a month or so) "In Column Ad"
...
Most of the calls
you're going to get from your yellow pages ad are going to be local
birthday party or civic group calls with itsy bitsy budgets
...
A $50 a month ad will probably pay
for itself with the 3 or 4 bigger shows you book a year from the ad
...
Event planner journals, trade show
coordinator journals, and so on
...
If you're targeting a specific
market and are willing to back up your ad with plenty of cold calling
(using the formula shown above), then taking out an ad in these journals is
well worth it
...
I usually spend some
money here
...

Billboards, bus benches and the like
...
The odds of getting a call from a public ad

are pretty slim
...
As a rule, I try to avoid the high cost of name recognition
advertising until I have a reason to justify it
...
The deal is I get 10% of the door
...
Most clubs would
jump at this deal (provided they like your show and can afford a higher
ticket price)
...
This will get your name around town
quickly
...

10% of the door, in, say, a club that seats 200 at $6 each, would make me
(if we only sell 150 tickets a night) about $90 a night, plus plenty of
exposure to leverage off of quickly
...
I'm personally working on this kind of package for Oklahoma City
aimed at this coming summer as a way of quickly becoming "famous" in
my new home
...
I'll also use it as an excuse to invite every local
agent, event planner and sales and catering agent from local hotels to come
by and see the show
...
If you already have a show
going and are looking to sell tickets, newspaper is a good medium
...
You can
also get some exceptional coverage if you contact the layout person for
your local paper and agree to buy "extra" space
...
If
you give them several different size ads and offer to let them use them to
fill extra space, you can usually get ads placed for about 1/4 the cost
...
Watch upcoming articles here for detailed explanations on how to

write press releases that get published
...
Offer to do a show for their Christmas party in exchange for, say,
$1000 worth of advertising
...

Radio Ads If done right, on the right stations, radio ads can work well
...
You can usually end up with a package that includes 70 or 80
spots at about $4 or $5 a spot (on smaller local stations)
...
You can get the list of
top employers (anybody hiring over 1000 people better have a good
Christmas party if they plan on keeping their employees happy) from the
Social Science section of your local library
...
If your goal here is to simply
get your name out, then try doing a sponsor program
...
This means you agree to list their name in all your newspaper
ads and posters
...
You then
go to the local newspaper and talk them into running ads (including the
radio station name and logo) in exchange for getting plenty of ads on the
local radio station
...
Find a local
church or maybe scout group to help you put posters around town
...
I explain
these below
...

Any time you work with radio stations, always try to get guest appearances

on local radio shows
...
I probably do 300 of
these a year promoting comedy clubs, books, events, etc
...
Again, watch for an upcoming article on how to book
radio and television talk shows and what to do once you're on them
...

If it isn't, you can always go across town, where city ordinances will make
it legal and call into your town
...
Most comedy and night clubs depend almost
exclusively on phone sales to sell tickets
...
Haines
puts out a directory like this which you can probably photo copy down at
your local library, or you can buy one of the many CD's that list home
phone numbers nationally and cross reference them
...
Charity
work allows many who actually have no intention of ever coming to the
show to "donate" to the "save the whales foundation" or whatever
...
I walked in to a 300 person auditorium with about 25
people in it
...
He explained the show
was a sell out, but most people were simply willing to send in $10 to help
the local "Say No" group
...
RANDOM PHONE SALES ARE
DEFINITELY NOT THE WAY TO SELL SHOWS
...

Networking If done right, networking is a very powerful tool in your
promotional arsenal
...
Chamber of Commerce meetings, Better Business Bureau mixers,
Lions, Rotary and/or Optimist clubs are all good places to meet people
...
In exchange for a show on an off time for me
(Saturday afternoon or a weeknight) I get two one year memberships (one
for me and one for my wife)
...
who have already
seen the show
...

I'll cover networking more extensively in an upcoming article, but for now,
here are the basics
...
This is particularly true
at mixers and other group events where everybody is competing to sell
products or services
...

Just introduce yourself and get cards
...

Typically, I'll walk up and introduce myself with a line to the effect of "I
guess we're suppose to meet everybody here, so hi, I'm Howard"
...
What do they sell, how do they sell it, anything that will make
me more familiar with their potential needs later on (do they do trade
shows, conventions, company events, sponsor charities, etc
...
Just saying I do Stage Hypnotic
Shows guarantees me as much air time as I want
...
Just say enough to guarantee interest (don't burn them out) and
then collect business cards
...
Quickly find a quiet corner (or the bathroom) and
write on the back of each card any important information you want to
remember when you call next week to say hi and ask who you should send
information about your show to
...

Let's be honest here
...
It takes a lot of selling to get these people in the door
...
Personally, I keep a
list of national fans and contact them all whenever I'm in their area
...
If they bring back a
completed one, I give them a free picture (which costs me about a dime)
...

I also keep a 645 name list of comedy clubs, casinos, resorts, and corporate
prospects around the world that are solid potential clients (they can afford
me and have the facilities or events that can house my show)
...
A few months ago I mentioned a
show I was doing at Harrah's Casino, and how much I worked at getting a
letter of recommendation from them
...
On the outside flap was bulleted information
about my experience, etc
...
I just
sent out 645 mailers, at a total cost to me (including postage, etc
...
From these I'll probably end up selling 2 or 3 shows
...
Watch for
an upcoming article about how to manage and make the most out of a
mailing list
...
There are plenty of on line
services that let you put one together free of charge and if used correctly,
web sites are a great way to promo shows
...
Just being able to tell them to look up my site helps validate my
credentials immensely
...
I'll call back tomorrow, but in the meantime, feel free to look
up my web site at WWW
...
com for more details about my
show
...
In fact, I just had the
Entertainment Director for one of the Mississippi River Casinos do exactly
that a couple weeks ago
...
A
simple site should include letters, background, at least one picture and
general information about your show
...
This isn't about finding the one "magic"
method that suddenly makes you a smashing success
...


It's about keeping a steady flow of exposure to your potential clients and
then delivering a show that's better than anything you offer
...
If you promote consistently, long enough, you'll find it easy to
make a six digit yearly salary with relatively little work
...
It's
probably the most powerful stuff I can offer you
...
How to
sell most shows or programs and how to get all kinds of extra bonuses
tossed in with the package
...

So far we've discussed the various markets and various promotional
venue's
...
Without negotiating abilities, you'll forever be at the
mercy of someone else's budget
...
A good negotiator, on the other hand, can create
markets where there aren't any and have clients thanking them for the
chance to pay $4000 for an hour of your time
...
Nothing could be farther from the truth
...
Getting people to give you something
and then thank you for the privilege, that's negotiating
...
Satisfied customers,
on the other hand, not only call you back, but jump at the chance of
spreading the word for you
...
Suppose I was a
portrait artist doing sketches in the park
...
Chances are, you've already established a "perceived value" in
your mind
...
What are my options? I can offer
you my time at the same price the other guy sold it to you and agree to do a
portrait at $8
...
But suppose I wanted to make a bit more? Suppose I
decided my time was worth, say, $20 a portrait? What would I have to do
to get you to agree?
Even though the answer is pretty obvious, for some strange reason, few
people seem to remember it when faced with a negotiating situation
...
You need to increase the perceived value of
your services
...
You've
basically put the controversial issue "on hold"
...
Show them samples of your work
...
Offer credentials
...
You might also explain that you
include, at no extra charge, a mailing tube with each portrait (which costs
you $0
...

I know personally, back in my street performing days, I really didn't take
much note of the local sketch artists
...
In order to continue selling
them on the street, he had to lower his price down to $40 a sketch
...
Did I get taken? I
don't think so
...
And at this point, if you enter my living
room, you'll find three original "Patrick Hamilton" pictures, in expensive

frames with track lighting showing off my masterpieces
...
I even considered offering to
manage him for a while and get him a few museum exhibits, etc
...

So what does this all have to do with selling a show? The large majority of
performers find themselves doing nothing but negotiating price
...
The client then says $2
...
The client offers $5 if the artist will
include both the kids
...
We get
a call and the client says they need a show for the Saturday night of a
convention
...
They tell us they paid $200 last
year for a comic
...
There are only two possible results to this kind of
negotiation
...

If you expect to get 10 times what the client expected to pay for your show,
you better be able to offer at least 15 times what they thought they were
buying
...
I'll start with comments like, "If you're shopping price, more
than likely I'm going to be a bit out of your budget
...
" If nothing else, this gets their
attention
...
"
After making an arrogant statement like one of the above, I better be ready
to back it up
...
I need strong attention to detail
...
I always send my package out (each of which
costs me about $15) by priority mail
...
20 (with the new

postal rates) as compared to $1
...
And I do it quickly
...
of the year 2000, my
schedule of upcoming shows and one other thing
...
I put it there to remind me of a commitment I made to myself years
ago as my personal way of dealing with a terrible problem of
procrastination I've struggled with all my life
...
As I'm talking to a client,
I fill out a work order that includes the time the call came in
...
All of these little
details help back up the claim that I'm dependable and professional in all I
do
...
To get there, I usually follow a three step
process in negotiating
...
Find out what they need and want
...
Look for unique bargaining chips you'll be able to use
later on
...
I'll usually ask something to the effect of "tell me about your
event"
...
I'll then follow up
with "tell me about your company"
...
I'll usually find out that the company
sells a certain product, and what kind of people they sell it to
...
I'll usually find out what they've done in
past years and why they decided to use a hypnotist
...
What I don't tell them is that I'm also scribbling on a piece

of paper by my phone a list of all the ways I can help them and all the
"perks" I might be interested in getting from them
...
After I've gathered enough general
information I usually make a simple offer presented in the form of a brief
sales talk
...
I did mention at the beginning that I was kind of
expensive, but let me explain to you why
...
They don't realize that the only thing the average person
might remember of your event is the entertainment, and then only if it's
memorable
...
You tell me you're feeding 500 people at the
Marriott banquet hall
...
50 to
$18 per person for dinner alone (I keep a list of the current prices for most
of the major hotel chains handy for just such occasions)
...
You're probably
also spending another $500 on the room
...
So unless you're group is
very unique, you're probably spending anywhere from $10,000 to $20,000
on your evening
...
Do you think
anybody will ever forget that? That advantage of my show over, say, a
good comedian, is that you end up paying for just my services but you end
up with a stage full of performers
...
My show usually
sells for about $2500, but a year from now, when people are still talking
about it, you'll understand why
...
They know it will
take some serious selling to convince the planning committee or the CEO
to spend that much
...
More times than not I'll get answers like, "That's way to
much for us", or "We've never spent more than $400 on entertainment
before"
...
I'll usually leave them with a
very powerful statement
...
You might also take a look at my
Web Site while you're waiting for the information to get to you
...
If we can't bring it
within your budget, I'll be glad to recommend other quality performers in
your area that are willing to work for a little lower price
...
In the long run, it helps me
immensely if people see good shows out there
...
"
Notice here that I've done two things
...
Both are actually teasers that force them to not just cross my name
off the list and go on to the next possible entertainer
...
Up to this point, no real negotiation has taken place
...

1) Close the Deal
...
If they haven't called me back, I call
them
...
Remember, the goal
here is to stay away from arguing over price
...
The first rule I live
by here is I rarely simply "lower my price" after a price has been quoted
...
A small construction
company doing a X-mas party for it's 90 employees at the local Day's Inn
will probably be quoted my rock bottom lowest retail price of $1500 where
IBM can probably expect to start from a $4000 mark
...


Pick up a good book on closing techniques
...

I can hold that date and price for you for 2 weeks
...
Most of the companies that even know about me, find out based on
my mailings or cold calls (see last months article for information on
running a mailing list)
...
This isn't as amazing as it sounds, considering I
prescreened them before mailing to them
...
Most medium size companies will come in at
around $800
...
The truth is, the pause
was pure theatrics
...

1)

The first "perk" I usually negotiate in is multiple shows
...
I would have asked early on if they do any
conventions or trade shows anywhere
...
"If you can work me into
any of your convention budgets, what I can do here is offer you two shows
for $3000
...
If you
know you're company can justify promotional expenses better than it can
entertainment at the company party, I'd be willing to do the Christmas
party for $800 and one of your conventions for $2200
...
If they do, I have them sign both contracts and send me both
deposits (I always ask for a 50% deposit in order to hold a date) before I
go on stage for the first show
...

1)

I remember a few years back doing a show for one of the major
airlines local office
...
I offered to do the show for $200 plus 8
roundtrip tickets for two anywhere the airline flew
...
They jumped at the chance to get my
$3000 show for $200 plus almost nothing
...
Basically I charged other clients the going rate for
airfair and then used the vouchers
...
That
basically means I made $5000 for a show most people would have laughed
at
...
And neither are they
...

Again, they begged poverty, and claimed to only be able to afford $300 or
so
...
To a resort
owner that was a steal, when you consider the number of rooms that
usually go empty each night at these places
...
I also made sure these days could be taken individually
and I could transfer them to other people
...
So instead, I gave away 7 "2 night
stay" gifts to some of my better clients in Southern California as
Thanksgiving Day gifts
...
That way my package isn't
lost in the crowd, and it gives clients the time to reciprocate rather than be
in the embarrassing position of getting a gift from someone they forgot
...
I'm sure the PR value of these gifts, and the guaranteed
repeat business I got from them more than made up for the "sacrificed" 90
minutes of my time
...
); d) Services (I actually had a
dentist agree to do $1600 worth of dental work as part of a negotiation for
a show done for a civic group he was a member of)
...
It's not uncommon for me to put
together complete packages for people
...
A company would call
and ask about my doing a show
...
I would then offer a DJ (who I'd get for
$500 and sell for $800), I'd have a balloon arch done at the door (which
my wife would do for a couple kisses and a dinner out, and I'd charge them
$300), I'd offer 2 roaming magicians before dinner (I'd be one of them and
I'd pay a second guy $175 for an hours work, billing the client $400), I'd
arrange for a palm reader (I'd pay her $30 an hour for 5 hours, the client
would pay $50) and then I'd offer my hypnotic show at the end
...
I'd agree to offer my show at half price if they went
with this package, which brought it in at $3250
...
Granted, it did involve making 4 or 5 phone calls and doing an extra
hour of tableside magic, but for the extra $1500 or so above their original
"entertainment budget" I got out of the deal, it was well worth it
...
I
mentioned getting air fare for comped tickets above
...
I've also tossed in "perks" of my
own
...
I might take one of the resort rooms I
got above and as a last resort make a comment like, "Bob, I realize we're
hitting an impasse here
...
Why don't I
make it a bit easier to work out by tossing in a night's stay at the XYZ
Resort
...
" I'm now asking Bob if he's willing to take a free
vacation as a result of raising the entertainment budget on his event
...
A
...
At the time my agency in Los Angeles was doing
quite a bit of business with the Beverly Hills crowd putting together
unique (very expensive) dates and 2 or 3 person events
...
The next
morning, you docked and took a limo ride back home
...
I ended up suggesting he borrow a
friends RV, and go camp out at a rustic (secluded) park just outside of
town
...
I'd bring in a violinist to play for them under the moonlight and
then I'd join them inside for a private 1/2 hour magic show before leaving
them alone for the night
...
He
loved it
...
I paid the violinist $150 to
play off to the side during a sunset dinner and I pulled up just before doing
a 1/2 hour show
...

Finally, another very powerful negotiating tool to ad to your arsenal is the
ability to create markets where there aren't any
...
Suppose you decide you want to do shows
every Friday and Saturday night at the local mall
...
You begin by drawing up a
proposal which you send in to the activities director at the mall
...
The proposal itself consists of a package
you offer to start negotiating with
...
This is money they pay
you and you agree to use entirely to advertise the show
...
d) Two mall
billboards to use to advertise the show; e) You agree to publish a program
to offer during the show that includes a half page ad for the mall on it (you
also reserve the right to sell ad space to ANYBODY YOU'D LIKE in the
program
...
e) You agree to provide a tent for the shows (in my case, I own 5
large, 20 X 40 foot tents I use for just such a program
...
f) The mall
would agree to include you in their current existing advertising as much as
possible, and agree to list you permanently on their marquee
...
for the duration of your performances
...
In
order for any program to be successful, both our needs would need to be
addressed
...
I'll be calling in
about a week to see if we can set up a meeting
...
The trick would be to convince the mall planning committee to
let you come in and sell it in person
...
If they have a problem with it, you could probably
afford to agree to use $300 of the $500 they'd give you per show for
advertising
...
You could probably plan on selling quite a bit of ad
spaces if you make sure your tent is closed (has an entrance and exit) and
you see that everybody gets a program
...
That
way you could explain that you give away, say, 2000 a week to people
roaming the mall
...
If you use
the conference space you've bartered for to do, say, a smoking seminar
every Tuesday night and a Weight loss seminar every Thursday, you could
plug these seminars and the kiosk from your stage during the show
...
Again, it'll take delivering a proposal, requesting a
meeting to discuss it, convincing the board of the benefits of having a
regular show on property, and then negotiating what perks you want, and
what else you can offer them (more ad space in your program, a couple
shows a year done in their name for local charities, free admittance to mall
employees to the stop smoking seminars (they'd have to pay only for
materials), etc
...
Just remember to make sure there's enough
negotiating chips on both sides of the table so it never comes down to just
"how much?"
...
As soon as you've "resolved" everything
but price, you're headed for trouble
...

Take the time to become a good negotiator
...
Not
only will you quickly find yourself making far more per show, but you'll
discover you can make money almost "appear" whenever you need to
...
I was
allowed to sell ads behind me during the show, and in a program I offered
people who came by
...
Between that and
the ads we sold in programs (we did shows all day each day the swap meet
was open and handed out about 15000 programs a week , guaranteeing

good usage of coupons to neighborhood businesses), I ended up netting
(after paying out sales commissions, overhead and performers), about
$2000 a week
...
We also sold
a ton of shows to locals (mostly magic and clowning for smaller parties,
where we got a commission on each)
...

Another little "perk" I regularly include in my negotiations is a letter of
recommendation
...
Once they
agree, I then add a paragraph to my contract to the effect the "client agrees
to send out a letter, on company letterhead, to Howard, placed in the mail
no later than one week after date of performance in which client agrees to
put in writing their feelings concerning the show"
...
You can usually get companies to agree to pay
for your airfare easier than you can get them to send you the money
...

Granted, if you get them to pay for your expenses you can rake up
Frequent Flyer Miles quickly, which eventually adds up to another "perk",
but in most cases I just let them do travel arrangements
...
" This works good when
you feel comfortable driving (and they're seeing a $300 airfare suddenly
disappearing)
...

Before closing an article on negotiating, I have to include the one cardinal
rule that will either make or break every negotiating meeting
...
The moment you feel you must sell a
contract, that instant you lost your negotiating leverage
...
Set up a savings account or credit
card or something that gives you enough security to guarantee that the
instant the client drops below what you consider a fair pricing level, you
can nicely explain that you really don't think you're going to be able to do
the show
...

If you can negotiate, you'll be successful regardless of where you go
...

Effective Press Releases
If you had all the money in the world, but couldn't write an effective press
release, your promotional efforts would be greatly reduced
...
Most would look at it as an attempt to sell something, and
would accept it with the proverbial grain of salt
...
It tells an "impartial" reporter what to say about your show
...

Unfortunately, it's precisely the fact that it's so effective that makes it
difficult to make them work
...
I know when I was entertainment editor for Dawn
Magazine (out of Southern California), I used to get at least 20 or more
weekly
...
But
some did make it, and this article is about what it took to get free publicity
...
The first is newsworthiness
...
Instead of having to run around
town looking for information the readers of the paper are interested in, the
press release provides the editor with a ready made story
...
The second variable
that makes press releases get noticed is quality
...
Does the editor know you? Does he or she know
your event will be done right? Does he or she feel comfortable trusting
your release to adequately reflect what will really happen?
Let's take these one at a time
...
The easiest way to
approach this is to pick up a newspaper and look at the headlines
...
Smith's cat had kittens? Probably
not
...
And they definitely are interested in
knowing that your local school system was found to have the highest crime
rate in the state
...
These are the stories you are competing
with
...
But to most of us, "creating news" will
require becoming a "press agent"
...
But out there, hidden behind most larger media
events there's at least one good press agent running around making it all
come together
...

They are relatively unknowns like George Evans
...
He was hired by an unknown Vegas lounge singer
called Frank Sinatra
...
Something that could
become a media grabbing calling card that could promote him to stardom
...
Another girl near him moaned "Oh, Frankie"
...
As the story goes, Evans hired a group of
girls and paid them each $5 to jump and scream and yell, "Oh, Frankie,
Oh, Frankie!" when Sinatra sang a slow song
...
'They shouldn't only
yell and squeal, they should fall apart,' Evans said
...
"
The scheme worked
...
The
theater hired an ambulance to wait outside
...

"We hired girls to scream when he sexily rolled a note," Jack Keller, one of
George Evan's partners recalls, "The dozen girls we hired to scream and
swoon did exactly as we told them
...
Others squealed, howled, kissed his picture with
their lipsticked lips, and kept him a prisoner in his dressing room between
shows at the Paramount
...
"
And it worked beyond anybody's wildest expectation
...
Women yelling wildly at one of my shows might
add to the comedy relief, but not much more
...

Years ago I learned how to swallow swords and walk on fire
...
Back when I was looking for a lot of free press, I
used to open my show with a quick sword swallowing act, as a
demonstration of how much you can do if you can control your mind
...
A bit of time regression, a couple
well choreographed pictures and I was well on my way to a front page in
the local paper heralding me as the "miracle worker" who was appearing at
the XYZ theater later on this week
...
Again, a carefully done time
regression and a few choice quotes from the chief was a definite shoe in
for local coverage
...
Just announcing the
course would be offered is enough to get plenty of local coverage
...
I organized a seminar that was
going to take place the Saturday morning of the week I was appearing
...
However, when I guaranteed to cure
phobias of all kinds in less than 15 minutes each, and offered several
community scholarships for individuals that could offer the best reason
why their phobias should be treated free of charge, things went crazy
...

I've heard of people doing hypnotic "bits" where individuals are
hypnotized for the entire afternoon prior to a show (at, say, a mall) during
which time they think they are fishing or watching television, oblivious to
passing spectators
...
I myself have offered demonstrations of the "power of the
mind" to cure illnesses and experience hightened mental abilities
...

Not all "news events" have to be staged, however
...
Coming up
with unique twists here can work wonders as well
...
We put together a small haunted house and I did a
hypnotic show in the next room
...
The nurses all dressed up like vampires and
offered free admission to either my show or the house for a pint of blood
...
The city paid us a set fee for
organizing the event and local scout troops volunteered labor to run the
function
...

Even a catastrophe can be converted into a media blitz if you can keep
your wits about you
...
We
put together a "Miss Legs" contest where we were going to look for the
best looking legs in the country
...
My crew and I were going to then go around and help
select the lucky legs in each state that would accompany their owner for
the national competition that would take place at Universal Studios in
Hollywood
...
We
were busy decorating when we found out that several of the local religious
groups had organized a protest
...
I called the local cops and explained
that they were blocking access to the club
...

The mob outside grew as curious locals watching the 6 o'clock news came
out to either participate or watch from the sidelines
...

That spurred my imagination
...
A
...
I gave each of them a $100 or so and had them drive across town
and buy all the ground beef they could
...
About 1/2 hour before showtime, these "disgruntled citizen"
types came rolling their wheelbarrows down the main isle
...
It worked
...
They rushed all the local stores, buying

all the beef that was available, and proudly displayed themselves acting
foolishly in time for the "live coverage" on the evening news
...
All the locals that didn't want to be associated with the mob had
no problem walking down the isle to the club
...
Before I start getting hate mail
here, I should say that all of this happened during my younger, "wilder"
days
...
I don't think I'd join the mob protesting the
contest, but I also don't think I would currently agree to promote a "Miss
Legs" contest if asked to
...

Another quick story along these lines that happened this past Christmas
season
...
I had done plenty of shows for them before and had
never had a problem
...
It turns out that
Kansas is one of the two states where it is illegal to do "hypnosis" for
"entertainment purposes"
...
Some religious type
had complained to the local District Attorney, and the club owner had been
warned that if the show went on, the club owner, any volunteers that came
on stage and I would all be arrested for knowingly breaking the law
...
In looking around, I was
told of another hypnotist who had actually been arrested for doing a show
during a State Fair about 50 miles North of this town
...
All I
had to do, was change the purpose of my show
...
I called a local hotel
and arranged to rent a room to hold a seminar
...
I even printed up some last minute seminar applications and

brought along a poster of the brain and a laser pointer to ad an air of
"science" to the event
...
The cops who came down to arrest me
were handed applications to the seminar
...
They also left the next two sold out
shows alone as well
...
The "package" was so successful I've even considered offering it
again, in the same town, while the local media is still dying to meet the
"guy who took on the law"
...
We were told that it would cost us a fine of $50 for
"breaking the law"
...
I'll let you know how it goes
...
When you hear that the guy
next door is going to do a magic show it doesn't ring as dramatic as hearing
that the guy from "Hollywood, CA" will be performing to help support
XYZ
...
A few years back, I used to have an office
in Los Angeles and another one in Vegas
...
A
...
The Vegas crowd was much more
impressed when the club brought in a performer from "Hollywood"
...
When I
was getting press releases at Dawn Magazine, at least a quarter of them
were sloppy, obviously self seeking, poorly written ads
...
A well written
press release should be formatted like an article submitted by a freelance
writer
...
It
starts with a half page or so of "white space" that includes nothing but the
title, and gives the editor room to do his own general notations about
where and when he thinks he might use the article
...
Magazine press releases need to arrive at least 2 months before
publication date (so editors can plan for deadlines)
...
Always give yourself a "rider"
paragraph or two at the bottom of the article
...
These are great
when an editor is a bit short on room and has to decide if he feels like re
writing your entire article or simply dropping a paragraph at the end
...
At his upcoming show, audience members can expect not only
the experience of a full time professional, but the chance to participate in a
show where guests are the real stars
...
" I can almost always expect editors
to drop this paragraph, which makes them feel important, but pretty much
guarantees they print the rest of the article without much editing
...

Morgan tells us that
...

What kind of pictures you include can also go a long way
...
Pictures of people
dancing wildly, sleeping limply, or shooting imaginary guns all spur the
imagination and seem to get noticed
...
The kind of picture that would make someone stop reading the
paper and call out "Hey Bertha, you gotta see this one"
...
Pictures can be 5 by 7 or 8 by 10 black and whites (unless you
know your material is so powerful it's almost sure to merit a front, color
page)
...
Some of the bulk
"picture" companies actually do copies
...
When you copy a copy (the way an editor will have
to when using it), you create something called a moray effect
...
They make it
very difficult to use the picture
...
It should
almost downplay what you're selling
...
12 and 13 at 8 P
...
For ticket
information and reservations contact the club at: (609) 538-9988
...
The total word count on a press release is rarely
over 1200 words
...
This begins by you
opening a general "information" file at their office
...
This information
usually came from one of two sources
...
Get a list of every major paper, magazine, radio and
television station in the town where you want to become "famous"
...
Call the radio and television stations and find
out if they have any programs that bring on guests
...
It's the producers job to find interesting
material for the show
...
After you have your list of "Media VIP's" place it on a
mailing list in your computer or somewhere
...
I find that it also helps to
mail all of this in a standard sized file folder
...
That way, every
time the editor opens his or her file the first thing they'll always look at is
my name
...
Mail them each
invitations to any public shows you might be doing, and don't forget the
holidays
...

It beats the crowd, gets noticed much more, and if the recipient might have
forgotten you at Christmas, they now have a month to ad you to their list,
making them feel like they know you
...
The goal of all
the smaller "did a show at the Boy Scout Camp" kind of releases isn't to be
published
...
Every time he does, he reminds
himself that he should look into your show some day
...


Two last little promotional tricks I find work well for me are a VIP show
and plenty of thank yous
...

Most hotels jump at this deal
...
One year I had bronze key chains made out in the shape
of Broadway Show Tickets (they cost me about $5 each)
...
Another
slant I used to use on this theme in Los Angeles is I would donate a show
to a hotel in exchange for a 200 or so person auditorium
...
In exchange for their free
performance they were allowed to bring in, say, 50 people
...
It didn't take long for word to get out that this was the party
to go to
...

Obviously sending out thank you notes to the editor or producer goes
without saying
...
I also send a copy to the station with a small post it
note attached explaining when the letter was sent
...
These are the "public service announcements"
you see at 2 in the morning
...
At least once a year, FCC inspectors will listen to the station
for a week or so and count the PSA's that were run
...
Imagine the manager's
reaction when the FCC inspector comes in with a sheet of airtimes, a
regulation book and one letter from you thanking them for the 23 minutes

of free time they gave you
...
I'd be willing to bet you
money that if you take the time to write the FCC, you'll suddenly find the
station bending over backwards to help you promote any charitable event
you happen to be associated with
...
Basically,
whenever the station is hosting live remote events, you can show up and
do a show
...
The DJ will spend a week plugging
the fact that they are going to be at "Bob's Ford" on Friday, and use you as
a draw, constantly plugging the fact that "Tom Smith will also be there,
hypnotizing volunteers and adding to our mayhem"
...
Back when I used
to use this technique, I used to offer to do live remotes in exchange for free
air time
...
They would then do their event, featuring my show
...
Considering that they did live remotes at least once a month, and
that having free live entertainment helped them sell these to their clients,
my ads pretty much ran daily year round
...

Scheduled Progress
Several months ago I mentioned in an article here that it was important not
to sell yourself short
...
I must have hit a responsive
note
...
Unfortunately, its not that
simple
...

First of all, you need to start with your show
...
That's not to say you don't do a good show
...
Either you are
actively involved in making it a better show, or time is taking it's toll and
little by little the quality of your performance is deteriorating
...
It's a pretty exclusive club
...
Many of the old
vaudeville acts are members
...
You'll also find plenty of the old
vaudeville types
...
It's a great place to meet some of the
"greats" and get one on one advice on your show
...

And almost without exception, all acts fit into one of two categories
...
Timing is right, clothing is sharp and
response is great
...
And not all of them are
in their 70's
...
They get up there and go through
the motions of repeating a bunch of lines they obviously memorized
several years ago
...
And their clothes reflect their lack of concern
...
And we all wait together for the
end of the show to save us
...
What I am saying is that they
obviously aren't as good as they were back when the guy was pushing to
reach the top
...
(I'm not
trying to be sexist here, but the "Variety Club" is still a "mens only" group
with a sister club that meets elsewhere)
...
If you hang out in the Vegas and
Reno scenes, you know exactly what I'm talking about
...

One of my youth idols was Pat Collins, the "Hip Hypnotist"
...
She brought along her own
4 piece band and burst out into spontaneous song as she performed
...
For a while there,
she owned The Celebrity Club in Los Angeles, where she regularly
featured hypnotic acts
...

And working her club was a real honor
...
Not long before she died I went down to see her
doing a lounge act in Vegas
...
Where once there had been
a fresh, excited lady, sharing the joys of exploring the mind with you, now
there was a performer who was obviously struggling to make it through the
show
...
And you could
almost feel the anger when you didn't laugh at lines that had worked so
well for decades
...
She allowed herself to coast, and if it hadn't been for her
reputation, chances are, nobody would have hired her
...
As your reputation grows, and more
"fan's" keep telling you how good you are, it's easy to decide you've finally
"made it"
...
It's a problem faced by many actors doing long running
stage productions
...
To avoid that destructive trap,
most actors work hard at "falling into character", and then "experiencing
the plot"
...
To really
become just a little more like Romeo
...
When actors talk about their character, they always find
themselves referring to it in the third person
...

Developing a "persona" is just as important when doing a stand up act
...
We need to look forward to
them and savor the excitement each time, as if it were the first
...
Are our fingernails trimmed? Have we polished our shoes?
Is our music appropriate for the show? We also need to continue to stretch
...
Try different
twists in our pretalk
...
And learn to be honest
with yourself
...

Personally, I videotape every show I do
...
And as I work my way through
the show, I watch for reactions
...
If I happen to say something that somehow
gets a great response, I dissect it in front of a monitor later on to try and
figure out why, and if I should leave it in
...
As I write this piece I find myself
remembering the number of times I walked out on stage with a wrinkled
pair of pants on or shoes that had obviously been scuffed and scratched in
a trunk somewhere during a long run of shows
...
And looking back, I can't help but wonder how
somebody who paid $22 to watch the show must have felt
...
And all because I didn't take the time to leave the rest of the
world behind and get ready for my time on stage
...
If you know you have an act worth watching, then
you need to tell someone
...
I've spent a lot of time talking about
promoting your show in previous articles, so I won't become redundant

here and repeat myself, but make sure you're sending out quality promo
materials to the right people
...
If your
prospective client isn't getting something from you at least once every 2 or
3 months, chances are, they don't even know you exist
...

Finally the last "secret ingredient" in the formula for success is pricing
...
And that's true
...
So on one
had you have a hypnotist willing to do shows (actually, more times than
not, begging to do shows), at $100 each
...
Few birthdays would find that hard to afford, but even fewer
would be willing to take the risk
...
A $500 show, on the other hand, sounds like a safe
bet, if you can afford it
...
So we get right back to the quality
of your advertising and the depth of your background
...
Personally I not only have
5 good demo tapes that cater to most of my markets, but I own my own
video editing equipment and constantly put together new, updated tapes to
send out with my promotion
...

You know you have a show that is constantly moving upwards and you
have a good quality promotional package
...

And the formula is really not that difficult
...
At the
beginning you need to realize that at least half your income is probably
going to go back into promotion
...
Without it, even Neil Diamond would be sitting at
home waiting for phone calls
...


Begin by figuring out how much you're monthly bills are (and you might
as well accept the fact that at this point you need to cut back on luxuries as
much as you can), and then double that amount
...
Next you need to figure out how
to make it
...
If you do, I'd like to
read your column
...
Again, you would not only run yourself ragged,
but you'd also quickly gain a reputation of being a "cheap" act
...
So let's suppose you decide to settle
for $500 a show (to begin with)
...
Again, you aren't going to do
this unless your allowing yourself the $24,000 a year promotion budget
...

Of course that also means it's costing you $250 to sell each show
...
Because the truth of the matter is, you aren't spending
$250 per show
...

You're giving yourself enough exposure so that next year you'll be able to
continue to do 96 shows, but now you'll have enough people calling to be
able to raise your price up to, say $600 a show (and take home $350 each)
...
You've accepted the fact that a
good working year, for you, involves roughly 100 shows (that rounds out
to 2 to 3 a week, although most of them will probably happen during
holidays and extended runs like fairs and/or casino shows)
...
As you get
more expensive, you're going to discover that fewer and fewer local
markets can afford you
...
Of course, by that
time you'll be making enough to afford the travel ( and you'll usually tack
on expenses in the negotiation anyway )
...
Be sure you're ready to grow before
you set the process in motion
...
To do that, you need to
understand that the first several shows will probably go entirely into
promotion
...
This might be a good time to start negotiating trades with
local printers for promotional materials, etc
...
A
good job might be a sales job, where you're rated on results rather than
scheduling
...
Getting enough shows to get
moving (at the start) is the real "test of fire"
...
Hang in there and you'll soon find
yourself rubbing shoulders with the pro's
...
You might also try getting a few
local agents to promote for you
...
The Beatles were kicked out of Deca Records because "guitar
music is on it's way out"
...

If you set your goal at doing, say, 100 shows a year, the pricing takes care
of itself, and enough people out there are seeing your show to insure a
steady growth of your reputation
...
Be sure you pick up all the letters of
recommendations you can along the way (go back and read my article
about "The Very Best Advertising") and let others tell your story for you
...
If you toss in enough bartering "extras" with your package,
where, say, you agree to "knock $200 off the cost is you let me place a full
page ad in your club newsletter" you can afford to offer the show at $1000,

knowing you plan on only making about $800 per show
...
Again, I believe one of the
"Promoting the Show" articles covers this area pretty thoroughly
...

Once you've set your rate at, say $1000, you might try doing 150 shows
instead of just the 100
...
It should have nothing to do with your pride
(and being able to brag to mom that you once sold a $5000 show)
...
If you're killing yourself to sell the high
ticket show, you'll soon talk yourself right out of business
...
Whereas I
refuse to sign an exclusive with any one agent, at this point I have 6 agents
that are all competing for my time
...
I now spend about $1200 a month sending out
packages, taking out ads in trade journals and targeted publications
(business journals, caterers magazines, etc)
...
If they can't match that, then I probably won't do business
with them
...
I'm usually pretty generous with
my commissions
...
I regularly offer my $1500 show to agents for
$1200
...

Remember, I'm in this for the long run
...

But my commissions are not limited to agents
...

Every now and then, with old friends, I give them the $300 or whatever
commission in cash for referring a show to me
...
Many of these "gifts" are actually items
I traded for
...
Truth is, I still have
favors I'm calling in with Casinos from shows I did in exchange for a
reduced fee and "a two night stay, any time, for me or anybody I'd like to
give it to, and tickets to whatever your main show is at the time"
...
People remember that kind of thing long
after the thrill of $300 that got shuffled into the bill paying budget is
forgotten
...
"It's just a little token of my thanks
for the way you helped make this a great year for me", I'll usually include
with the package
...
Be sure you're show is worth far more than you're currently
making, be sure you tell the people who can buy it, and aim at doing
enough shows, at a reasonable price, to get your name out
...
And some
day, when you look back at it all, you'll agree with virtually every
"successful" performer I've ever discussed it with, that the time you spent
"playing the market", when you wondered how the bills were going to get
paid, but were willing to risk it all on a single mailing, was the most
exciting period of your life
...
I started to
answer it and realized that it's a topic we all have to deal with at one time
or another, and that, if done correctly, can become a big money maker for
us
...

Getting calls from organizations trying to put on fund raisers is a normal
part of being in the entertainment industry
...
The
home for battered children is trying to build a new wing and wants us to do
a show (where they plan to charge admission) to raise money for the

project
...
So it usually ends up becoming one of
those "good deeds" we do for free
...
Fund raisers do talk to each other, and the better your show is,
the more the chances that you'll start getting calls from everybody in town
asking for free shows
...
I agreed to do a free show
for a hospital (like they don't have money!?)
...
First,
it didn't take long for word to get around town, and I was stuck with a
phone ringing off the hook with all kinds of other "great" causes wanting a
handout
...
When a company pays $4000 for one of my shows, not
only will they have everything I requested there, but they'll usually assign
someone to make sure any loose ends I need dealing with get covered
...
In the minds of the client, I'm a $4000
investment
...

The hospital (and almost every other "free" show I've ever done) kind of
shuffled me around, making me sit in a corner of the auditorium until my
"turn" on a long list of PR speeches by all the hospital administrators and
the like
...
Somewhere buried in the small print on the bottom, between
"recognition of employee of the year" and "details of upcoming hospital
plans" was a small line that read, "entertainment by hypnotist Howard
Morgan"
...
It took longer to
get them going and volunteers were harder to come by
...

Now I'm not trying to belittle doing all you can to help a worthy cause
...
In Florida I ended up serving on the then Governor
Graham's (he's now a Senator for the state) 5 man advisory committee for
the disabled
...
I'm a member
of the Optimist club, a service organization that works primarily with
children causes (they call themselves the "Friends of Youth")
...

Even when dealing with these two causes, I usually make it clear ahead of
time, that I can't afford to give away my shows
...
of events for free
...
Another affiliation that also helps in this area is the United Way
...
Again, word gets out quickly that I can usually come up
with an innovative, working solutions to most scenarios
...
If you're old enough to remember the "Hands Across the Country"
event Kenny Rogers spearheaded back in the 80's, it was based on a
"Hands Across the County" project I brainstormed for the San Diego
United Way
...

When the children, disabled or United Way need me to do a show, I usually
set up a rather innovative way of doing it
...
Basically I'm donating my time
...
Adding 4 or 5 thousand dollars in write offs at the end of the
year definitely helps
...

And there are definite advantages to associating yourself to a cause
...
I probably get 3 or 4 shows a year from
referrals I make through these associations
...
When mingling at the
social events or when organizing functions, names invariably pop up of
people who believe in the cause
...
Whenever one of these organizations needs a show, I
recommend to them that they contact some of these individuals to see if
they're willing to "sponsor" the show
...
Basically "Coca Cola proudly presents" is tagged, in
tiny letters, at the top of everything that announces "The Hypnotic Comedy
of Howard Morgan
...

That doesn't mean I don't do other charitable causes, though
...

It's only the beginners that are willing to give them away
...
Then I put in writing every
detail I'm looking for
...
I use my own wireless mike, so I specify the kind of plugs
they must have
...

They must have a place set aside for me to wait till I'm announced away
from the crowd (unless it's a dinner event or other social function where
I'm invited to join in and don't mind explaining what Hypnosis is 20 or 30
times)
...


In all charity shows, I also include, in writing, a clause to the effect that
"client agrees to write a letter, on their company letterhead, explaining
their feelings regarding the show
...
" I explain to the client
that I'm interested in their input, whether positive or negative, concerning
the show
...
I've got a ton of great letters of recommendation from all kinds of
organizations I can add to my portfolio whenever needed
...

One last way to handle these "call in" requests is to agree to take a
percentage of the door
...
Of course, they don't have to worry about not being
adequately promoted and ending up taking home 25% of $100
...
You're guaranteed at least, say, $300,
and then, if your 25% goes over the amount, you keep whatever the total
comes out to
...
There are several promoters
and/or entertainers that make a lot of money representing charitable
organizations
...
I
was a member of a Press Agenting club in Los Angeles (Press Agenting is
about getting the press to give you free publicity - kind of the "media
gimmick" version of an advertising agent)
...
I agreed and showed up an
hour or so before the show to a 500+ auditorium
...

At about 15 minutes to showtime there were 2 people sitting on the front
row
...
He laughed and told me
not to worry, they'd do just fine
...
Again Ron seemed

okay
...
Each of 6 of
us did our "thing" for 15 minutes
...
At
dinner he explained that one of the larger charities had agreed to accept
20% of any ticket sales he made during his show in exchange for the right
to use their name
...
He explained that they had actually oversold
this show
...
Most people were more
interested in giving a donation to the "Just Say No" program than they
were in the show itself
...
Ron joked
about making $2000 or $3000 clear profit for shows being done for
audiences of just 30 or 40 people
...
In Ron's case, he was
doing a show a week (every Saturday night, each in a different area), so his
cause was getting $50,000 or so a year from him, probably their main
source of income
...
At $10 a ticket, he only had to
sell 260 people to pay his bills
...
A
crew of 10 telemarketers calling for 8 hours a day, averaging a call every 2
minutes, allowing for one hour lunch, means they're making 2100 calls a
day
...
Ron started his marketing
a month before the show was to arrive in town
...
On one of these events, I vaguely remember
I booked an 800 or so seat auditorium and agreed to give a local charity
25% of my profit from a show
...
I also sent out press releases and recorded PSA's (public service
announcements) for local radio stations
...
Posters around town, guest
appearances on local stations, newspaper adds, etc
...
The telemarketers sold their 1000 (of which 100 or so showed
up) making our total take for the show 1500 sales at $8 each ($12,000)
...

Another "fund raising" package I've worked quite successfully included a
package where I sold magic shows at $100 each to a group of schools as
school assemblies
...
All kids took home a brochure promoting the large "show"
...
One of the local school organizations
(PTA, Boosters, etc
...

I go on to do several other schools around town, all promoting the one
larger show as a fund raiser for their cause
...
Once word gets out around school that the "cool" kids are
going to the show, you have a troop of personal promoters out there
begging their parents to buy tickets
...
If you're getting $2 a kid and $3 an adult, that works
out to $600 or so profit per school
...
If you do
10 or 15 assemblies around town, selling $600 to $1000 per school,
making $10,000 profit is not unreasonable
...
Your sub total will
then come to roughly $9,500
...

But it doesn't end there
...
That's a lot of energy
...
it shouldn't be
hard to add another $2000 or so in profit
...
Have sellers go up and down the aisles and set up plenty
of tables
...
That should end up adding
another $2000 or $3000 to your take
...


Just a added note here, in closing
...
I've had
my share of successes and failures and have made it a lifetime quest to
study programs that have been successful for others
...
If you can really see through all
the possible flaws with a package, and come up with good tools to
overcome them, it's then only a matter of going for it with all you have
...
Yes it's a gamble, but if the event is
carefully planned out before beginning, the odds are far better than Vegas,
the lottery or even the stock market, and the rewards are measured not only
in money, but also in momentum that will make the next event easier to sell
and produce
...
Originally the plan was to use it as a central USA base from
which I could fly to shows around the country at affordable rates
...
In fact, I decided to create a local, steady income which will
keep me from having to be on the road 10 or 11 months out of every year
...

Hypnosis definitely lends itself to weekly performances
...
People see the show and decide they'd like to volunteer, so the next
show they come back, and bring friends as moral support
...
New volunteers, new
bits and different audiences all make the show new and exciting every
time
...
There's something about knowing that "every Thursday night"
there'll be a show at the club
...

Dr
...
Flip Orley, I've been told, actually shut
down a comedy club in Texas by doing weekly shows
...
He was
very successful, keeping a steady crowd of loyal followers
...
I haven't actually talked to him about this,
so this may all be rumor, but I've heard it from 2 different sources
(including a Comedy Club owner) and the scenario is very possible
...
Doing weekly local gigs is a very high exposure, quick fame kind of
deal
...
The problem is, what are you going to be
famous for? If your show is mediocre, it won't be long before all your
neighbors will know you're a so-so performer
...
So before
you start exposing yourself, be sure you have something to show
...
After all, they do
have their own steady clientele and I'm sure I could keep the room full
...
The best you can do at a comedy club is fill the house, and
they do that regularly
...
Because the comedy club already monopolizes all the prime
time nights (whatever your local market can bear - usually Wednesday
through Saturday, or sometimes weekends only), you'll be forced to take
the off nights and try to compete with the full houses their getting on
weekends
...
I
do far too many corporate shows each year where I make anywhere from
$2000 to $4000 a show to fly in on Friday or Saturday night, do my 90
minute thing and then leave
...
So the Comedy Club setting might have worked
...
People would be coming to see "a
hypnotist" down at the Comedy Club
...
I want local businesses to think of me when they plan their
holiday parties and conventions
...
So at least for me, the logical
solution was to find a nice looking club, with the potential to grow, and
work together with them at making the show a big deal around town
...
I looked for the parts
of town where people went for "a night out"
...
Just East of the downtown area is a
neighborhood called "Bricktown"
...
Brick roads, rock warehouses and plenty of big name clubs (Old
Spaghetti Factory, etc)
...
A lot of promotion has gone into the "Bricktown renewal"
project lately, including a riverwalk area that's become quite popular
...

Your town may have a downtown "party district" or some area where the
evening crowds gather
...
It's a lot easier
talking someone into walking into a club they've passed lots of times than
it is to get them to drive across town to a building in the middle of a
residential area, to go see a show they're not familiar with
...
Another
very serious consideration is the kind of image you want to promote
...

As you get organized, and know the area of town you want to work in, you
need to consider the bigger picture here
...
If I

can get a steady local following, it'll be worth a fortune to me
...
I can also plan on
selling $40 to $60 worth of self help CD's ($20 each)
...
I'll also be able to plan on doing at least one private
session per show, at $100 an hour
...
This is without counting corporate shows and city
events I'm sure to book from the high exposure in a small town
...
My
real goals weren't as much to "make a killing" at a single show as they
were to get a big crowd and have a quality location where we could grow
...
The first place I walked up to was a large, nice
restaurant/club called the Bricktown Brewery
...
Downstairs
they have a nice restaurant while upstairs houses the bar and pool hall
...
They also have a banquet area that can grow from an
intimate 50 or so room to about 300 by moving out partitions
...
I really wanted this room,
so I made him an offer he'd have a problem refusing
...
You can obviously ask for a flat rate, say $500 a night to
perform
...
If he feels you can draw a good crowd quickly, he may go with it,
but unless you're a well known local celebrity, he probably won't be
interested in sticking his neck out just because you think it'll work
...
You set the door charge and you
keep whatever people pay at the door
...
Yes, the club will probably put your posters up and
include you in their local newspaper ad but the heavy promotion will rest
on your shoulders
...

Another option (not used much anymore, but still available) is to take a
portion of the drink tab
...
They typically make most of their money
here
...
This might be a harder
sell, but it does tend to spread the responsibility of promotion evenly
...
Comedy
clubs typically pay me anywhere from $400 to $600 a show (for the exact
same show corporate clients will pay $4000 for)
...
If I'm doing
that many shows, you better believe I'll make at least that much again over
the course of the week in "extra" sales
...
When negotiating a
weekly show, my goal is to stay here for 3 or 4 years
...

Keeping all of this in mind, I approached the club owner with a simple
offer
...
I agreed to take 1/2 of the door and a $200
guarantee
...
If 50 people came in, at $8 a person (which is what we're
charging before the show), I'd still break even and get half of $400
...
This gives me a base income, and
plenty of room to grow
...
I made it very clear
that it was up to the club to do the promoting, and then, as soon as the
contract was signed, I started working on a mailer to my 600 person
mailing list (people who have seen my show and requested to be on my
list) in this area
...
I took home $200 plus another $150 from the overage crowd
...
That
evening I ended up with $530
...

Two weeks into our trial, a guy who happens to own a club in a smaller
town about 2 hours drive from here came up after a show to see if I'd be
interested in doing a package at his club
...

The Bricktown deal went okay, but not great
...
I knew coming in that I had a few Club shows
scheduled for August, so we had already decided, before beginning, that
we'd take a couple months off in August and Sept
...
At this point I'm scheduled to do a larger
Halloween show, followed by weekly shows through the end of the year
...
It frees up my weekends, so I'm plugging the corporate
shows real hard now
...
They're you're best customers
...
I
then keep the names and add them to my local mailing list
...
Stuff like "Where
do you usually go for entertainment?, How often do you go out for
shows?, Where did you hear about tonight's show?, Where do you usually
look to find out what's going on around town? Are you interested in
finding out about upcoming seminars and programs by Howard Morgan?
What kind of programs would you like to find out more about?" Basically,
I get all the information I need to promote seminars, upcoming shows, etc
...

I also sent out a press release to the local paper that jumped on the chance
to promote a different kind of show that was going to take place locally for

an extended period of time
...

In fact, that interview was so successful, that a week later, when I was
scheduled to do a public show in Virginia, I got a call from a station out
there that had heard "through the grapevine?!" about the interview and
wanted to know if I'd do one for them as well
...
If I can accomplish that, I can easily open up a successful local
practice and more than make up for the sacrifice in seminar, private
therapy and CD sales
...
I've become a marketing consultant for the local
United Way ( a job I did successfully for several years in Southern
California, that quickly gives me a local reputation as a guy who gets
things done)
...
The package is great! I do a show for the owners of all
the local businesses (an audition?) and then I mingle for 2 years, handing
out business cards and discussing doing shows and seminars for their
company
...
And part of the deal is that I've agreed to
"lower my rate" if they'll let Bricktown Brewery co sponsor the show
...
Bricktown will be delighted, the Chamber will feel like I've done a
great job of working with them, and I'll end up with a good steady local
business
...

Again, I'll be standing in front of 200 or so people who can all afford the
luxury of a club membership (most are upper management or owners
somewhere)
...
Plenty of health conscious people (future seminars?
Certainly several new clients)
...
31, I'm running around town doing several
college shows (again "sponsored by Bricktown Brewery") and even a mall
show where I'll be allowed to solicit mailing list participants
...
And I made a profit while
doing it!
A couple weeks before the show I'll start hiring a couple high school
students (at $5 an hour) to stand on street corners around Bricktown and
hand out flyers advertising the upcoming shows
...
That should help get some walk in traffic
(it'll probably cost me $500 and pay for itself in two weeks)
...
Whether or not I sell anything
isn't that important
...
Basically, if
they agree to leave them on a certain spot, I'll agree to pay them so much
per CD that gets sold, with no money down on their part
...

The trick to making this work, if you're trying, is to plan it all out ahead of
time and ride the momentum
...
You might have a feature article come out in the local paper
and the local radio station may run you for a couple hours, still, a month
from now you'll be a vague memory
...
from time to time
...

In my case, when I was based in Los Angeles, I did a lot of trading with
Food and Beverage Directors at local hotels where they'd get my show at a
discount (or free) in exchange for them giving me a banquet room with
meals once a year around thanksgiving
...
I'd also invite anybody that had come
to more than one of my shows to be my guest (talk about feeling
important! These guys usually became groupie types)
...
I would usually find a local band or good
Disk Jockey and allow him to bring in, say, 50 people, in exchange for 5
hours of his services (before the show dinner music, during the show show
music and after show dance music)
...
We'd end up with quite a production for a crowd of maybe 400
which everybody would remember (and try to return to next year)
...

Find out how local theater promotes themselves
...
Get good at networking (I wrote a column a few months back about
that) and start giving out business cards
...

Whatever else you do, buy yourself a bulk mailing license and be sure to
mail out a week or so before opening night to all the locals who have seen
your show
...

It takes work, but then that's why every corner in America doesn't have a
hypnotist doing regular shows!
WORKING THE HOLIDAYS
Yes, believe it or not, this is the time to start getting organized for the
holidays
...

If you haven't already gotten yourself organized for the Holidays, or if

you're tired of doing the $600 shows and want to make this Holiday season
a big money maker, I thought I'd take a moment and walk you through the
process I've used (and so have several of the entertainers I've managed in
the past) quite successfully
...
If only one person is interested in your
show during the holiday season, you might as well accept whatever they
want to pay you and be thankful you were able to stuff your stockings for
free
...
Imagine the position you'd be in if, say, 15
different companies all wanted your show, but you only have 6 time slots
available to offer
...

Let's begin with some of the givens
...

2) Almost every one of them will try to fit it into one of the 6
Friday/Saturday time slots in December
...

4) Most of these events are being coordinated by secretaries and/or
committees that consider "putting it together" an intrusion into their
already busy schedule
...
e
...

If you think about the options available to them, and what you have to
offer, it would be hard not to create a very large demand for your time
...
Of course, I'm
assuming you have a good show
...
If not, you should
probably store this article somewhere until you're ready to "expose

yourself"
...
Word will get around
town quickly, and whatever you made this year will probably be the sum
total of your long term income from performing
...
They
don't mind paying me $1500+, because they want to be sure they don't get
stuck with someone whose show drags or is in poor taste
...
YOU NEED TO PREPARE YOUR PROMO MATERIAL
If you're a working professional you probably already have most of what
you're going to need
...
Imagine you
are bidding for these shows against Elvis Presley and Neil Diamond
...
Nowhere in the
entire process is attention to detail more important than in your promo
material
...
Do a good show and, if
possible, hire a professional to tape it
...

One should be set up on a tripod from a good vantage point(covering the
entire stage) and the other one should be hand held by a good camera man
(or woman) who zooms in on individuals for reaction and moves around to
get different angles shots
...
Back before I bought my own equipment and
started videotaping all my shows I usually expected to pay somewhere
around $200 for a videographer to shoot the a show
...


If you can afford it, and you plan on doing several shows this year, it's well
worth the investment to buy your own camera(s)
...
I'll
pay my cameraman (usually a college student or unemployed friend) $35 a
show, plus expenses (they love the free travel)
...
I've also accumulated close to 2000 videotapes of past shows to
draw from for future demo tapes
...

Once you end up with the masters, you then need to get them edited
...
This
will probably cost you $35 or so an hour and take about 4 or 5 hours to
complete (unless you know how to use the equipment and come knowing
what you're going to put on your demo tape in which case you should be
able to whip one out in no more than a couple hours)
...

A little trick you'll find very helpful here is to remember, while doing your
show, to always repeat what is about to happen just before you wake your
subjects up
...
Doing this makes editing much easier
...

As you put your video together, try to make it as fast moving and
entertaining as possible
...

Do you like the way they segway (slide from one scene to another)? Do

you enjoy the camera shifting from one angle to another? What makes you
feel entertained? Once you have a good idea how to do a rock video, then
you need to move on to the real test
...
Go see (or rent) a
movie and take notes on what makes the "upcoming attractions"
commercials interesting
...
If you do, you might pick
out a "theme" music you start with and then fade into at the end of your
tape, as you scroll up your name and number
...
Back when I ran my agency, I really
had to struggle to make it through all the "home video" type "demo tapes" I
used to get
...
Once you know what you want in your video, go do it
...
A good video is well worth thousands in future
profit
...
You can buy blank video
tapes that are 10 minutes long pretty cheaply, which weigh less (for
mailing) and look more professional than a 15 minute demo on a 90 minute
tape)
...

As you're finishing, be sure to scroll up a quick contact number a la "John
Smith can be reached personally to discuss availability or bookings at:
(555) 555-5555"
...
"John Smith is available through Empire Entertainment at (555)
555-5555"
...
That's for agents that call and ask for a demo tape (and will
eventually make their own copies to send out)
...
Remember as you make

copies, that every generation looses definition
...
I make a point of never sending out anything that's
more than 2 generations old
...

Be sure you also print up some good looking labels to place on your video
tapes
...
Copy them to disk (very few
libraries have color printers) and then go print them out, on Avery or Neato
video tape blanks down at Kinkos (you'll pay $12 an hour plus $2 or $3 a
copy (for each sheet of 10 to 15 labels), and probably be ready to leave in
30 minutes
...
Also print up some generic labels
...

Once you've finished the editing process, be sure you have 30 or so video
tapes with your number on it made and ready to mail out
...
I use black glossy sleeves with window cuttouts which
allow the tapes to be seen from the top and cost me about 10 cents each at
a bulk video distributor
...
While you're there , be sure to pick up mailing boxes as well
...
50 at the post office
...
You're package may end up costing you as much as $10 each
by the time you mail them out, but considering you're trying to sell a
$1500 product, you can well afford it
...
This is a list
of where you've worked, what kind of credentials you have, etc
...
I print up a folder type mailer (on an
11/17 sheet) that looks a lot like a classy newsletter
...
and buried inside
it lists shows I've done this year and quotes from satisfied clients
(whenever a client says they like my show, I always answer with, "you
know, it would really help me promote future shows if you'd be willing to
put that in writing on your company letterhead"
...
I also
include the interesting facts about my background (over 150 television
appearances nationally, 30+ years of captivation audiences around the
world
...

Personally I own a Hewlett Packard 1120 copier which lets me print 11 X
17 sheets easily and has more than paid for itself in shows I got from
impressed agents and clients
...

c) The third item you need to be sure to include with every promo
package is a headshot
...
If you need to get some pictures
taken, again, be sure to get them done professionally
...
Basically, those
little "Alpha Photo" stamps on the back of pictures constitute a copyright
mark and you won't be able to get them copied in bulk without permission
from the photographer (and if he won't let you take the picture without the
mark, he'll certainly not agree to let you copy it without charging you extra
in the future)
...
They usually do a basic sitting fee of $8 and then
offer copies of any prints you like for $12
...

They are betting you're going to buy all 6 or so shots they take of you (and
raise your cost to $100 or so), but if you plan on just walking out with a
single show, you'll end up paying a total of $20 for a good studio sitting
...
If you ask ahead of time, you can usually
get that person to take your shot
...
Once you have the shot, order
100 or more copies
...
They do a
good job, get the shots out within 2 weeks, and can add copy on the
bottom if you need it
...
With computers on the scene, most papers
have no problem printing from Litho copies)
...
The final item you'll need in your promo package is a good business
card
...
If you plan on
working as a professional entertainer, you better be sure you have
a GREAT business card
...
It's the item you give out when
networking, and it's the one piece of your promo package that will be
removed and placed somewhere else (usually among another 100 or more
in a roladex somewhere)
...


2
...
Remember, you've gone out
of your way to spend money doing it right, so be selective about who gets
it
...
Go down to the largest public library
in your town and ask for the Social Science area (smaller libraries usually
mix this department into the Reference section)
...
Most towns have a yearly magazine, usually printed by
the local newspaper or the Chamber of Commerce, that lists the larger

employers in the area
...
Copy down their names, phone numbers
and mailing addresses
...
Personally, when I'm marketing to a new town, I
simply photocopy the entire page(s) that contains that list
...

Once you have your list, get on the phone and start calling
...
If the secretary says yes, ask if she
knows who's in charge of coordinating it
...

Once you get through to the person in charge, find out when their event
will take place (write it down, so you won't continue to solicit a show that's
on a date you book elsewhere!)
...
Notice I'm not asking "would you like
entertainment?" If you get a no to that question, anything else you say is
simple harassment
...
If she says no, tell her you do a lot of
holiday events, and if she's willing to consider adding entertainment to her
evening, you'd like to send her a demo tape and info
...
If they don't already have a budget allocated
for entertainment, finding an extra $1000 or two might be an issue
...
Personally, I regularly sell
holiday shows at $2500 to $4000 each)
...
If it is, and you really want to do the
show, you might consider negotiating some barter arrangements into the
contract
...
Not that long ago I negotiated with American Airlines

to do a local show for the $200 they had budgeted for entertainment and
10 tickets for 2 (without expiration dates) good for anywhere around the
country
...
The next year, I simply tacked
$400 to $500 on to every out of town show I had for airfare and pocketed a
good $4000 from that show
...

Once you mail the package, call back in a week to make sure it arrived
...
DON'T TRY TO SELL
ANYTHING HERE
...
If this call takes more than 2 minutes, you'll probably be
labeled as a nuisance that's going to continue to call and pester them and
end up finding your $10 investment in a dumpster somewhere
...
If they say it'll be several months, you might mention that
you'll be glad to talk to them when they're ready, but chances are those
dates will be booked within a month or so, so if they're interested they
might want to consider talking it over sooner
...
That'll put pressure on her
to be sure to bring up your show during their meeting
...
If you're talking to someone local, you might consider
asking for a personal appointment
...


3
...
If you have an even
halfway decent demo tape, several should be
...
In fact, you probably don't want to do a show for a company that
isn't interested in considering you
...
With 40 packages sent (about
$400 investment and maybe 4 or 5 hours of your time, after you're finished
making up the promo package - which you're going to need to promote
from now on), you are pretty safe assuming you'll sell all 6 slots
...
You just made a
$5600 proffit, which more than paid not only for your promo mailing, but
even for the cameras and time involved in getting a quality promo package
together
...

Email:howardmorgan@witty
...
HowardMorgan
...
He's
a writer, lecturer, actor and all around lousy cook
...
You might think that what you say to the subject
doesn't matter, but let me tell you it does
...

2 In giving suggestions, your objectives are to: 1) make it really clear
what you want the subject to do; and 2)have the subject want to
carry out the suggestion that you give him/her
...
When I say positive or
negative suggestion, I am NOT referring to whether it is good or
bad BUT how it affects their mind
...
" Automatically, the subject will think the color blue because
this is the only information their brain has to work with
...
First they think of blue
then they have to "NOT" do it
...

Another way to have someone "not think the color blue" is to say
it as a positive suggestion: "think the color red
...
They will think of a specific and different color
...
For example: if
you have a subject that is a polarity responder
...
If you say "black" they think "white," if you say
"white" they think "black
...
" As a
result, they will cooperate and go into hypnosis
...
For example, it will be easier for a
subject to "see the audience naked" than to "see the audience with
no clothes on
...

3 So how do you make it easy for subjects to carry out your
suggestions?

Early in my career, I found out that one of the words that should
never be used on stage, is the word "TRY", unless you really want
the subject to fail at something
...

When you say to a subject "Come up here and TRY to get
hypnotized," you pre-condition the subject to fail at getting
hypnotized
...
For example, when
you tell a friend, "I'll try to be there," what is the likelihood of you
showing up? Not very likely, is it? Whereas if you tell your friend
"I will do my best to be there," you are very likely going to make
it
...
My guess is
that when a hypnotist is using the word "TRY" a lot, this is an
indication that THEY are not confident in their ability or that they
have doubts as to whether the suggestion will work
...
Let me give you an example: On stage,
when I give my induction, I say to the volunteers: "And as you sit
there
...
and as you do
...
So heavy that the harder you TRY to lift them
...
" Now, if I had said that they can't lift the hands,
they would have felt challenged to prove me wrong
...
If you want
them to fail, use TRY
...

4 I could talk about the benefits of learning to use language patterns
for a long time, but I won't because I could end up writing a novel
:-)
...
You can use even use
language to get rapport with your audience and volunteers, to
make subjects want to volunteer for your show, plus much more
...


Canada’s Original and Best Female Stage HypnotistI am available for
bookings across the US and CanadaDrop me a line:
info@FemaleHypnotist
...
femalehypnotist
...

Geoffrey Ronning
How to Book Corporate Hypnosis Shows
· So, why are so many people so interested in working this market?
First
you have an abundance of prospects that need your service
...

This event may be a trade show, a sales meeting, an annual dinner,
a holiday (don't make the mistake of calling it a Christmas) event,
appreciation dinner, a bi-yearly retreat, etc
...
there are literally thousands available in my
market!
· Where you are located may be different, but rest assured that
wherever
you are located, there is an abundant amount of business
...
Travel will take you
outside your local market and introduce you to even more
business
...

· So here you are thinking (or at least you should start to realize)
every
group, be it an association or company, has a potential need for

your
services
...
Open up the phone book and begin to
understand how much potential business is out there
...
Your service is not optional, it is required!
· What is needed to be successful in corporate entertainment is to
have a
system in place to work this market correctly
...
Don't get
discouraged
when you do this! Remember, the uniqueness of your hypnotic
show makes it attractive for many corporate groups
...

· Let's look at these competitors more closely
...
You will need to
understand your strengths and weakness as well as those of each
of your competitors
...

These comments are based on thousands of conversations I have
had with clients and prospective event planners over the years
...

· 1
...
Magic is often times viewed as "children's"
entertainment by many corporations
...
In addition, many corporations have
had
numerous magicians in the past and want something different!
That is
you
...

· Please understand I'm not voicing my opinion, but that of your
prospective client
...

· 2
...
That is the perception of many corporations
because unfortunately for the comedians, and fortunately for us,
some
ignorant comedians have taught them that! Comedians are a
different
group
...

The corporate market is not where you want to be doing any racial
or sexist material
...

· 3
...
In my experience with clients, the
murder mystery sounds like a lot of fun and is an attractive option
for
their entertainment
...
The basic concept is great! But sometimes delivering on the
concept is difficult
...

· 4
...
That is the general
attitude
...
DJ's can play a variety of music, interact, get
people participating and keep the evening on course and they
don't
typically take breaks
...

· 5
...
Many
grow
bored gambling, particularly with money that is not real
...

· The strength of casino nights is they can be exciting and novel
...

· Your Hypnosis Show
· Now, a Hypnosis Show is unique! You are providing an audience
participation show that will have their entire audience laughing
and
enjoying their program
...
There is no other type of
entertainment that is as exciting or intriguing to watch!
Everybody will enjoy your type of entertainment!
· Look at the above strengths of each of your prospective competitors
...

· You are so far ahead of the others that as long as you have a system
in
place to generate interest you will have a full schedule of gigs!
We

know, corporate entertainment is where the bulk of our business
comes from
...
We basically had to
restart our business in this market and have been very successful
doing so
...
It relies on a systematic approach that we have used for
years, one that has benefited from constantly tweaking and testing
to increase its booking power
...

· So, let's get down to the exciting fun and talk about the steps
necessary to book the corporate gigs
...

· 1) Create prospects list
...
By this I mean you must create a list of companies,
their addresses, company size and the contact person who hires
entertainment that potentially will book your show
...

· There are 5 ways to create interest in your service from your
corporate
prospect:
a) phone
b) mail
c) advertising
d) internet

e) fax
Each has its benefits and its weaknesses
...

a) brochure
b) sales sheets
c) video
· These do the job of representing your show
...

· 4) Book your show
...
There is no room for pushy manipulation
techniques when dealing with corporations
...

5) Paperwork
...

Experiment with techniques to create the spin-off business at your
completed shows
...
my wife even was caught off guard
with it the first few times I used it
...
He had learned the
technique in our booking corporate programs but had not put it
into play
...
If you follow them logically you will have more
business than you know what to do with
...

We
will talk about the different techniques, different roadblocks, costs
and the numerous options you have at your disposal
...
Follow the above steps and go out and get
booking!
· The Holiday season is booking up now and you can fill your
calendar using the above steps in no time! Print the steps out and
follow them
logically
...
I would love to hear from you
...
stagehypnosiscenter
...
This session we are
going to cover the specifics of finding your prospects
...

The first thing we need to ask ourselves, is what constitutes a
good
prospect? A good lead has to have the following:
· 1
...
The name of the person(s) who plans the company events
3
...
The number of people in the company and the size of events
that are planned
5
...

· Surprisingly, the phone book can be the best place to start building
your list of leads if you can invest the time to call each business
and
get the above information
...
There are thousands of listings in the phone book
for
different businesses
...
The best way to
utilize the phone book is to go through and pick out businesses
that you recognize
...
As a
general rule, the larger the ad, the more money and employees the
company may have
...

Doing a mailing off of a list cultivated from the phone book may
result in a huge waste of time and money if you don’t call and get
the above information and make your prospect list complete
...

· Another option is the American Business Directory for your state
and any other state you may be interested in working
...
It also
breaks the businesses in your state down by profession, by city,
major employers in your area, and manufacturers by city and
product
...
The American Business Directory now comes on a disk or
CD as well so that you can put it directly into your computer
...
00-$600
...
When using this list, remember to
keep it up to date and make note of any changes in the addresses
and contact names
...

Most of the businesses will use an event or meeting planner when
planning
their company functions, whether it is the sales retreat or the
company
holiday party
...

· Again, this can be done through the phone book, but again, this can
be a waste of time and money
...
The best source for corporate
meeting planners is, oddly enough, the Directory of Corporate
Meeting Planners
...

· Another great resource for acquiring a list of meeting planners is
through MPI, or Meeting Planners International
...

· Any association that you join, such as the Chamber of Commerce, is
going to provide you with leads
...
This is an excellent way to
fine tune your mailing list to a the market you are interested in
marketing to
...
” You tell them the criteria of what type of list you want, and
they will supply it
...
The
information that you are going to send to a corporation is not the
same
information that you would send to a event/meeting planner
...
Many times after a show, your audience members
will come up and ask for a business card
...
After you fill their
requests for either promotional material or a phone call, add them
into whichever data base fits them
...
If they are an

event/meeting planner, put them in that data base
...
” We rarely walk away from a
corporate show with less than 5 new leads
...

· The first roadblock, believe it or not, is our economy at this time
...
This plays havoc
when you are trying to keep your data bases current!
· It is very possible that you can talk to a person one week, and the
next
week they will not be at that company
...
Always try
to get the name of the person that has taken your old contacts
place
...

· This roadblock can also be a huge bonus to you
...
This recently happened to us! Out of the blue a woman
who used us at her company holiday party last year called us for
the holiday party this year for her new company
...
As wonderful as it is, we
have found one particularly annoying drawback
...
” This means that you
cannot use the CD or disk after a certain date, usually one year
after you
purchase it, requiring you to purchase a new and updated version
...
Another good idea is to load the
whole
disk on your computer all at once
...
All of the lists and books available out there have
a cost,
and it us usually not very cheap
...

· So, as you can see you have many options to creating a list of
prospect
or prospective clients
...
You need to
determine what is the best route for you at this time
...


· This article is an excerpt from the program: “How to Book
Corporate
Shows with Your Hypnotic Entertainment
...

· In other words, due to the internets indiscriminate availability,
certain powerful techniques could not be revealed here that are
presented in the volume available to purchasers of the whole program
...

For more information visit:
http://www
...
com
“Hypnosis On Tour”
By Hypnotist Marc Savard
The “Joy and Pain” of touring with a full production are exactly that
...
I consistently get involved in conversations with other hypnotists
and entertainers about the value involved with such a production
...

Pros:
The second an audience member walks into a venue that my production
gear is set-up in, they immediately separate my performance as a high
quality act as opposed to a performance in an openly lit area such as a
gymnasium or hall
...
This may or may not be true, but at this point we can
all agree it is irrelevant
...
” Give the people the expectation of a HUGE show;
they will walk away having seen a HUGE show
...
These all give the
audience an idea as to what they should expect
...
That is where I noticed the biggest advantage of
touring with gear
...
You get what you pay for
...
You’d better be
as good if not better than what you told the buyer you were
...
Production is used to ENHANCE the performance, not to
replace the hypnotist’s weaknesses
...
Cost is cost
...
I currently carry an extensive lightshow
including and not limited to 8 automated lights that are fully programmable
and run by a desktop PC
...
The sound
system I carry is VERY punchy and has got crystal clear sound with LOTS
of juice pushing it
...
Too much
crap to even bother naming
...

Labor, Labor, Labor
...
Enough
said
...
But
touring with Union techs, is a completely different ball game
...

You begin to get unqualified people, your performance reflects it, and in
turn defeats the purpose of why you got the production equipment in the
first place
...
It takes a long
time to find the right people that care about the product you put on, and
WANT to be a part of it
...
The production value increases, and then the gear is worth it
...
My team and I are exactly what I have been looking for, and
have been touring with a very successful stage show for the past 5 years
...
It takes a while to get everything the way you expect

it
...

Is it all worth it? 5 years ago, I would have said No
...
I
suppose I can compare to the people that say, “Money is not the most
important thing in life
...
Tell them the six W's and H
...
WHO you are and WHO you've presented for
...
Ask for their FAX number and offer to FAX letters of reference if
they'd like to see them
...
I have a source for that if you are interested
...
)
2
...
Say Hypnotist or Psychic Entertainer they can attach
meaning to that
...
(Just the facts or FAX
ma'am)
3
...

Most college shows are given for handfuls of curious or non-socially
active (read homebody) type students and the number count! The last show
I gave for a local college was well over two hundred and fifty students
...
Did I
mention that the college had an enrollment of less than 1200 students?

4
...
They have no idea how to promote this so offer to be a
gangbuster for them
...
Move them into less
crowded areas when one area gets too packed or draw them into the
lunchroom for food
...
I had such a group of parents gathered around
that the kids were having to elbow their way in
...
Elizabeth Riggs (John's lovely wife saw
this and cracked up
...
(Remember that SHE said it not me!)
5
...
Have a list of the top three reasons that they
NEEDED your show
...
(Any more and you're bragging
...
WHOA NELLIE why am I soooo expensive? Because you need to know
that colleges are just full of folks who look at gigs being offered and say
(insert HAAVAHD accent hear) " Well Muff, he khant be ahll that good, he
willing to work for $______
...
I once
offered a show to the same local college where I am now being booked
three years in advance at what I thought would be a fair rate $600
...
Their cost per student $35
...
I sell them my show for
$1250 and (I live here so they get the whole enchilada for one rate) and
their cost is only $5
...
Prove the cost
with the math it works
...
HOW do they get me
...
This gets them motivated to book

quickly
...
The other school gets a slight break
on the price as I am already there and I get to double dip with a built in
referral
...

Sorry about the extreme length but I have been really quiet for a while and
needed to catch up
...


Email Myndmage@aol
...
Providing Hypnotist, Mentalist, Motivational
Speaker, Singer, Musician, MC & DJ Services For Corporate, Fundraisers,
Festivals & School Events)
Full Time 6 Figure Income Entertainer & Entertainment Coach
No B
...
Real World Entertainment Career Coaching That Works!
Website - www
...
com Get Live Gigs
...

As one who always went out and supported a fellow entertainer, whether it
was musician freind or a comic at an open mic night, I love live
entertainment, want to see great entertainment and it feels good just to get
the hell out of the house!
I remember the first time I saw a Mike Mandell hypnotist show back in the
late 90's
...


Since that time until I became a touring pro, I had only seen two more
shows and the entertainers I saw are legendary stage hypnotists still
working today, Sailesh and Tony Lee
...

Once I decided to become a professional stage hypnotist, I met and trained
with my first mentor, Attila J
...

His shows were astounding!
To watch him standing on stage in front of almost 4000 people at the
Yukon Days Festival in Alberta, completely in command, dropping
volunteer after volunteer instantly and then producing a show that held
everyone's attention for 90 minutes was simply inspirational
...

That's when I began to notice that all stage hypnosis shows were not
equally entertaining
...

As of this writing, he performs nightly at the Hard Rock Cafe and his show
was non-stop entertainment and a total theatrical performance from start to
finish
...

As time went on, I would hear about a hypnotist coming thru my area and

would go out to support the show
...

So what's the difference?
In my mind, it's one word
...

Great hypnosis shows flow like a Broadway play
...

There must be drama, emotion and suspense and scenarios that provoke the
drama, emotions and suspense
...

And when it's all done, the audience should be able to take home both
memories of the most fun they've ever had and a positive message as well
...


The audience in front of you and the people that sign your paycheck
...

Case in point, unless your doing a fratboy house party where their paying
you to make a volunteer run around believing thier pants are on fire, stay
away from ANY controversial skits
...

Step Two
To have an entertaining show, you must BE ENTERTAINING
...

Most people decide within five seconds whether they like you or not and if
you fail this most important first test, you will have an uphill battle to
create an entertaining show
...
The best way to do this is
SMILE
...

When you launch into your pre-talk (for those of you starting out, this is a
brief explanation of what is about to happen in your show), you MUST be

funny
...

Your in the "make with the funny" business, so it's imperative to get your
audience laughing and loosened up as quickly as possible
...

Step Three
Design your show to FLOW
...

It's like watching your hometown bar bands, they all play the same top-40
hit songs as well
...

It's the same with hypnosis shows
...

It's the SPIN you put on the skit idea
...
I do the
"Beach Skit" but there is a completely unexpected twist to it
...

This is where drama and suspense come into play
...

The best way to come up with the payoff ideas is to ask yourself "why" or
"what if"?
If you have someone lose their bellybutton
...
"so what"
...

Are you starting to get the idea?
Everything old is new again if you take it in a whole new direction
...


Whats your main theme?
Is it a vacation? A cruise? A day at a festival?
What kind of adventure are you taking your subjects on?
Whatever it is, if you structure it properly, your audience will get it even if
you don't actually tell them
...
" and the scene fades
...

This becomes as entertaining as watching paint dry
...
Once their hypnotized,
they'll stay in hypnosis as long as you want them too if you know proper
induction and deepening techniques
...

Whatever your theme is, there must be a beginning, middle and climactic
end like all good movies
...


Beginning
Your plot should always start off on a happy note like enjoying being at the
beach, on vacation, etc
...

They start watching a movie that has funny, sad, scary then embarrassing
moments in
...

Now, think of all the scenarios that could happen within these three
sections
...
You will get plenty of ideas
...

Major touring rock bands do exactly the same show night after night so
that it flows seamlessly
...
That's the only time you
should switch it up
...

Remember to use the lines that continually make people laugh because if
they worked in Manitoba, they will probably work just as well in South
Dakota
...
If so, KEEP THEM!
My best material in my shows are from ideas that totally went off track
...


Step Six
Your Closing Thoughts
...
They might want you to keep going but don't
...

The problem was, I didnt notice the audience starting to lose interest
around the 2 hour mark!
Once I was finished, all they wanted to do was get home
...

You want to keep it short but informative about your hypnosis programs
for sale and souvenir DVDs of the show they just witnessed
...

Personally, I also convey a message of self improvement and setting higher
standards for one's life for the betterment of themselves and their families,
but that's just me
...

The more people you build up in your data base, the faster and larger your
fan base and stage hypnosis business will become!
Display all of your audio hypnosis programs and sell them at a discount for
multiple copies
...

Make sure you thank the people who hired you!
Leave them with a great impression of you and send a thank you card a
week later with a DVD copy of their show as a gift to them
...
com

Get Live Gigs
Discover How To Get Top Paying Shows
& Become The Go-To Choice For Entertainment!
www
...
com

Hypnotherapy and Stage Hypnosis Are Not Alone
David John Pack
I began studying hypnosis in 2008
...
I
believe that all branches and/or theories of hypnosis benefit from learning
what the others know
...
com
Email: hypnosis@davidjohnpack
...
com/free
(NOTE: You will have to sign up to my newsletter to get access to the code
to get them for free
...
I do stage shows
...


When I was first introduced to hypnosis in 2008, I thought all hypnosis
rounded down into two types: therapy and stage
...
Over time I’ve come to find a third type
that tends to receive less attention from both the stage and therapy
communities
...

Before going farther into looking at recreational hypnosis, I’ll give a quick
summary of the three different types of hypnosis I’ll discuss
...

Examples of Therapy/Beneficial Hypnosis:
Overcoming Fear
End Addiction
Lose Weight
Form a Habit
Stage/Street/Show Hypnosis
The intent of this type of hypnosis is to entertain the viewers, crowd, or
audience with hypnotized subjects, (or feats of hypnosis)
...

Examples of Recreational/Self-Entertainment Hypnosis:
Virtual Reality
Lucid Dreams
Hallucinations (positive or negative)
Make Believe
As you probably noticed, hallucinations and make believe are on both the
stage list and the recreational list
...
In stage hypnosis, since
it is intended to entertain the audience, the suggestion is chosen based on
what will bring out a funny reaction
...

For example, stage hypnosis might suggest that the person is trying to find
cover from a rain storm, versus in recreational hypnosis, where the person
could be suggested to believe that their favorite fictional character is in the
room with them
...
This doesn’t mean
there aren’t suggestions which are both stage and recreational hypnosis at
the same time
...
)
Does Recreational Hypnosis Have a Place in Hypnotherapy?
I know many gut reactions to recreational hypnosis is that it is a complete
waste of the power of hypnosis (many say the same of stage hypnosis)
...
While neither stage nor recreational hypnosis
directly help people make changes in their lives, they both are capable of
convincing people of the power of hypnosis when used correctly and
ethically
...
com), I offer some free hypnosis mp3s
...
This way a person can try at least one hypnosis session and see
personally that hypnosis does work
...
com/free (NOTE:
You will have to sign up to my newsletter to get access to the code to get
them for free
...
If a
hypnosis session made it so that all the cups of water you drink for the next
hour are like beer for you, would be recreational hypnosis
...
)
Website: DavidJohnPack
...
com

HYPNOTHERAPY SCRIPTS
By: Steve G
...
Steve G
...
Jones can
make the difference
...
" Tom Mankiewicz, Writer of
"Superman the Movie"
Imagine living the life you deserve to live! A life in which YOU have
unlimited wealth, focus, and confidence
...
Steve G
...
He has focused his genius
on developing thousands of self-help products to launch you powerfully in
the direction of ultimate success
...


“I have started using Steve’s techniques in my practice
...
George
Thoduka, MD Internal Medicine
"I have tried other hypnosis recordings, but I have found yours to be very
powerful in reaching the subconscious mind of my patients
...
Irina Webster, MD
He is a member of the National Guild of Hypnotists, American Board of
Hypnotherapy and president of the American Alliance of Hypnotists
...
In order to keep up with the very latest in
research, he regularly attends training conferences
...
Steve G
...
D
...
He is the author of 25
books on such topics as hypnosis, the law of attraction and weight loss
...

In the mid 80's, Steve began study at the University of Florida
...

Much of his early research was published in psychology journals in late
80's
...

From 1990 to 1995, he was fortunate to counsel families and individuals
...
Steve has a
bachelor's degree in psychology from the University of Florida (1994), a
master's degree in education (M
...
) from Armstrong Atlantic State
University (2007), a specialist degree (Ed
...
D
...


Dr
...
Jones sees clients for a variety of conditions
...

In business settings, he is regularly called upon by sales teams to boost
salesperson motivation
...

Dr
...
Jones also works extensively with Hollywood actors, writers,
directors, and producers, helping them achieve their very best
...
Additionally, Steve has been interviewed
on CNN, ABC, NBC and CBS
...
Jones has had a tremendous impact on my career
...
He
worked with me on my self confidence and helped me become comfortable
in front of people
...
He also helped me decide to write a book so that I could
share my experiences with others
...
Jones
You are unaffected by negativity and retain the ability to enjoy all of the
warmth and joy that life has to offer
...
You are open and receptive to love
...
You
accept other people as they are and you do not expect them to change
...
You let go of all
fear based emotions such as blame, jealously, guilt, and possessiveness
...
You
accept all good things into your life
...
You allow yourself to receive good
things
...
You are
worthy of receiving them
...
You allow
money to come to you
...
You now have a
flow in your life and money is actually attracted to you and you allow it to
come to you
...

You allow it to come to you
...
And you know that
you will use it for the greatest good
...
You now
realize that you have the ability to create in your life unlimited wealth,
unlimited wealth
...
You allow money to
flow to you and it does
...
You keep your mind calm
like water
...
Physically relaxed,
emotionally calm, mentally focused, and spiritually aware and money
flows to you
...
You
will have all the wealth you desire and you let this happen easily and
effortlessly
...


Unlimited Motivation by Steve G
...
Imagine a perfect kind
of day
...
Everything just falls into place
...
You feel at peace
...
You have been
comfortable and protected within the boundaries that you yourself have
created
...
Just imagine yourself pushing back the
barricades, pushing back the barricades you created and instead you are
expanding your horizons, expanding your goal, reaching forward higher
and higher, feeling comfortable with your new goals
...
You feel safe, secure, and pleased that you
have the control and power within you to change
...
Your feelings are

good
...
You feel content
...
Imagine that you have resolved many
conflicts, many problems and they are now in the past
...
You are at peace, content, and you have found solutions to
problems and resolved them
...
You are
confident, self-assured
...
Now, just imagine a
goal or a project that you would like to accomplish
...
See yourself with
energy into your work
...
You see new
opportunities
...
You see yourself with renewed energy
...
New energy
and positive feelings emerge
...
You reach your goal
...
Reaching
your goal is very beneficial to you and as you continue to reach the goals
in your life, see them as positive events, positive to you, your family,
friends, and people you work with
...
Imagine yourself putting energy into reaching your goals and
becoming the successful person you deserve to be
...
These goals were good
for you and all those around you
...

You are happy
...
You are helpful and your
success is positive for all
...
You use
your success in the most positive and worthwhile ways
...
See it, feel it, you are successful
...
You see
yourself as the intelligent, creative and beautiful person that you are
...
Your
success is a positive event for you and all those who touch your life
...
Now
just see yourself clearly in the near future with many positive directions
and choices and bring this image into the present
...
See yourself confident and successful with many wonderful and
positive paths to choose from and you know you can continue your
success
...


Reducing Stress Using Hypnotherapy and NLP
By Suzanne Gardner-Cuthbert, GQHP, CHBPP, AAMET,
Website: www
...
com
Email: suzannegardnercuthbert@gmail
...


Suzanne first became interested in hypnotherapy when preparing for a
home birth for her third child
...
Suzanne learnt a number of relaxation,
visualisation and self-hypnosis techniques that she used during labour
...
Suzanne trained as a Clinical
Hypnotherapist and later completed a training course in Hypnosis for
Childbirth
...
Since 2007, Suzanne has been helping clients to overcome their
issues and to achieve their goals and desires
...

To help many more people, Suzanne was inspired to take her career into a
new direction and has commenced the development of self-help products
...

If you would like to subscribe to the Suzanne Gardner-Cuthbert
Hypnotherapy monthly newsletter, go along to the website at
www
...
com and sign up to receive a newsletter
that includes the latest news and developments at Suzanne GardnerCuthbert Hypnotherapy, informative articles, free life changing tips and
free self-help guides
...
The stress response is a survival mechanism that gives the
body additional resources to enable a person to deal with emergencies and
dangerous situations
...
These stress hormones give the body

additional resources to deal with the threat
...
It
provided the cavemen with the resources they needed to stay alive
...

We do not encounter emergencies and dangerous situations often in
modern day life, therefore, we activate the stress response by our own
triggers created by the pressures and stresses of modern day life
...

Using Hypnotherapy and NLP for Stress Management
The following hypnotherapy relaxation script can be used to help a client
relax and de-stress
...
This script also instructs the client to go back to their beach
visualisation and use it when they need to unwind, switch off or reduce
stress
...
Breathe in through the
nose and out through the mouth…
...
letting go of any tension that is stored there…
...

imagine the muscles relaxing…
...
And this
relaxation is now spreading to the muscles in your jaw…
...
You are drifting into a deep state of

relaxation…
...
Imagine that the muscles in your neck and shoulders are
relaxing…
...
Allow any tension that has been stored in
your neck and shoulders to drift away…
...
imagine
the muscles in your arms becoming loose and limp…
...
And as you drift deeper down…
...
Notice how your muscles in your
back are relaxing easily…
...
And now imagine
your stomach muscles relaxing…
...
imagine these muscles relaxing…
...
and loose…
...
you move on to
the muscles in your calves…
...
and becoming so
loose…
...
imagine the muscles are
relaxing…
...
imagine yourself walking along a
sandy path…
...
you feel more
and more relaxed…
...
You stand at the top of the steps…
...
you count the number of steps down…
...

10… you are becoming more and more deeply relaxed…
...
letting go of any tension…
...
drifting into a deep state of relaxation…
...
drifting deeper and deeper…
...
drifting further down…
...
deeper and deeper…
...
drifting into a deep state of relaxation…
...
nearly there…
...
allowing a deep state of relaxation to flow through the body…
...
drifting 10 times deeper into a relaxed state…
...


You now step on to the sand of a golden beach…
...
You walk across the warm golden sand…
...
You sit down in the deckchair …
...
How relaxed and calm you feel…
...
and take a moment to hear the noises around you…
...
You gaze into the sea…
...
And whilst you are gazing into the sea…
...
You look up and watch them circling
around and around…
...
you become more and more deeply relaxed…
...
…You feel peaceful…
...
So calm and relaxed…
...
notice how
comfortable you feel sat in your deckchair…
...
so
calm…
...
In your mind you say to yourself three times “I
am calm and relaxed”…
...
“I am calm and
relaxed”…
...

(Pause for a few moments to allow the client to relax)
Ok that’s good…
...
when you feel you need
to switch off, unwind and release stress you can come back to this beach
visualisation…
...
All you have to do, is
to close your eyes if is safe to do so…
...

and then visualise your special beach
...
I am going to count
slowly from 5 to 1…
...
Let’s begin…
...

4…
...
your body senses are coming back to normal
2…
...
wide awake open your eyes
Creating a New Way to React to Stress
After using an induction and deepener of your choice the following script
can be used to teach the client a diaphragmatic breathing technique
...

Breathing techniques can also be used for relaxation
...

Script
I would like you to take a moment to concentrate on your breathing…
...
you are
to breathe from your diaphragm, the lower chest area…
...

Breathe slowly and deeply from your diaphragm…
...
And now slowly exhale through your
mouth, pushing your stomach muscles in…
...
and now slowly exhale through your mouth,
pushing your stomach muscles in…
...
That’s good…
...

Using the power of your mind…
...
Perhaps imagine a
recent situation that has stressed you out…
...
With this image in mind, make this image a still picture…
...
turn down any sounds you hear…
...
Reduce the image in size,
so that the image is becoming smaller and smaller…
...
the image is moving further away…
...

Now I would like you to run this scene again but this time I would like you
imagine reacting and responding in a new way…
...
and responding
positively to the situation
...
And when you reach the end of the scene, I would like
you to run this scene over and over again from the beginning to the end…
...

(Allow the client a few minutes)
Ok that’s good…
...
When you
experience a stressful situation for real, you will find that you will react
calmly…
...

(Terminate the trance)
Techniques and Strategies to Help a Client Deal with Their Stressors
When a client is facing a stressful situation or circumstance, there are two
approaches that can be used
...
Where the situation or circumstance is
beyond the client’s control, the client will need to change their thoughts,

feelings, and the meaning they give to the situation or circumstance
...
The client may have one
stressor or several
...
Working with one
stressor at a time, ask the client to take a few minutes to think about what
they can do within their own power to bring about a change to the
situation
...
With this image in mind, the client is to make the scene a still
picture
...
The client is to turn down any sounds that they
hear from the picture and drain the colour out of it, replacing it with black
and white
...
And as this image is becoming smaller,
the client is to imagine the image moving further away, until the image has
completely disappeared
...
What would they
see? If the situation had already changed
...
They are to make the colours on
the image brighter, make the image bigger and closer
...
Then change the shape of the feeling/emotion
...
They are to imagine the feeling/emotion
shrinking in size
...
And to imagine moving
the feeling/emotion from where they feel it in the body
...

Replace the negative feeling/emotion with a feeling of calm
...
On the inward breath, the client is to
imagine breathing in this colour of calm and to image the calm energy
flowing into every area of the body, radiating into to every muscle, tissue
and cell
...


·The Power Of Career Re-Invention
James E
...
H
...
lifepowermastery
...
com
How many times have you heard the phrase
...

While this may work for baking blueberry pies, it may not apply when
things are not going so well in your own universe and your in desperate
need of a new result
...

especially in the area of career
...

My friend Jeff had been trained in the antique business at a very young age
by relatives who taught him everything they knew
...

Life could not be better for Jeff as he made more money than he could
imagine, met thousands of interesting people and travelled throughout the
country
...

Suddenly the huge show attendances dwindled, antique dealers went out of
business and buyers simply went online to find new treasures
...

Then my good friend Kim contacted me about starting a new business
venture, we also had a lengthy talk about life challenges that had effected
both of us
...

Unfortunately once she regained her health, her position was no longer
available and she too realized that the only way out of her predicament was
to re-invent herself as well
...

Up until 2009, I had made a great living as a full time entertainer, disc
jockey and musician
...

I love entertaining and have been an entertainer my whole life!
Yet here I was, facing possible career extinction myself
...


Al of us came to the conclusion, either conciously or subconciously, that
we could either keep trying Benjamin Franklin's version of insanity - aka
doing the same actions over again and expecting a different result or hit the
reset button and "re-invent the wheel"
...

We all admitted being a little fearful of the unknown but also being faithful
that the subconcious mind would attract new success that was available for
the asking
...
(Admitting that your in a "do or die" situation will tend to light a fire
under your butt!)
The funny thing is
...

New conversations will take place, new opportunities will spring up and
new people will enter your life to help you in your quest
...

The great artists, musicians and actors have always known this
...
Look at all
the roles he has played
...
He constantly re-invents himself with success
...
Every album she ever
produced portrayed a total different character and changed musical styles

and success followed
...

Kim used her administrative and people skills to launch her own business
...

I also now create motivational hypnosis programs that help people lose
weight, stop smoking, improve their confidence, memory, concentration
and even their golf game
...

To the people who simply witnessed the transformation it was
...

None of us did anything but keep an open mind to success and had faith
that our new ideas would lead us down a new, adventurous and prosperous
path
...

Also, it was the conscious acceptance of what was not working and
releasing the ego feelings of loss about letting go of something that had
long since served it's purpose
...

Most of that growth comes from accepting all challenges as something to
learn and grow from, not to be afraid of
...

No matter whether your age is twenty four or eighty four, re-invention will
get your blood pumping, your mind racing and give your life new purpose
and meaning
...

I’ve had an interest in Hypnosis ever since I was a boy
...

I can still remember the excitement of wanting to own one of those
magical items
...

Some years later, as part of a youth group, we were asked if we could
decorate the bedroom for an older couple who lived locally
...
He would often tell me
stories about the things he would do on stage as well as the therapy work
he carried out, both of which I found fascinating
...

Hypnotherapy by M
...
Mcgill, 1947
...

After I left school and started work, Hypnosis was put on the back burner

for the next twenty years or so
...

During that period I found out that James Braid, one of the leading lights
in Medical Hypnotherapy, was born in a small mining village just fifteen
miles from my home
...

I followed this up by training with Wilf Proudfoot, the founder of the
British Guild of Hypnotist Examiners, now known as the UKGHE
...

Group Sessions
In the early days, when I was trying to get myself known, I started teaching
self-hypnosis evening classes at schools in the local area
...

Not only was I teaching a class that allowed me to pass on my knowledge
to others, it was also a learning process for me
...
Some would be slumped in their chairs, others
sitting stiff as ramrods, and some becoming so relaxed they really did not
want to open their eyes when asked to at the end of the session
...

The classes ran once a week for the duration of six weeks and lasted for
two hours apiece
...

Most of the class would pick up the self hypnosis techniques fairly
quickly, and more importantly, practice them at home
...

One of the easiest ways to do this was to tell a story as you went along
whilst having them make the images in their own minds, perhaps
swimming with dolphins, drifting along in a hot air Balloon (always
making sure that they only went to a height that felt comfortable to them,
even if that was only three feet of the ground
...

What I found amazing was that as the classes went along, it would be a
different story each week, none of them pre-planned
...

At the end of the class the general consensus was how real the images
appeared as the story went on, and in all honesty that was the way it
seemed to me
...

Although I would take the class through a new self hypnosis technique
each week, it was inevitable that the question of ‘when are you going to
take us on a new story?’ would arise
...


The week before the class ended I was persuaded to put a story type
induction on to an audio cassette along with the background music so
those who had attended could listen to them at home
...
00
...

Of course it was inevitable that the cassette would be shared with the
family and friends of those who had attended, thus spreading the word
about myself, my business and where I could be found
...
There were about ten people who
wanted to take part, and to make it more interesting we decide to do a
different induction for each person
...
I started to do inductions I had never seen or
heard of before, tipping them forward on to my shoulder, spinning them
around, in all honesty I can scarcely remember what we actually did, but
every one of the volunteers went quickly into trance
...

One of the group sessions I was asked to take was at a centre for people
with disabilities
...
Again I did one of the imagery inductions followed by a
deepening technique
...
At
that point it seemed like a good time to terminate the session
...
One of

the most incredible things was the amount of people who not only felt
really good, but also found that a lot of the physical discomfort they had
experienced from sitting in the chairs for prolonged periods of time had
also been greatly reduced, or in some cases, had gone all together
...
In fact for a
year or two after, I would get a call from the centre asking if they could
have a few more cassettes for new members
...
This
inevitably resulted in some new clients coming along
...
This would take up to around eight
sessions to get the result required
...

Nowadays I tend to specialise in working with Phobias, Stress and Panic
attacks, although a lot of people tend to come along to stop smoking or
lose weight
...
Nowadays it is weight control
...
I always tell them that there are different ideas on what
regression actually is
...
They simply start to relive things that happened at an earlier

time in their life that lay submerged in the subconscious, e
...
stories they
were told as youngsters started to emerge as reality in the hypnotic state
...

I was once asked to do a past life regression for a spiritualist group, and
after asking for a volunteer a lady came forward asking if I would work
with her
...

I asked if she was inside or outside, what she could see, and if she was by
herself or with someone
...
She was trying to improve hygiene in the village and
help children who had come down with some illness
...

After opening her eyes, every one was eager to find out what she had been
doing, did it appear real to her etc
...

Just as I was leaving she came across to thank me for the experience and to
tell me that ever since she had been a little girl she had wanted to be a
missionary working in Africa
...
A real past life experience or someone’s subconscious releasing

memory’s as reality?
There was another regression where a lady saw herself standing on a cliff
side overlooking the waters, waiting for her fisherman husband to come
home, but with a feeling deep inside that the sea had claimed him and she
would never see him again
...

She started to tell me more about herself, how her ancestors came from a
fishing village in Ireland and of the stories her grandparents would tell her
about the place and the people who lived there, how hard their lives would
have been
...

Fears and Phobias
It is quite amazing the fears that people come along with
...
e
...

Although there are no snakes to speak of in the UK it really is astonishing
how this phobia pops up every now and again
...
She found it almost impossible to step
on earth or grass in case a snake or worm was lurking around waiting on
her
...

She eventually recalled going to the zoo as a schoolgirl and visiting the

reptile house that she found to be quite scary
...
As she turned round to look they
let it drop on to her lap at which point she freaked out until her friend
sitting next to her picked it up and showed her it was made of rubber
...

Something as simple as a school boy prank had years later developed in to
a phobia that was disrupting a young woman’s life
...

It came as a surprise to her as she recalled the event from her past and
remarked ‘I can hardly believe something as stupid as that has caused me
so much disruption for such a long time
...

She sent a note a few weeks later to say the fear had completely gone
And she was happily working in her garden with a complete disregard to
the worms
...
Unfortunately, the prize also included a guided tour through a
serpent temple - apparently this was a place where the snakes were seen as
holy and could slither anywhere they wanted in the temple
...


With new techniques, using the fast phobia release, the fear was taken
away and the memory was left as nothing more than what it was, a
harmless memory
...

Weight Control
With obesity on the increase in the western world, more and more people
are turning to Hypnosis to assist in losing weight
...

When we eat our body releases endorphins into the brain that make us feel
good, if we eat fast the feel good factor passes quickly so we feel the need
to eat more
...

All of the reasons mentioned earlier Worry, Upset, Boredom, Frustration,
Disappointment and Stress, are feelings we hope to alleviate by having
something to eat even although we are not hungry
...
It is one of those
problems that can take more than one session, however the results can be

impressive
...

People who do not eat enough as they see there body image as being
overweight even although everyone else sees them as a normal build
...
That is a medical condition that
hypnosis can help with but only with their Doctors consent)
Then there are the ones who will only eat a particular type of food e
...
will
only eat pasta, one young boy would only eat Tomato soup with bread and
butter
...

They talk themselves into believing that they are not good enough to
achieve the things they would like to achieve
...
The list goes on
...


At the end of the six week course she came across to me and said that she
had never felt herself good enough to do things she really wanted to do,
she had been working in the schools as a classroom assistant, but had
always wanted to be a teacher
...
It really is having the courage to take the first step
...
She came along for a few
sessions and felt she was now ready to sit the test again
...
She had passed her test, left her
husband who was always putting her down, and she was now a college
student
...

(Hope her ex never finds out she came to see me
...
If however we mix with people
who are always upbeat and encouraging we come to believe that all things
are possible
(If another person can do it so can you)
...
False Evidence Appearing Real)
Public Speaking
...

It appears to be that because they are the centre of attention and all eyes
are upon them there is that little voice in their head saying don’t mess this
up you will look like a fool, what if I forget what I was going to say
everyone will laugh at me
...
Even although they have spent
hours going over what they want to say, have their presentation all laid out
they start to freeze with the negativity going on in their head
...
One off the clients I had along
recently was a school teacher and although she stood in front of classes
every day the thought of giving a talk in front of colleagues filled her with
dread, although she was recognized as a competent teacher when she went
along for interviews for promotion she would go to pieces, her stomach
would churn she would forget what she was going to say and feel her eyes
welling up
...

Imagine
Just before you go on, picture yourself sitting in the audience looking at
yourself on stage, see yourself looking calm and relaxed and watch as you
smile at the audience notice how comfortable you feel as people smile
back, see yourself looking and talking calmly and confidently to the people
sitting there
Then imagine that you are merging with that you on the stage, see what she

sees, feel how she feels and realise that when you step onto the stage you
are going to respond in the same way as that imaginary you
...

There is nothing better to help you relax than to see friendly faces
...

You will find that by doing these simply exercises you can quickly relax as
you begin your presentation in that calm confident manner and talk as
though you were talking to a best friend
...
What is Hypnosis?
A)
...

It works like a bridge between the two parts of your mind, the conscious
and the sub-conscious, allowing you to make the alterations necessary,
to bring about the changes you require
...
What can Hypnosis help with
...
Hypnosis can help with a variety of problems
Anxiety, Stress, Phobias, Smoking, Weight control,
Insomnia Pain control, Childbirth and many other problems
associated with the Mind
...
Do I fall asleep or blackout
A)
...

Q)
...
No-one can be made to do anything they don’t want to do
...

Q)
...
everyone of normal intelligence who is not under the effects of
drugs or alcohol can enter into the hypnotic state
...
what happens at the first session
A)
...

You will then be gently led into a very enjoyable relaxed state
where you can begin to make the changes required
...

There are various techniques used with Hypnosis, i
...

Hypno-Analysis, Suggestion therapy,
Neuro-Linguistic-Programming, regression therapy and
VCDTTM and to name just a few
...
C
...
and
Stress
...

It can be used as a stand alone therapy, or in conjunction with other
techniques, depending on the presenting problem
...

For further information /look at the website
www
...
com

A Short History of Hypnosis
Hypnosis is one of mankind's oldest healing therapies there are
hieroglyphics from ancient Egypt thought to relate to it
...
This was also used in the Greek
healing Temples that were dedicated to Hypnos the Greek God of sleep
...
He was a Scottish surgeon from Ballingry in Fife working in
Manchester, and is regarded by many as the father of modern day
hypnosis
...
He examined the
physical condition of mesmerized subjects and found that they were,
in a different physical state
...

It was Braid who first used the word Hypnotism naming it after 'Hypnos'
the Greek god of sleep
...


For further information /look at the website
www
...
com

The Battle for Your Mind !
Written by Dr Daren Armstrong
I'm a fully qualified and professionally trained member of The Association
of Professional Hypnotherapists & Psychotherapists, as well as being fully
qualified, in a number of other disciplines such as pain control, NLP and
life coaching
...

Proud Creator of 'Direct Neurological Association' Programming
...
So you CAN Be, Do and Have Anything and Everything you
desire
...
dna-programming
...
Now, just as most of us no longer work the land for a
living, there are no gardeners of your mind
...

Just as the world has evolved, just as technology has evolved in quantum

leaps, we too have evolved, our minds have taken a quantum leap from a
garden to a super highway
...
The power
of positive thinking and all that
...

It is no longer effective to potter around the garden of your mind, planting
seeds, fending off the weeds, greenfly and slugs
...

NOW your subconscious mind is being bombarded with programs, just
like all computers, we also need programs, to operate
...

So unless you can program your own subconscious computer, it is running
other peoples programs, meaning you have virtually no control over your
life
...

But Who's ? …
...
These are the Intentional
programmers, More about them later
...
These are
the incidental programmers
And finally there are the Internal Programmers
...
You
program YOU, just not consciously
...

Have you ever stopped to ask yourself why you eat what you eat, why you
watch the TV programs you watch or why you react in a certain way in a
given situation, even though sometimes, you wish you had reacted
differently
...
I would hallucinate not
...
That's because it is controlled by a
program and if it's not your program, if you didn't write it and you didn't
install it
...
If they are
not your programs, if you didn't write them and you didn't install them
then
...
My
assumption is that you didn't write any of them, you didn't install any of
them
...
All these programs have been put there

by one of the Three programmers Battling for your Mind
...
The Intentional Programmers – These are by far the most effective of
ALL the programmers in the battle for your mind
...

They are also experts on the most powerful installation methods of all,
utilising hypnosis and NLP
...
Just like a computer, it won't work
...
These include the media – TV, film,
radio, newspapers and magazines
...

(II)
...
Its like
swapping a file from one computer to another they don't actually write the
program
...

These people have programmed you but don't know they have, and you
probably didn't know they had either
...
Its true
...
And these
programs are usually, almost carbon copies of their beliefs and limitations
...

(III)
...

“ I AM

no good at tennis, football, golf ” or whatever, “ I can never
remember names ”, “ I could never do that ” etc
...
I
have taught people who said they had bad memories, to have fantastic
memories
...

So what can I you do to win this battle of My Mind and breakthrough ALL
my limitations
...
You
have got to learn to program your own mind
...

Knowing HOW to do it, is easy
...
Just
look at the Master programmers
...

The thing is to, do what they do, you would have to study in depth,
Psychology, Hypnosis and NLP all to master level and beyond
...
I would
highly recommend it though, for those of you with the inclination
...
This is effective and time consuming as you more or less have to

repeatedly deal with one issue at a time
...

Another effective method of programming is Self Hypnosis
...

The programs installed by the Incidental Programmers, quite possibly
before you were 8 years old are in your DNA as it was so long ago the
Programming took place
...
So You feel
you have virtually no control over them
...
“This is
me, its what I'm like” and you are absolutely right ! It is what you are like,
its in your DNA
...
This is the sort of
Programming you see in therapy all the time its fears, phobia's and
limitations in all their various guises yet fundamentally, all the same
...
The good news
is When you learn to program your own subconscious mind you will be
able to change your DNA Programming easily and effectively
...
Just chose one
...
Its important only that you learn to
program your own mind
...

I believe as the battle for our mind continues the Master Programmers
who spend billions and billions creating these programs for our minds and
will continue to spend billions more on research to constantly improve
their effectiveness, will continue to improve, exponentially, taking over
more, and more, of our minds
...
The battle can
still be won
...
So you can Be, Do and Have
ANYTHING and EVERTHING, you Deserve
...
dna-programming
...
Kruti Parekh
About Dr
...
Kruti Parekh , has researched extensively on the Mind for 9 years and
has developed a special presentation that would explain the “Science of
Mind” & how we can to empower our minds
...
and
prepared a special presentation that will “CHANGE THE WAY YOU
THINK” She has also penned down a book named “Beyond the Threshold
of Mind”
...

Kruti Parekh has transformed lives of thousands of people in both national
and international arena in Countries like USA , Canada, Europe Middleeast , China and India
...


Different people have different needs
...
Kruti also caters to individual Clients in case
of special needs
...
She also customizes workshops to concentrate on specific issues
in an organization
...
krutiparekh
...
, you picture the mysterious
figure, the hypnotist, popularized in movies, comic books and television
...
Once
hypnotized, the subject obeys, no matter how strange or immoral the
request, muttering "Yes, master”
...
In fact, modern understanding of hypnosis contradicts this on
several key points
...
And they're not really in a semisleep state -- they're actually hyper attentive
...
There is a universal
belief that hypnosis is a form of unconsciousness and you can control
people under its influence , but that is not entirely true
...
There have been various explanations given by people and
audiences by various performers , to suit their demonstrations and ideas
...
”
Persons under hypnosis are said to possess very high level of focus and

concentration with the ability to concentrate intensely on a specific thought
or memory, while blocking out sources of distraction
...
Hypnosis, if delivered in the
presence of the subject is called self suggestion or may be selfadministered as autosuggestion
...

The hypnotized individual appears to follow the communications of the
hypnotist and seems to respond in an uncritical, automatic fashion,
ignoring all aspects of the environment other than those pointed out to him
by the hypnotist
...


Can You really Be Hypnotized?
The experience of hypnosis can vary dramatically from one person to
another
...
Other
individuals may remain fully aware and able to carry out conversations
while under hypnosis
...


Some facts :
l
l

Only 10% of adults are considered difficult or impossible
to hypnotize
...
Research has suggested that
individuals who view hypnosis in a positive light tend to respond better
than the others
...

While amnesia may occur in very rare cases, people generally remember
everything that occurred while they were hypnotized
...

While hypnosis can be used to enhance memory, the effects have been
dramatically exaggerated in popular media
...

Despite stories about people being hypnotized without their consent,
hypnosis requires voluntary participation on the part of the patient
...

While people often feel that their actions under hypnosis seem to occur
without the influence of their will, a hypnotist cannot make you perform
actions that are against your values or morals
...

While hypnosis can be used to enhance performance, it cannot make
people stronger or more athletic than their existing physical capabilities
...
I would like to put your mind at rest
about these “myths” and then give the truths about hypnosis and many of
the problems that can be solved quickly and naturally
...
EnglishSkypeHypnotist
...
I run online
coaching in modules which can be tailored to suit your needs where and
when you have the time
...


For your own free version of this chapter as an illustrated downloadable ebook, visit www
...
com
You can read my blog “Hypnotherapy for Positive Change” at
http://hypno4change
...
co
...
The author shall have neither liability nor
responsibility to any person or entity with respect to any loss or damage caused, or alleged to have
been caused, whether directly or indirectly, by the information contained herein
...
Hypnosis is a strange, unnatural state
...
g
...
It is an altered state of awareness
in which the brain relaxes from Beta brain wave down into Alpha or Theta
brain wave
...

2
...
No, that is a belief caused by too
many bad films
...
I can’t force someone to stop smoking if
they adamantly want to remain a smoker, no matter how much their partner
wants them to or if the boss is paying
...

Simple as that
...
The hypnotist will make me say or do embarrassing things like in a
stage show
...
They are usually the first to buy
the DVD of the show because they are aware of what they do but not how
they do it so want to see the show they created
...
Stage hypnosis is entertainment
...
A deep trance state is not
necessary
...

4
...
I wish! A hypnotist is someone who
has learned to lead someone into a hypnotic trance via use of an induction
followed by a deepener to deepen the state of trance
...

Hypnotherapy is using that hypnotic trance for the person’s benefit to help
them overcome a problem
...
Some
hypnotherapists combine hypnosis with other skills such as:
- NLP (Neuro Linguistic Programming)
- Psychotherapy (study of schools of thought e
...
Freud, Jung,
psychoanalysis, Counselling, Adlerian & Family Therapy etc
...
)
- Solution Focussed therapy is aimed at helping you to realise your
own potential to help yourself
...

- EFT (Emotional Freedom Technique – tapping on certain parts of
the body)
...
Some
therapists just like to add techniques if they believe they are in the
person’s interest
...
Only stupid or weak-minded people can be hypnotised
...
In
fact, the higher the IQ the better the person is as a subject for hypnosis
...
The ability to concentrate and be creative is very useful

for hypnosis
...
Some people can’t be hypnotised
...

Whether everyone “wants” to be hypnotised is another matter
...
g
...
If someone does not want
to solve their problem or has been taken to a hypnotherapist against their
will, the chance of solving their issue is slim
...
Hypnosis is like going to sleep or being put “under”
...

Unfortunately, this was not a good name to select as generally anyone who
is in hypnotic trance is not asleep
...
This is the part of your mind which wakes you e
...
if there
is an intruder in your house or will wake a mum if her baby is in distress
...
When deprived of one of our five senses, another sense tends to
compensate
...
You may hear outside sounds such as traffic as a little louder
than the hypnotist hears them
...
A dog can keep barking and you will stay deeply relaxed
...
” (Wikipedia)
8
...
No, you can’t
...
If the hypnotist stops talking, you will either emerge
from hypnosis to see why the talking has stopped or fall asleep due to your
very relaxed state
...


9
...
This is generally
untrue
...
The
person may not be ready to remember that memory so it is safer to keep the
can of worms closed
...
This is all perfectly normal
...
If you can hear the hypnotist talking, you are not hypnotised
...

Hypnosis is an altered state of waking consciousness which means you are
awake and will therefore hear what is said
...
As
hypnosis is a heightened state of awareness, you will be aware of the
hypnotist’s voice and outside sounds
...
You lose track of time in hypnosis
...
You probably
know that the left-hand side of the brain is the rational, thinking, timed
side whilst the right-hand side is the creative, dreamy, untimed side
...
This means that if you lose yourself in
painting, sculpting, sewing etc
...
The same happens in
hypnosis
...
The beauty is that
20 minutes of hypnosis can leave you as refreshed as 7-8 hours of sleep
...
What if the hypnotist has a heart attack or dies? You will naturally
bring yourself round from the trance, just as you do when daydreaming
...
” PS
...
Hypnosis can be dangerous! Life can be dangerous
...
It is a state of mental and physical relaxation in
which positive, useful suggestions are given to help the person with their
problem
...


14
...
Thanks
Derren Brown
...
Derren is a very talented entertainer who creates jawdropping stunts
...
No one can be made to commit or
say anything against their values and beliefs
...

15
...
No,
no-one can force you to reveal your bank card PIN numbers or your
family’s secrets
...
Simple
...
Hypnosis can be used as a lie-detector test
...
It is used sometimes to help reveal forgotten details of crimes or
traumas
...
Repeated hypnotic inductions weaken the mind - Repetitive
inductions actually strengthen a person's mental abilities to achieve their
goals and release fears, limitations or discomforts
...

18
...
No, but the beneficial feeling of being deeply
relaxed both mentally and physically is obviously attractive
...
You shouldn’t hypnotize children
...
They have a great imagination and enjoy
the visualization enormously
...
Others could
centre on their favourite TV characters, scoring the winning goal for their
favourite football team or flying on a cloud
...
Generally, it is best if they are at least seven
years old so that they can concentrate on the session but they can also be

hypnotized whilst playing and with their eyes still open
...

20
...

Some misguided believers even told me that when you relax under
hypnosis, the Devil can come in to your mind
...
If that was
true, the Devil would enter every time you relax into sleep, relax in front of
the TV or a film, relax into a warm bubble bath, relax under the sun, etc
...
The Old and
New Testament specifically speak against sorcery, witchcraft, spirit
channelling and other religious practices
...
Some hypnotists practice past life regression
...
Regression within this lifetime can have excellent
therapeutic outcomes and I do use this technique when I think it is
appropriate and after discussion with my client
...

21
...
I don’t and don’t know any hypnotist who does
...
Whenever I meet someone who finds
out that I hypnotize people, they also joke about “
...
Reality is that we talk people into a hypnotic trance using our voice
...


·You’ve read the 21 Myths now read the 30 Truths and Positive Uses
of Hypnosis
...
Hypnosis is all about relaxing to a deep level
...
The first time will be pleasant but the person is not

sure what to expect and is still holding back in some way
...

About 5% of the population can enter really deep state hypnosis which is
necessary for surgery without anaesthesia
...

Most people with training can go deep enough for childbirth without pain
control called Hypnobirthing (I did, twice), dentistry and learn pain control
for chronic pain
...
I am just saying
that a deeper trance is necessary for some aspects of clinical hypnosis
...
All hypnosis is fundamentally self-hypnosis
...

3
...
Although it
is not a physical barrier, there is said to be a Critical Faculty between the
conscious and subconscious mind
...
The reasoning, evaluating and judging part of your mind
(conscious) is bypassed
...
g
...
” It also prefers pictures hence we use so many
visualizations and metaphors
...
It hasn't got all of this facade, this veneer of what we call
adult culture
...
It is direct and free
...
Erickson - founder of modern hypnosis)

4
...
You know consciously why you want to be
rid of a bad habit or give up an addiction
...
That is because your subconscious mind is
controlling your conscious mind and you are not even aware of the
subconscious messages which rule every thought, action, behaviour and
belief you have
...
This is the level where change must occur for it to become
permanent
...
” - Dr Milton
H
...
In hypnosis, your brainwave changes from Beta Wave to Alpha
Wave or even Theta Wave
...
g
...

Alpha brain wave is the early stage of relaxation although the person may
still be alert but not fully focused
...
When I say passive, you might be daydreaming
so miss your turning when driving
...
Realising you have missed the turning
means you are back in Beta
...
g
...

In Alpha, the doorway between the conscious and
unconscious/subconscious is opened which also means memories
otherwise pushed deep become easily accessible
...
Alpha state allows creativity to
flow
...

Theta brain wave is the level of deep relaxation which brings tranquillity

but also creativity and accelerated learning
...
g
...
This is an optimal trance state
for hypnosis with heightened imagination and receptivity to suggestion,
possibly deep day dreams or lucid dreaming
...
We therefore go
into Theta state every day
...
blogspot
...
uk/2011/10/brain-waves-andentering-hypnotic
...
Hypnosis is recognized medically
...
The United States Government defines it as:
“The bypass of the critical factor of the conscious mind and the
establishment of acceptable selective thinking
...
Reimbursement is available through BUPA if the hypnotist has
a BUPA number
...
Hypnosis can be quicker and more cost-effective than traditional
therapy
...
Hypnosis has an effect on the serotonin and dopamine levels in the
brain
...
The act of
entering hypnosis, often induced through calming, meditative practice
appears to increase serotonin levels (feel-good, inner peace
neurotransmitters) and this primes the brain for acceptance of hypnotic
suggestion, whilst dampening conflict responses
...
After
hypnosis, dopamine levels rise, but depending on hypnotic suggestion,
reuptake of serotonin may be inhibited
...
Hypnosis really helps in stress management
...
We may not be able to remove the
cause of the stress but it is about how we react to it, whether it controls us
or whether we can learn to handle the cause effectively
...
Swallowing
tranquillizers or anti-depressants is another road which may give
temporary relief but again is not the best way
...

10
...
If you are
arachnophobic (scared of spiders), CBT will require introducing you to
small spiders, then bigger ones and even bigger ones
...
I was arachnophobic
and the thought of undergoing that treatment was far worse for me than
running away from spiders
...

One day I realised my young son had copied my fear so I decided to do
something about it
...
Within just a few minutes I was able to
look at a book of spider photos
...
No screaming, no
clanging heart and no fear
...
I still don’t
like them because I think they are ugly but I am not afraid of them
anymore
...
One week after doing this,
someone rang me who was going to work in Africa and had a terrible fear
of – you’ve guessed it – spiders
...
She thought she might have to turn down a dream job but
with two sessions from me she overcame all the fear and is now happily
coping with life in the African wild
...

It is rational to be afraid of certain things like sharks when swimming in a
shark-infested sea but irrational in a swimming pool
...
Often they are debilitating affecting daily life
such as claustrophobia (enclosed spaces), agrophobia (open spaces), germs
or water
...
Hypnosis can help you overcome the fear of public speaking
...

Just calm, confident, self-assured speaking
...
Now I actually enjoy speaking
in front of a group and am delighted to help others move from fear to fun
...

Even a bit of warm-up I learned in speech therapy to ensure you speak
crystally clear
...
She did not want to
depend on beta blockers and chose to control her nerves with selfhypnosis
...
Hypnosis can eliminate your fear of heights, fear of flying or many
other fears
...
g
...
Some of these fears prevent people from seeking much-needed
medical treatment or going to the dentist
...
Now you can buy that penthouse apartment or fly to
Australia
...
These include fear of failure (and success), fear of being alone,
commitment, conflict, rejection and the unknown
...

13
...

Why Diets, Slimming Clubs and Low-Fat Foods Keep Adding on the
Pounds
...
The US$ 40 Billion diet industry knows
that yet they keep allowing you to waste your money
...
Yo-yo dieting!
FORGET STARVATION…
If you restrict your calorie intake you starve your body and become
obsessed with eating
...


FORGET” LOW-FAT”FOODS & “LIGHT” DRINKS
“Low-fat” foods and “light” drinks only make your body hold on to the
weight
...

Fat is not a bad word as your body needs a certain amount of fat for
essential functions
...

FORGET DIETING CLUBS
Dieting clubs are great for mutual support but they focus on calorie
counting and ultimately want you to buy their brand of restricted foods
...

I offer the amazing new Gastric Band Hypnosis – all the benefits of gastric
band surgery but without any of the side effects
...
This is Virtual Gastric Band
...
The best result so far is an amazing eight stone!!!
14
...
The NHS have a quit smoking
programme which takes time and centres on nicotine replacement products
...
Rather than
have you focus on smoking and obsess with cutting down, I can stop you
smoking in just one session! This will be without cravings or withdrawal
symptoms
...

She went away a non-smoker and we kept in close contact so that I could
give her any support she needed
...
He cannot stop thinking about cigarettes,
still has 2-3 per day and is feeling rough
...

15
...
Many are not seriously
limiting your life but may be annoying, perhaps more to others around you
than to yourself e
...
nail-biting, thumb-sucking and bedwetting (children

or adults), persistent skin picking or scratching, teeth grinding (bruxism),
mouth or cheek chewing, restless leg syndrome, nervous tics, blushing,
knuckle cracking, nervous cough or swallowing, excessive blinking,
rocking (Rhythmic Body Disorder Relaxation), night tremors and bladder
control (stress incontinence)
...
Gambling, lying,
internet porn, shopping (Oniomania) – think of the money you will save!,
stealing, Kleptomania (hoarding), hair pulling (trichotillomania), Tourette’s
Syndrome (involuntary swearing), OCD (Obsessive Compulsive Disorder)
although I stress that OCD is a difficult disorder to treat fully
...
Hypnosis can help with addictions in a positive way
...
g
...
” No, xxxx used to be an alcoholic but hypnosis
can give the freedom to put that behaviour in the past and adopt a new
behaviour
...
I say that calling
themselves an “ex-smoker” reminds them of being a smoker rather than the
more positive “non-smoker”
...
Also, problem addictions such as gambling and pornography
...
While the internet has
opened up ways of communicating to the whole world, the apparent
anonymity encourages people to be untruthful in internet dating, cybersex
and so much more
...
Hypnosis

can help you control your alcohol drinking or stop
altogether
...
It takes guts for someone to admit they have
tipped into alcoholism but I don’t like labelling anyone
...
If someone wants help, we
can discuss how far they need to go and change the behaviour at the deep
subconscious level
...

18
...

While in this state of mind, one's focus and concentration is heightened
...
Hypnosis
can be used to enhance your performance e
...
improve your mental ability
to play better golf; mentally rehearse sporting events; help you to prepare
for public speaking in a calm, confident manner
...

http://www
...
com/026978_hypnosis_memory_therapy
...
Hypnosis helps with many areas of personal development e
...

overcoming procrastination, becoming motivated, realizing that perfection
can hold you back and generally working on areas which are keeping you
from being the person you can be
...
Personal
development is my passion and I love to help someone find a world
without limits and go forward
...
” - Carl Jung
20
...
Knowing that some physical
problem reduces your chance of conception is an all too common situation
today
...
For those who decide to try IVF,
the road ahead is painful, stressful and very expensive
...
There are no
guarantees, of course, but more and more fertility doctors are working with

hypnotists to relax their patients and give them the best possible chance of
conception
...

Studies indicate “infertile” women using hypnosis have up to 55%
conception success rate as compared to 20% for those not following these
methods
...

21
...
Hypnobirthing is a specialized form of hypnosis so look
for a hypnotist with this training
...
Hypnosis can help with Children’s problems e
...
bedwetting,
thumb-sucking, coping with being bullied, coping with divorce or death in
the family, increasing self-confidence, even feeling bigger
...
I helped a boy of 8
who was small for his age
...
In one session “flying out of the
magic chair on the magic carpet”, we changed his self-image
...
His mother reported a
noticeable improvement in his school work and the bullying just stopped
...
Teenagers
and young people can be really helped with the stress of exam nerves
...

23
...
A study of
Olympic athletes showed that whether an athlete actually ran a race or
imagined that he did so, the neurons in the brain still made the muscles
fire
...
What we can imagine in our subconscious mind becomes
reality
...
It cannot do is the physically impossible e
...
build your arm
muscles without the necessary exercise, have you play championship level
golf/tennis unless you already have the skill
...
Hypnosis can help sleep problems e
...
insomnia, falling asleep,
staying asleep, frequent nightmares, night tremors, restless leg syndrome,
snoring (or sleeping with a snorer)
...
Hypnosis can help depression
...
The result of using hypnosis is a healthier perspective on life
...

It has even been suggested that hypnosis can reduce the symptoms of
dementia
...
Hypnosis Shown To
Reduce Symptoms Of Dementia
...
Found online at:
http://www
...
com/releases/2008/07/080728111402
...
Hypnosis helps with many stress-related illnesses
...
by using hypnosis people can
perform prodigious feats of will-power and self-healing
...
1
...
1961 Sep;58:390-419
...
BARBER

TX
...
MeSH Terms
...

Professor Spiegel, who works at the Department of Psychiatry and
Behavioral Sciences at Stanford University in the US, also advised that the
National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (NICE) should add
hypnotherapy to its list of approved therapies for many more conditions
...

Hypnotherapy is already recognised by NICE for treatment of irritable
bowel syndrome (IBS)
...

"It is time for hypnosis to work its way into the mainstream of British
medicine," he said, before affirming that there is solid science behind
hypnosis and adding: "We need to get that message across to the bodies
that influence this area
...
It makes
operations quicker, as the patient is able to talk to the surgeon as the
operation proceeds, and it is cheaper than conventional pain relief
...
”
"It is also extremely powerful as a means of pain relief
...
They think it's
either too powerful or not powerful enough, but, although the public are
sceptical, the hardest part of the procedure is getting other doctors to
accept it
...
Some skin complaints have even baffled dermatologists
when they do not respond to creams, cortisone or other treatments
...
Or the problem can be

stress-related
...

Irritable Bowel Syndrome (IBS)
...

Moore, M
...
F
...
719-718
Hypnosis for IBS has received support in the National Institute for Health
and Clinical Excellence guidance published for UK health services
...
(PDF)
...

At Manchester University, Whorwell's group have found long-term followup rates of 95% success with classical, refractory IBS cases who had
previously failed with an average of six types of treatment
...
[Prior, Colgan, Whorwell 1990; Whorwell,
Prior and Faragher, 1984; Whorwell, Prior and Colgan 1987; Whorwell
2004]
Cancer
...
How
hypnosis does help is to relieve the person of the fear caused by cancer,
help them to relax, help the body undergo chemotherapy, reduce
nausea/vomiting and promote a healthy immune system
...

The reduction of nausea and vomiting in cancer patients undergoing
chemotherapy
...
(2001)
...
Psychology
Today
...
com/articles/index
...
Hypnosis can help someone with chronic pain
...

Psychological approaches to pain relief are well documented, and
hypnosis has been widely used for centuries in this area
...

One of the problems with chronic pain management is that the brain
habituates to pain-killing drugs, requiring higher and higher doses
...

Hypnotherapy has been used by many to manage numerous instances of
pain, including irritable bowel syndrome, sciatica, spinal stenosis, burns,
rheumatoid arthritis, joint pain, neck pain and a variety of other injuries
and illnesses
...

This can be achieved using a number of techniques which may either be
used alone or in combination depending on your individual circumstances
and the specialist areas of your practitioner
...

Many hypnotherapists will also include self-hypnosis as part of your
treatment plan, meaning that they will teach you to practice techniques so
that once your sessions have come to an end you will be able to continuing
using the skills you have learnt in daily life
...
Hypnosis is used instead of anaesthesia
...
Many prefer not to use it as it can take up to
a month for the body to rid itself of the effects
...
I heard a women talk of her foot
bone operation using only hypnosis
...
They wanted to give her pain medication even though she was
not in pain and insisted she walk out of the hospital on crutches even
though she did not need any assistance
...

Marie-Elisabeth Faymonville has logged more than 5,100 surgeries by
hypnosedation, a technique Faymonville developed that replaces general
anesthesia with hypnosis, local anesthesia and a mild sedative
...

The new interest stems in part from studies showing that hypno-sedated
patients suffer fewer side effects than fully sedated ones do
...
In a 1999 study of thyroid patients, Dr Faymonville found that
the typical hypno-sedated patient returned to work 15 days after surgery,
compared with 28 days for a fully anaesthetized patient
...
time
...
html#ixzz2
NzJ8JBS6
Dave Elman devised a hypnotic induction with which his students
routinely obtained states of hypnosis adequate for medical and surgical
procedures in under three minutes
...

29
...
This
is more than positive thinking to take away the fear
...

I was in hospital for brain surgery
...
Within one month, I was functioning normally
again
...
Hypnosis can help sexual problems e
...
Erectile Dysfunction (ED),
premature or delayed ejaculation, vaginisimus, addiction to pornography or
masturbation, sexual orientation issues
...

So now you know the truths about hypnosis
...
skype-hypnosis
...
He has worked in the
fields of administration, college teaching and personal development
...
Alasdair is also qualified in a number of alternative
therapies, including spiritual healing
...

Alasdair edited Book 2 of Delavar’s “The Hypnotists’ Bible” that was
included in Volume 2 of Dr Royle’s “Encyclopedia of Hypnotherapy,
Stage- Hypnosis and Complete Mind Therapy”
...

abghypno@yahoo
...
uk
Virtually unknown as recently as the 1970s, the term “holistic” has now
become somewhat of a buzz word
...

Looking at the therapy world today, we could find ourselves confused by
the huge – and ever growing – number of approaches that are available
...

How can all of these different approaches be right? Does the client put all
his trust in colour therapy, crystal therapy, hopi ear candles, reflexology or
hot stones to say nothing of the hypnotherapy itself? But even
hypnotherapy can be broken down and specialised
...
Are these approaches (and there are many more)
only part of a bigger picture or are they therapies in their own right? In
fact, there is no easy answer
...

I write these words without any intended disrespect for conventional
medicine, on which we all rely at some time in our lives
...
When the present writer was a child,
the local doctor was treated as little less than a god (which was actually
very unfair on him)
...
The doctor would tell you when it was time
to retire or for you to go on holiday
...
This is a stereotype, of course, but like most stereotypes, it contains a
grain of truth
...
And the medical
profession itself has changed in many respects
...
“I’m in your hands, doctor!”
To me, it is crucially important for hypnotherapists to pitch themselves at
the appropriate professional level
...
We
have clients, not patients
...
We want to assist and support people to achieve their
own healing, but that is quite a different matter
...
It can take years to build
up a good reputation
...

Many – probably most of you who are reading this chapter – will be
members of some kind of professional association
...
That has to be a personal
decision
...
However, I suggest it is unwise not to be a

member of some organisation that has at least minimal professional
requirements
...
It may
be superficially attractive to think of oneself as a “loose cannon”, but it
will not please your association nor will it satisfy your insurers
...

When meeting a client for the first time, it is useful to gather as much
information as possible about the client’s particular circumstances, taking
care not to breach the Data Protection legislation
...
Remember that a hypnotherapist is not qualified to diagnose
physical or mental illness or disorder
...

You may well form your own opinion of what is “wrong” with the client
but it is advisable to be very cautious in what you say
...
In
general, however, the therapist has no right to approach a client’s doctor
without that client’s express permission
...
In
practice, few will take up the opportunity at this stage but in this litigious
society, it is a useful safeguard
...
It is also worth pointing out that the
British Medical Association (“BMA”) recognised hypnosis as a valid
therapy as long ago as 1955
...
Other subjects who are unsuitable for hypnotherapy
are people with an active psychotic illness or a current suicidal state
...
Also if a client has lost
memory syndrome, hypnotherapy is probably best avoided
...
Confidence could only be
broken if the therapist had good reason to believe that the client was
posing a serious risk to himself or someone else
...

Although attitudes are changing and hypnotherapy has become much more
main stream in the United Kingdom, there is still a fair degree of ignorance
and suspicion
...
It is worth
emphasising to a new client that hypnotherapy is complementary to
conventional medicine and not in opposition to it
...

It should be remembered that the ability of the mind to affect the physical
body has been well documented over many centuries
...
Recognition of this
synergistic link certainly goes back to the time of Ancient Greece and
possible even further back
...
In fact, medicine became much more
scientific in that it demanded rational empirical proof for the efficiency of
any kind of treatment
...

In more recent times, possibly due to the rising interest in psychology, the

capacity of the human mind to influence the body has come much more to
the fore and back into the mainstream of medical thinking
...
If someone wants to lose
weight but lives on a diet of chips and fizzy drinks it is not out of place for
the hypnotherapist to suggest that the client obtain some advice on healthy
eating and well as offering weight control hypnotherapy
...

It is always worth at least attempting to establish a good working
relationship with medical practitioners in the area
...

So far, we have looked mainly at the relationship between the conventional
medical practitioner and the hypnotherapist
...
There are those hypnotherapists who
take the purist line
...
To offer more would compromise their professionalism
...
We must all do what we believe is right for us
...

Sometimes, you will also come on a client whom you wish to refer on to
someone else
...
An example might be suggesting that
a client with a weight problem might also wish to meet with a dietician as
part of the overall treatment of the condition
...
Most
indemnity insurances will allow you to add a number of additional
therapies to your basic cover
...
In my view, it is unwise anyway to offer any therapy
without at least a piece of paper to back it up
...
The
real learning, of course, is always in the doing
...

Whilst hypnotherapy and NLP frequently run in to one another, there are
NLP techniques, such as the Fast Phobia Cure, which are extremely useful
in practice
...
It is worth finding out if there is an NLP
Practice Group in your area
...

As a therapist, I personally favour what might be called the toolbox or
integrative approach
...

What works for one person may not work for another
...
Such a person may respond more positively to Cognitive
Behavioural Therapy or even Life Coaching
...
The public will tend to be
suspicious of someone who appears to be a jack of all trades
...


What you, as therapist, feel comfortable in offering has to be a very
personal matter
...

There is nothing more off-putting to a client than to have a therapist who
does not appear to be entirely competent or confident
...

Not only can you gather important factual information about the client, but
you can also establish professional rapport
...
The therapist will also
become more aware of where his client is “coming from”
...
It
may be that one client will expect what might be called the “full works” –
induction, deepener, suggestions – involving quite a deep trance
...
The
ability to make such assessment comes with experience
...

We believe that the subconscious often holds the remedy for our clients
and that it is an incredibly powerful factor
...


Perpetual State Theory
By Brian Stracner (HypnoSwami)
Brian is a professional individual of clinical, personal, and academic
experience
...
This is a person who you can say "has been there
...

www
...
net
www
...
com
Perpetual State Theory
There is no doubt that personality and behavior development is a complex
subject
...
However, there are
many grey areas between the spectrums of black in contrast to white
...

However, a possibly more important debate is the one between state versus
non-state hypnotic theories
...
However the author also
proposes that, everyone is already hypnotized to behave in the manners
that they carry out
...

Everyone is Hypnotized
Personality and behavior is not only learned through modeling others, it is
also developed through examples, metaphors, direct, and indirect feedback
from internal as well as external suggestion
...


In 1774 Benjamin Franklin and Antoine Lavoisier sought out to see
whether the first clinical hypnotherapist (Anton Mesmer) was actually
utilizing magnetic forces to heal clients, or if the phenomenon was
something else entirely (Herr, 2005)
...
This valuable historic study found that, Mesmer’s
healing abilities resided in the art of suggestion, not magnetism
...
Furthermore, to assert the point, everyone is
always subjected to variant levels of suggestion
...

State Versus Non-State Theories
Somewhere within state versus non-state debate there is an argument of
whether or not trance is necessary to achieve hypnotic phenomena
...
In fact the complete opposite can be seen in many
pre-induction talks of state and non-state theorists
...
6)
...
Seeing that any strong emotion can induce hypnosis,
compared to how many strong emotions a person experiences in a lifetime,
compounded how those suggestions affect the individual personality and
behavior of a person shines a bright light on the realization that every
single person is in fact hypnotized into who they have become on every
level of being
...
Instead, it would mean that everyone is
already hypnotized, and can also be de-hypnotized and hypnotized into
changing personality traits and behaviors
...
People like to believe that they have control over
their lives and their destiny
...
These beliefs and mores were produced by
outside sources and each person has been convinced of their veracity
...

Because of this, each of us lives in persistent hypnotic- like state
...
Thus, the current view that there are State theories and NonState theories of hypnosis begs the question
...
It is not possible to
hypnotize the already hypnotized
...
Each of these
theories points to something that is true about the human consciousness yet
neither is true enough in and of itself
...
PS is the result of culture, media and other social
influences
...
In effect, each is the product
of the suggestions heard directly or indirectly in everyday life
...
This idea states that all events are
caused by another (Hoefer, 2010)
...

Determinism would argue that the choice this person ultimately makes can

be predicted by looking at the events which preceded him
...
PS is similar in that the “causes” of Determinism
are replaced with “influences” or “suggestions”
...

One element of PS is culture
...
As we grow, we accept this situation as a
reality
...
When this happens, one reality is rejected for another
...
This is something that is not ever questioned for most people
...
People who experience this are
indeed experiencing a PS
...

Another element of PS is the media
...
Madison Avenue depends on this influence
...
This is seen in the area of
body perception
...
Additionally, the media affects the buying behavior
of consumers worldwide and nearly all possible space on TV, the Internet,
on city streets and vehicles is purchased for ad placement
...
Companies do
this because they know that influences of advertising work
...
Part of
how advertising works is its relation to peer pressure
...

This is true of teenagers deciding to try drugs and corporate men deciding
which golf club to join
...
If one’s peer group is buying Apple iPads, it is
extremely unlikely that they will by a Kindle HD
...
A
PS is created which decides that this person will purchase an Apple iPad
...

The idea that any of us can be placed in a hypnotic state is true
...
We are all already
determined to believe certain things and to behave in a certain way
...
But people need to understand that
they are not undergoing hypnosis for the first time! They have been in a
persistent state of hypnosis and going for more hypnosis is like being alive
and trying to get more “life”
...
Certain elements of
life and hypnosis can be adjusted perhaps, but no one undergoes hypnosis
as a new experience
...
Clinical Hypnotherapy
...
W
...

Department of Urology, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New
York, NY 10021, USA
...


Retrieved PubMed February 13th, 2013 From: PubMed - indexed for
MEDLINE PMID: 16144669
Kirsch, I
...
(1995) The Altered State of Hypnosis: Changes in the
Theoretical Landscape
...
APA Inc
...
50
...
10
...
0003-066X/95
Hoefer, C
...
“Causal determinism”
...
Retrieved from
http://plato
...
edu/entries/determinism-causal/
Laya,P
...
“Do you pay enough for adverstising? One big corporation
spend a jaw-dropping 4
...
Business Insider
...
businessinsider
...
Retrieved from:
http://www
...
org/perfectillusions/eatingdisorders/preventing_media
...
The influence of technology, media and popular
culture on criminal behavior
...
sagepub
...
pdf
Walley, M
...
Retrieved from:
http://www
...
org/scientific-theories-ofhypnosis
...
com/

Persuasion and Brainwashing Techniques Being Used On The Public
Today Reformatted for WWW display and distribution by Dynamic Living
I'm Dick Sutphen and this tape is a studio-recorded, expanded version of a
talk I delivered at the World Congress of Professional Hypnotists
Convention in Las Vegas, Nevada
...

Although I've been interviewed about the subject on many local and
regional radio and TV talk shows, large-scale mass communication appears
to be blocked, since it could result in suspicion or investigation of the very
media presenting it or the sponsors that support the media
...
Nor
do the Born-Again Christian movement, cults, and many human-potential
trainings
...
I don't

know how the misuse of these techniques can be stopped
...
I do know that the first step to initiate
change is to generate interest
...

In talking about this subject, I am talking about my own business
...
I produce hypnosis and subliminal
tapes and, in some of my seminars, I use conversion tactics to assist
participants to become independent and self-sufficient
...
They also know what the desired result of
participation will be
...
Those who have been
brainwashed will usually passionately defend their manipulators, claiming
they have simply been "shown the light"
...

The Birth of Conversion: Brainwashing in Christian Revivalism in
1735
...
and any study of
brainwashing has to begin with a study of Christian revivalism in
eighteenth century America
...

By inducing guilt and acute apprehension and by increasing the tension,
the "sinners" attending his revival meetings would break down and
completely submit
...
The problem was that the new input was negative
...

And the neighbors of the suicidal converts related that they, too, were
affected so deeply that, although they had found "eternal salvation," they
were obsessed with a diabolical temptation to end their own lives
...
New
input, in the form of suggestion, can be substituted for their previous ideas
...

Charles J
...
The
techniques are still being used today by Christian revivalists, cults, humanpotential trainings, some business rallies, and the United States Armed
services
...

Let me point out here that I don't think most revivalist preachers realize or
know they are using brainwashing techniques
...
And the more
sophisticated our knowledge and technology become, the more effective
the conversion
...

The Three Brain Phases: The Pavlovian Explanation
The Christians may have been the first to successfully formulate
brainwashing, but we have to look to Pavlov, the Russian scientist, for a

technical explanation
...
After the revolution in
Russia, Lenin was quick to see the potential of applying Pavlov's research
to his own ends
...
The first is the equivalent phase, in which the brain
gives the same response to both strong and weak stimuli
...
And the third is the ultra-paradoxical phase, in
which conditioned responses and behavior patterns turn from positive to
negative or from negative to positive
...
The way to achieve conversion are
many and varied, but the usual first step in religious or political
brainwashing is to work on the emotions of an individual or group until
they reach an abnormal level of anger, fear, exitement, or nervous tension
...
The more this condition can be maintained or
intensified, the more it compounds
...
Existing mental
programming can be replaced with new patterns of thinking and behavior
...

The same results can be obtained in contemporary psychiatric treatment by
electric shock treatments and even by purposely lowering a person's blood
sugar level with insulin injections
...
However, the two are often mixed
...

How Revivalist Preachers Work
If you'd like to see a revivalist preacher at work, there are probably several
in your city
...
Most likely repetitive music will be played while
the people come in for the service
...
And, once you are in an
alpha state, you are at least 25 times as suggestible as you would be in full
beta consciousness
...
Subconsciously, they recall their
state of mind from previous services and respond according to the posthypnotic programming
...
Many will exhibit
external signs of trance-- body relaxation and slightly dilated eyes
...
Next, the assistant pastor will probably come out
...
"
The "Voice Roll" Technique
A "voice roll" is a patterned, paced style used by hypnotists when inducing
a trance
...
A voice roll can sound as if the speaker were talking to the

beat of a metronome or it may sound as though he were emphasizing every
word in a monotonous, patterned style
...

The Build-up Process: Inducing Altered States
Now the assistant pastor begins the "build-up" process
...
Next, a group of young women in "sweet
and pure" chiffon dresses might come out to sing a song
...
In the middle of the song,
one of the girls might be "smitten by the spirit" and fall down or react as if
possessed by the Holy Spirit
...
At this point, hypnosis and conversion tactics are being
mixed
...

Assured Continuation: Fleecing the Flock
Right about this time, when an eyes-open mass-induced alpha mental state
has been achieved, they will usually pass the collection plate or basket
...
Give to God
...
"
And the audience does give
...

Bonding by Fear and Suggestion
Next, the fire-and-brimstone preacher will come out
...
In the last such rally I attended, the preacher

talked about the blood that would soon be running out of every faucet in
the land
...
I have no
doubt that everyone saw it--the power of suggestion given to hundreds of
people in hypnosis assures that at least 10 to 25 percent would see
whatever he suggested they see
...
People from the audience come up on stage and
relate their stories
...
After
listening to numerous case histories of miraculous healings, the average
guy in the audience with a minor problem is sure he can be healed
...

Miracles
Now those who want to be healed are frequently lined up around the edge
of the room, or they are told to come down to the front
...
Catharsis is a purging of
repressed emotions
...
And if catharsis is effected, they stand a chance of being healed
...

For some, the healing may be permanent
...
Even if the healing doesn't last, if
they come back every week, the power of suggestion may continually
override the problem
...


The Grey Area of Legitimacy
I'm not saying that legitimate healings do not take place
...
Maybe
the individual was ready to let go of the negativity that caused the problem
in the first place; maybe it was the work of God
...

A Game in Which the Rules Keep Changing
The techniques and staging will vary from church to church
...
The use of hypnotic techniques
by religions is sophisticated, and professionals are assuring that they
become even more effective
...
He tells ministers what
they need and how to use it
...
He admits that about 80 percent of his efforts are in the
sound system and lighting
...
However, my participants are fully aware of the process
and what they can expect as a result of their participation
...
To attain them, they must also create a brain-phase
...
The following are the six primary techniques used to generate
the conversion
...
This may be any place: a private home, a
remote or rural setting, or even a hotel ballroom where the participants are
allowed only limited bathroom usage
...
The participants are told that if they don't keep
agreements, their life will never work
...

The participants vow to themselves and their trainer that they will keep
their agreements
...
The next step is to agree to complete training, thus
assuring a high percentage of conversions for the organizations
...
or they are given such short meal breaks that it creates tension
...

The "Sell It By Zealot" Technique
...
They are
intimidated into agreeing to do so before they leave
...
The new converts are zealots
...
Think about the potential
political implications of hundreds of thousands of zealots programmed to
campaign for their guru
...
Followup sessions might be weekly meetings or inexpensive
seminars given on a regular basis which the organization will attempt to
talk you into taking--or any regularly scheduled event used to maintain
control
...

Wearing Down Resistance
Alright
...
A schedule is maintained that causes physical and
mental fatigue
...

Increasing Tension
The third tip-off: techniques used to increase the tension in the room or
environment
...
I could spend hours relating various techniques
to increase tension and generate uncertainty
...
One of the most successful
human-potential seminars forces the participants to stand on a stage in
front of the entire audience while being verbally attacked by the trainers
...
It ranked above window washing outside the 85th floor of an
office building
...
Many faint, but most cope with the stress by mentally going
away
...
And another loop of
the downward spiral into conversion is successfully effected
...
Vicious language is also frequently used, purposely, to make
participants uncomfortable
...
at least
until the participants are converted
...
"
Not Always a Bad Thing
I'm not saying that good does not result from participation in such
gatherings
...
But I contend it is important for people to
know what has happened and to be aware that continual involvement may
not be in their best interest
...
I've had many of those who conduct
trainings and rallies come to me and say, "I'm here because I know that
what I'm doing works, but I don't know why
...

Many of these trainers have become personal friends, and it scares us all to
have experienced the power of one person with a microphone and a room
full of people
...
The sad truth is that a high percentage of
people want to give away their power--they are true "believers"!
Cults: A Captive Course in Stockholm Syndrome
Cult gatherings or human-potential trainings are an ideal environment to
observe first-hand what is technically called the "Stockholm Syndrome
...

But let me inject a word of warning here: If you think you can attend such
gatherings and not be affected, you are probably wrong
...
In her report, she related how the music eventually
induced uncontrollable bodily movement and an altered state of
consciousness
...
Anger or resistance almost always assures
conversion
...
A brain phase
had been induced by the music and excitement, and she awoke feeling
reborn
...
Few
people are capable of such detachment
...
I want to
mention the United States Government and military boot camp
...

Every one of the six conversion techniques are used in boot camp
...
IT IS A fact that the men are effectively
brainwashed
...

Steps in the Decognition Process
Once the initial conversion is effected, cults, armed services, and similar
groups cannot have cynicism among their members
...
This is normally accomplished as
a three-step Decognition Process
...
This can be accomplished in several ways
...
The sugar throws the nervous system off
...
They eat only
vegetables and fruits; without the grounding of grains, nuts, seeds, dairy
products, fish or meat, an individual becomes mentally "spacey
...
Also,
being bombarded with intense and unique experiences achieves the same
result
...
This is accomplished with a
deluge of new information, lectures, discussion groups, encounters or oneto-one processing, which usually amounts to the controller bombarding the
individual with questions
...

Thought Stopping
Step Three is thought stopping: Techniques are used to cause the mind to
go "flat
...
The continued use brings on a feeling of elation and
eventually hallucination
...
The takeover is then complete
...
"
Thought-Stopping Techniques
Marching
There are three primary techniques used for thought stopping
...

Meditation
The second thought stopping technique is meditation
...
You will
remain in a fixed state of alpha for as long as you continue to meditate
...
It may be very beneficial
...
I've worked with
meditators on an EEG machine and the results are conclusive: the more
you meditate, the flatter your mind becomes until, eventually and
especially if used to excess or in combination with decognition, all thought
ceases
...
It is
simply a predictable physiological result
...

Chanting
The third thought-stopping technique is chanting, and often chanting in
meditation
...

All three-stopping techniques produce an altered state of consciousness
...
I personally use at least one selfhypnosis programming
session every day and I know how beneficial it is for me
...


True Believers and Mass Movements
Before ending this section on conversion, I want to talk about the people
who are most susceptible to it and about Mass Movements
...
" They are joiners and followers
...
They look for answers, meaning, and enlightenment outside
themselves
...
They are followers,
not because of a desire for self-advancement, but because it can satisfy
their passion for self-renunciation!" Hoffer also says that true believers
"are eternally incomplete and eternally insecure"!
I know this from my own experience
...

All I can do is attempt to show them that the only thing to seek is the True
Self within
...
I
communicate that the basics of spirituality are self-responsibility and selfactualization
...
Never underestimate the potential danger of these people
...
It is a substitute for their lost faith in themselves and offers them as
a substitute for individual hope
...
All cults are composed of true believers
...
They are the
fanatics in these organizations
...
The followers
want to convert others to their way of living or impose a new way of life--

if necessary, by legislating laws forcing others to their view, as evidenced
by the activities of the Moral Majority
...

A common hatred, enemy, or devil is essential to the success of a mass
movement
...

In revolutions, the devil is usually the ruling power or aristocracy
...

There are mass movements without devils but they seldom attain major
status
...
People don't look for allies when they love,
but they do when they hate or become obsessed with a cause
...

Persuasion Techniques
Persuasion isn't technically brainwashing but it is the manipulation of the
human mind by another individual, without the manipulated party being
aware what caused his opinion shift
...
The left half of
our brain is analytical and rational
...
That is overly simplified but it makes my point
...
Ideally, the persuader generates
an eyes-open altered state of consciousness, causing you to shift from beta
awareness into alpha; this can be measured on an EEG machine
...
Politicians
use these powerful techniques all the time; lawyers use many variations
which, I've been told, they call "tightening the noose
...

First, he might generate what is called a "yes set
...
Next come the truisms
...
Last comes the suggestion
...
Now, if you'll
listen closely to my political speech, you'll find that the first three are the
"yes set," the next three are truisms and the last is the suggestion
...
Well, the
answer to resolving these problems is to elect me, John Jones, to the U
...

Senate
...
But you might also watch for what
are called embedded commands
...
Today's media-oriented
politicians and spellbinders are often carefully trained by a whole new
breed of specialist who are using every trick in the book--both old and
new--to manipulate you into accepting their candidate
...
Yet Neuro-Linguistic training is
readily available to anyone willing to devote the time and pay the price
...
A good friend who recently attended a two-week seminar on
Neuro-Linguistics found that many of those she talked to during the breaks
were government people
...


Practical Examples
Let me give you an example: Assume you are watching a television
commentator make the following statement: Senator Johnson is assisting
local authorities to clear up the stupid mistakes of companies contributing
to the nuclear waste problems
...
That was the
subliminal goal of the statement and the speaker cannot be called to
account for anything
...
The insurance salesman knows his pitch is
likely to be much more effective if he can get you to visualize something

in your mind
...
For instance, he might
pause in his conversation, look slowly around your livingroom and say,
"Can you just imagine this beautiful home burning to the ground?" Of
course you can! It is one of your unconscious fears and, when he forces
you to visualize it, you are more likely to be manipulated into signing his
insurance policy
...
While waiting for a plane, I once watched one operate
for over an hour
...
Initially, his voice was loud then dropped as he made his pitch to
take a book and contribute money to the cause
...
In this case they were shocked by the
strange appearance, sudden materialization and loud voice of the Hare
Krishna devotee
...

In alpha, they were highly suggestible so they responded to the suggestion
of taking the book; the moment they took the book, they felt guilty and
responded to the second suggestion: give money
...
While watching this hustler, I was close
enough to notice that many of the people he stopped exhibited an outward
sign of alpha--their eyes were actually dilated
...

They can be audio, hidden behind music, or visual, airbrushed into a
picture, flashed on a screen so fast that you don't consciously see them, or
cleverly incorporated into a picture or design
...
I

question the efficacy of this technique--if subliminals are not perceptible,
they cannot be effective, and subliminals recorded below the audible
threshold are therefore useless
...
But this technique is patented and,
when I wanted to develop my own line of subliminal audiocassettes,
negotiations with the patent holder proved to be unsatisfactory
...
They
found a way to psycho-acoustically modify and synthesize the suggestions
so that they are projected in the same chord and frequency as the music,
thus giving them the effect of being part of the music
...
In other words, although the suggestions are being
heard by the subconscious mind, they cannot be monitored with even the
most sophisticated equipment
...
And I shudder to think about the
propaganda and commercial manipulation that we are exposed to on a
daily basis
...
It may even be possible to hide a second voice behind the voice to
which you are listening
...
D
...
The big
question about subliminals is: do they work? And I guarantee you they do
...
Supposedly, the only message is instructions to not steal: one East
Coast department store chain reported a 37 percent reduction in thefts in
the first nine months of testing
...
The lengthy report ends
with the statement, "these findings support the use of subliminal
approaches such as taped suggestions for weight loss and the therapeutic
use of hypnosis and Neuro-Linguistic Programming
...
I have personally experienced sitting in a Los Angeles
auditorium with over ten thousand people who were gathered to listen to a
current charismatic figure
...
Those
accompanying me experienced the same thing
...

By careful observation, what appeared to be spontaneous demonstrations
were, in fact, artful manipulations
...

That particular vibration generates alpha, which would render the audience
highly susceptible
...
"
Vibrato
This leads to the mention of vibrato
...
At one
period of English history, singers whose voices contained pronounced

vibrato were not allowed to perform publicly because listeners would go
into an altered state and have fantasies, often sexual in nature
...

Extra-low Frequency Vibrations (ELFs)
Now, let's carry this awareness a little farther
...
These are electromagnetic in nature
...

Dr
...
S
...
Volunteers
were wired so their brain waves could be measured on an EEG
...

Puharich then beamed ELF waves at the volunteers
...
Those inside couldn't
know if the signal was or was not being sent
...

When I say "taken over," I mean that their behavior followed the changes
anticipated at very precise frequencies
...
At 8
...
an elevated feeling, as
though they had been in masterful meditation, learned over a period of
years
...
3 cycles induced waves of depressed agitation leading
to riotous behavior
...
Patrick Flanagan is a personal friend of mine
...
Among his many inventions was a device he called the

Neurophone--an electronic instrument that can successfully programm
suggestions directly through contact with the skin
...

When he did, the National Security Agency confiscated the neurophone
...

In using the device, you don't hear or see a thing; it is applied to the skin,
which Pat claims is the source of special senses
...

In one of his recent tests, Pat conducted two identical seminars for a
military audience—one seminar one night and one the next night, because
the size of the room was not large enough to accommodate all of them at
one time
...
The tape instructed the audience to be extremely warm
and responsive and for their hands to become "tingly
...
There were no speakers, so no sound could be
heard, yet the message was successfully transmitted from that wire directly
into the brains of the audience
...

Technological Tools for Mass Manipulation
The more we find out about how human beings work through today's
highly advanced technological research, the more we learn to control
human beings
...
The television set in your livingroom and
bedroom is doing a lot more than just entertaining you
...
When you go into an altered state, you transfer into right

brain, which results in the internal release of the body's own opiates:
enkephalins and Beta-endorphins, chemically almost identical to opium
...
and you want to come back for more
...
Put more simply, the viewers were in an altered
state
...
They were getting their Betaendorphin
"fix
...
Although the
children were told to concentrate, only a few could keep the set on for
more than 30 seconds!
Most viewers are already hypnotized
...
One
simple way is to place a blank, black frame every 32 frames in the film that
is being projected
...

The commercials or suggestions presented following this alpha-inducing
broadcast are much more likely to be accepted by the viewer
...

The medium for takeover is here
...


It obviously isn't getting better
...
A research project by Jacob
Jacoby, a Purdue University psychologist, found that of 2,700 people
tested, 90 percent misunderstood even such simple viewing fare as
commercials and "Barnaby Jones
...
Of course they did--they were going in and out of trance! If
you go into a deep trance, you must be instructed to remember--otherwise
you automatically forget
...

I have just touched the tip of the iceberg
...
you have extremely effective brainwashing
...
And, in case you thought there was a law against any of these
things, guess again
...
Maybe they have plans
for
...
With many years of
experience & Expert Training, Rob has been taught amongst others by
"The Man that taught Paul McKenna" Hypnotherapy - Mr Andrew
Newton & Dr Jonathan Royle PhD
...
" says Dr Lisa Smith, General Practitioner – UK
...
He has Diplomas & Certificates in many areas of
Hypnotherapy & NLP including a Non Accredited Doctor of Philosophy in
Hypnotherapy & Advanced Master Practitioner Certificate in NLP
...
Charles, Illinois,
USA
...

Rob is also a Trainer & teaches various courses at his training venue in
Newport South Wales
...

Rob continues to help clients worldwide & is available for Consultations
Globally either in person or online
...
com
Tel: International 44 7970 625 343 / UK 07970 625 343
Websites:
www
...
com www
...
net
www
...
com www
...
com www
...
org
www
...
com
Training Courses & Products:
https://www
...
com/pages/Advanced-HypnotherapyTraining/542475612452617
Facebook: www
...
com/robert
...
phoenix69
ooVoo: robertphoenix
Join My Contact List & receive a complementary FREE Gift!

For your FREE gift simply Email me with the Heading - “I
WOULD LIKE TO CLAIM MY HYPNOSIS FREE GIFT”
To HarleyStreet@London
...

Smoking & weight loss are the 2 key areas you need to ensure you are a
success because every success in these 2 areas becomes a walking advert
for you
...
Non-smokers or clients that lose weight with your
help will tell many others & be a fantastic visual reminder to all those that
they come into contact with
...


Most successful Smoking Cessation Hypnotherapists claim to have a 90%
- 95% success rate but incorporating what I am about to share with you this
could rise to 98% - 99%
...
There is NO addiction to cigarettes & tobacco
...

If you would like near to 100% success with clients that see you for
stopping smoking then use your time in the pre-talk to change the clients
perception of smoking addiction and reinforce that what they have is a
simple habit that is about to be broken
...

I will try to have 2 different chairs or a chair & a couch in my therapy
room
...

I also ensure there is a reasonable level of mood lighting during the pretalk & then lower the lighting level as we begin Hypnosis
...

In the pre-talk with my clients I ask all the standard questions such as “is it
your decision to quit today?”, “Do you have reasons to stop smoking
today?”, “Tell me about those reasons” [Which re-enforces why they want
to quit]
...
I am
nodding my head & looking understanding, leaning slightly forwards &
subtly following their body language patterns
...
I ooze confidence & belief in my abilities and the ability of
the client to quit
...
On the occasion the client says they just have a
habit I tell them that they are right as there is no such thing as addiction
...
Some will say that when they wake up
for some other reason they may smoke
...
They may be stressed &
simply can’t sleep or get up to go to the bathroom in the night
...

The client is then asked a question that makes them immediately question
whether there is any addiction to cigarettes & tobacco:
“Don’t

you think that if you did have a chemical dependency you
would have to wake up through the night – but you don’t
...

I then immediately embed the suggestion to the client that “It’s JUST a
habit
...
It is when we do these things that we reach for a cigarette &
smoke
...
This is why some people wake up one day & just decide to quit – If
there was addiction this would not be possible
...
”
I then ask the client “Does this make sense?”
They always say yes!
Unless your client has a low IQ they will arrive at the conclusion that what
you are saying is logical & makes total sense
...

I then share the following with clients to make them aware of the power of
conditioning which in turn reinforces even deeper the suggestion that
smoking is not addictive:

The power of Conditioning
Conditioning is a very powerful tool - The mind cannot tell the difference

between something that we imagine & something that is real so how we
think & what we think plays a vital part in our belief systems especially
when we think about how difficult or how easy something might be to do
such as stop smoking
...
Before he
broke the record it was categorically stated that no human could ever run
that fast
...
Athletes were conditioned that it could not be broken & a
psychological barrier created
...

The psychological barrier that had been created was no longer there
...
These days with all the challenges on the
railways any one that uses the trains probably wishes they did travel faster
than 25mph… ;)

Case number 3 – Christopher Columbus
I’m quite certain that when Mr Columbus was setting sail to find new

lands & treasure “Watch out for that edge!” could be heard from people
around the dockside
...

Case number 4 - The Circus Elephant
Many, many years ago when a baby elephant was introduced to the life of
the circus, to stop it from escaping a very small peg was knocked into the
ground & a thin piece of rope attached to one leg of the baby elephant
...
After a while
the baby elephant would come to the conclusion that he/she could not
escape & subsequently stopped trying
...
This was because
the elephant believed that it was not strong enough to snap the thin rope or
pull the little peg out of the ground
...
]
I then ask the client the following:
“Question

- Who has the most to gain from the conditioning that
smokers have been subjected to over the years?”
They may say the Tobacco Companies or may not know but whatever they
say I share the following story with them…
“The

following is a little story I have pondered over for quite a few

years…
If I owned a tobacco company & one day reports began to surface that
smoking could be harmful to health I would probably panic that all my
customers would quit
...
They in turn
would repeat these suggestions to the public
...

Thus the myth populates & grows – Quit Smoking programmes are created
around this myth that smokers need help to quit their addiction & help to
suppress their cravings
...

But we have already established that you are not addicted to cigarettes

& tobacco so what could it be that you may have physically experienced if
you have tried to quit in the past?
It is simply a DETOX PROCESS! Your body is clearing out all the toxins
& poisons it has accumulated
...

Withdrawal & cold turkey & cravings on the other hand feels like
preparing to climb Mount Everest in the middle of winter in just a pair of
shorts!
If you need an injection one nurse may say to you “Sorry but this is going
to hurt!” And as she sticks the needle in it really does hurt! Another nurse
may use a different approach
...

As we are conditioned so becomes our reality - As I mentioned earlier the
mind cannot tell the difference between something you imagine &
something that is real so your conditioning really does become your reality
...

This is the reason how some smokers after many years of smoking one day
simply wake up & decide to never smoke again
...

If smoking was addictive in any way, shape or form this really would
never be possible
...

Quitting smoking is that slight scratch, it’s that walk in the park on a
summers day
...

But this is not the case
...

Does this all make sense to you & is there anything about what we have
discussed that you would like to ask me about?”
Answer any questions the client has
...

Finally before moving on to asking what the client knows about
hypnotherapy I tell them:
“Give

away or destroy all of your cigarettes & tobacco, bin your ash trays,
do not use any nicotine replacement products instead destroy or hand them
to someone & simply walk away from this disgusting habit and never
smoke again!”
The job of convincing the client that addiction was a myth is now
complete
...

The information enclosed in this chapter must not be taught or included in
any other training or teaching material whether written, audio / verbal or
video without the prior consent of the author
...


COMPLETE MIND THERAPY (CMT)
By Dr
...

Now the reason I say “initial” education is because you will learn far more
from the university of life and through the medium of hands on practical
experience than any training course could ever teach you
...
Indeed at the rear
of this, the final manual you will find a recommended reading list which
you are advised to follow in order to further your studies as you also put
the contents of this course to use and therefore start to earn as you learn
...

Prior to teaching you the concept and operation of a Complete Mind
Therapy session, I would urge you to consider the very true fact that
personal hands on training with an experienced expert of their craft is by
far the easiest and most effective way of learning a new skill and hypnosis
is no exception
...

Those of you seriously wishing to pursue a career in stage hypnosis and/or
hypnotherapy are without doubt advised that eight hours in my company
(from 10am until 6pm) on the day of your choice would not only be the
learning experience of a lifetime but would also be an excellent chance to
ask me any questions you may have
...


Read, study and absorb all 12 CMT course manuals

2
...


Listen to, study and absorb all 12 CMT audio instruction tapes

4
...


Upon receiving your successful exam results your diplomas are
issued

6
...


You are also granted membership to The Professional Organisation of
Stage Hypnotists

8
...


At this point, when you can afford the fee of £97, you are advised to

order your personal copy of The Hypnotist Bible by Delavar, which
in itself is a complete advanced training course in both stage
hypnosis, hypnotherapy and related subjects, written by the man who
taught me, your teacher, amongst many others, including a certain top
television hypnotist
10
...


When you have saved sufficient funds, eight hours of personal one to
one training in my company, at the rates shown in the rear of the
course prospectus, would be an excellent investment

12
...

And don’t forget that at all times our unique video support service as
described in the prospectus is available, along with our full customer
support service, which is but a letter, phonecall or fax away
...

All correspondence can be sent to: The Mindcare Organisation UK, c/o
Prospect House Publishing, Prospect House, P
...
Box 12, Huddersfield,
England, HD8 9YP
...


We look forward to receiving videos of your shows and details of your
success with therapy clients and with your permission would like to make
these examples available to your fellow colleagues and course students
...
As I do, please bear in mind that whilst the printed content of this
course may seem to have been heavily dominated with Stage Hypnotism
training, in fact, each and every method, ploy and technique you have
learned throughout this course is of use both on stage and within a
therapeutic context
...

What follows is the structure of a one hour complete mind therapy session,
which when followed in this order will produce excellent results at all
times
...

THE COMPLETE MIND THERAPY SESSION STRUCTURE
1

Advertise to obtain your clients

2

Client shows up for session

3

Get the relevant fee off them now

4

Obtain rapport over a cup of tea

5

Obtain total belief and expectancy by your professional office
and personal appearance

6

Ask the client to answer all pre – session questions

7

Do follow your thumb with your eyes, suggestibility test and
anchor the cure to successful completion of this test

8

Induce trance via physical relaxation method and then counting
backwards from 300 method

9

Deepen trance via staircase of relaxation

10

Deepen further by image of bed/sleep

11

Deepen further by dream/blackboard method

12

Ego strengthening therapy

13

The Necessary therapy
A
...


Ruler to 100% confidence

C
...


Ruler to 100% self image/esteem

E
...


T
...


Mirror stare to instil new feelings and behaviour as reality

H
...


Pain and pleasure suggestions

J
...
The structure is such that we have
combined together the most effective elements of counselling skills,
psychotherapy, suggestion therapy, aversion therapy, creative visualisation,
noesitherapy, sports psychology and in fact all 14 areas which this course
teaches are combined with an emphasis on neuro linguistic programming
or as it is sometimes called neuro associative conditioning (N
...
C
...
If they do need some back up therapy later, they can then
of course just listen to the audio tape which you have given them
...


ADVERTISE TO GET CLIENTS
Advertising has been touched on before but here is some further advice
...

Upon passing the exam which leads to you receiving your diplomas for
this course, you are advised to obtain a black and white matt finish
photograph of yourself, apparently hypnotising someone in the usual
cliched stage hypnotist manner
...

Whilst now being the ONLY Complete Mind Therapist in your local area
able to help people with all their habits, fears, phobias, emotional
problems, pain control and other areas
...
This approach can also be used
with local and regional radio and TV stations, leading to feature interviews
on their news and entertainment shows, which costs you nothing and leads
to more clients
...
Talk shows such as Kilroy, Vanessa, This
Morning and many others are always looking for interesting guests and
subjects to feature and this may as well be you
...
Whilst those on a national level will
always involve all your out of pocket and travel expenses being paid,
along with an appearance and/or interview fee being paid to you also
...
Doing
these FREE lecture demonstrations costs you nothing and will usually lead
to many sales of your audio hypnotherapy tapes on the night and also to
bookings for your sessions in person
...

Handing your business card to each and every person you meet by way of
introduction will rapidly get your name circulated around the community
and ultimately lead to many bookings
...

Other low cost and effective ways to obtain clients, include having some
A5 size leaflets advertising your services printed, then visit all your local
libraries and place a folded up leaflet into each and every book on the
shelves of the self help, psychology and health sections
...

A classified advert in your local and regional papers, whilst being very
cheap to run, can generate 100’s of clients, especially if the advert is

worded as follows:
FREE HYPNOTHERAPY AND PSYCHOTHERAPY, AVAILABLE
FROM ESTABLISHED PROFESSIONAL MIND THERAPIST
...
SINCERE HELP FOR ALL
PROBLEMS
...
As the advert offers the reader a free session, you
will get loads of calls and when the potential client calls you explain that
most therapists take around three sessions to treat people at an average of
£40 per session, which would cost them around £120 at least
...
On
top of this instant saving, you’ll give them the session FREE of charge,
just so long as they purchase the back up audio “Hypnotheratape” for the
special price of just £39
...
This means you end up getting just 5p less
than the normal cost of your sessions anyway and most all callers will
book, as they think they are saving lots of money, getting something for
FREE and getting a discount on the back up tape
...
Believe me,
this classified advert offering FREE sessions will generate you your
income of a substantial nature on a weekly basis
...
As mentioned before, in the long term, it’s worth having a display
advert in your local areas Yellow Pages
...
These are, to have a photo of
yourself upon the advert as it adds a personal human touch, mention upon
the advert your Professional Association memberships, state that you offer
FREE Complete Mind Therapy sessions for ALL problems and offer them
a FREEPHONE number to call you on
...
The final
thing to improve your advert response, is to name you business something

such as, ABC Hypnotherapy, so that your business appears at the top of the
alphabetical list and so is seen first
...

It’s also worth writing to your regional head office of both B
...
P
...
and
your areas N
...
S area healthcare authority, requesting that you are granted
a B
...
P
...
and N
...
S
...
They will send you
all necessary forms and there is no charge to obtain your provider numbers,
which once obtained and listed on all promotional materials, helps to
attract more clients, as B
...
P
...
Also doctors will know they
can refer people to you on the N
...
S
...
H
...
provider
number
...

A little common sense will reveal numerous other no cost or low cost
advertising methods, which do lead to 100’s of clients
...

· Place cards on newsagents notice boards all over your local area, again
using the FREE ploy
...

· Leaflets sent to travel agents, offering cure your fear of flying sessions,
with a cover letter pointing out that any clients they obtain for you will

cure their fear and so will want to go on a holiday which involves
flying, which means the holiday will cost more and so as the travel
agent, they will get more commission on the deal which means by being
your unpaid salesman they are increasing their own profits
...
But with a little imagination and common sense, 100’s of other
ways of obtaining clients at little, or no cost to yourself will present
themselves to you, if you think along the lines I’ve already illustrated
...
One last point is, that
by contacting you in the first place, the client has admitted to themselves
they have a problem and so are now making a commitment to change
things for the better and so they are already 95% of the way to a solution
and just need a trigger to success and that is where we therapists come in
...
This combined with the large
element of the placebo effect coming into play, as quite simply if they
book a session with you, they obviously believe you can help them and
expect it to work, or why else would they contact you? Upon taking the
booking off the client, take their name, address and telephone number and
inform them that if they have to cancel, for any reason, they must give you
at least 24 hours notice, or else the full fee will be payable anyway, just
like going to the dentist
...
Should
they not show up for the session, send them an invoice on a letterhead,
headed “Litigation Department”, demanding the £39
...

CLIENT SHOWS UP FOR SESSION

AND
GET THE RELEVANT FEE OFF THEM
AND
OBTAIN RAPPORT OVER A CUP OF TEA
AND
OBTAIN 100% TOTAL BELIEF/EXPECTANCY
Having booked their session, the client showing up is an important point in
their treatment, as they have then made a real commitment to solve their
problem
...
They see you dressed smartly and
professionally which compounds their belief and expectancy levels in your
ability to cure them
...
95, please, as none of us like talking about
money and by getting it all out of the way now, it means we can then
concentrate on what’s most important today, which is YOU and us solving
your problem today
...
You see, when the client
parts with the money, it’s really serious commitment to their own success
and concrete’s their belief and expectancy levels to a height such that
success is 100% guaranteed, as they must believe you can help them and
they must expect the treatment to work as why else would they either
contact you, book a session, show up and/or pay the fee up front, unless
they expect to get the end result of being cured
...

The diplomas they see hanging on your office wall, together with the book
shelf of impressive looking psychology books, all compound the belief and
expectancy thing even further
...
Your diplomas are
displayed, framed upon the wall and you have 2 tape recorders, one of
which is positioned behind the clients chair will play the relaxation music
for the session later, whilst at the same time, the one upon your desk, to
which is connected a microphone, records the entire session from the point
of asking the client to close their eyes and starting the induction, until
having awoken the client, which should be 45 minutes maximum, so one
side of a 90 minute tape will be sufficient and as your voice and
background music are picked up by the microphone the end result is a tape
which bears your voice over the top of the relaxation music which will be
highly effective when listened to
...
The answers given will help you carry out the session
with the greatest of success for the reasons detailed after each listed
question that follows
...
It also means that
as you feed the personal information they have given to us by the questions
asked back to them as part of the therapy as it is personal to them and they
can relate to it so well this explains why the concept of Complete Mind
Therapy is so successful
...

3)

You telephone number?

Again just for reference as in question 2
4)

Your date of birth?

By knowing this, we can work out the clients age
...

5)

What’s their problem?

Obviously asked so we know what we’re treating
6)

How long have you had this problem?

Using this piece of information and the clients D
...
B
...

8)

What do you feel I need to do for you today to permanently cure
this problem?

Again the answer they give, however daft, will when acted upon, provide
the ideal way to cure the patient
...
So by doing XYZ they will be cured, as this is what they have
convinced themselves needs to be done for a cure to be achieved
...
They could
just as easily say that by stopping smoking today they wish to become
healthier and be able to go swimming again like they used to
...

10) What was the best experience of you entire life, a time you felt
confident, proud, loved and on top of the world?
Their answer is later used for the finger and thumb good times feeling
connection technique
...
and linking it to the thought
that any continuance of past actions will make them feel just as bad as they
did then whereas avoidance of past actions makes them feel as good as, if
not better as their reply to question 10
12) Who’s the one person you love most in the entire world?
By getting the persons name, you can refer to them directly during the
pain/pleasure section of the therapy by way of having the client imagine

how upsetting it would be to this named person they love so much if they
were to have continued smoking and killing themselves
...
As the client loves this
person so much there will be strong emotional connection with any
thoughts about this person and needless to say the client will wish to avoid
upsetting them at all costs and because of the scenario just given to them,
the only way to avoid upsetting them as far as their subconscious mind is
concerned is by ending their habit/problem etc
...

13) Are you on any medication for this problem?
Here, a copy of the medical reference book PIMMS is useful, as you can
look up the drugs name, revealing exactly what the drug is prescribed for,
what its side effects are and indeed, by having prescribed it, what the
clients medical GP seems to think the real problem is, which may not
always be the same as that being presented to us by the client and so we
can ensure our therapy targets the correct problem as well as the clients
perceived problem if necessary
...

Hence it’s called Complete Mind Therapy
...

Then you get the client to sign and date the bottom of the questionnaire
below a printed statement, which says:
I (THEIR NAME HERE) OF (THEIR ADDRESS) DO HEREBY
DECLARE I AM OVER 18 YEARS OF AGE AND CONSENT TO
(YOUR NAME) TREATING ME WITH HYPNOSIS AND COMPLETE
MIND THERAPY
...
Where wishing to
treat children and/or those under the age of 18 you must have their parent
sign a statement saying:
I (THEIR NAME) OF (THEIR ADDRESS) DO HEREBY DECLARE I
AM THE LEGAL PARENT/GARDIAN OF (CLIENTS NAME) AND DO
HEREBY GIVE MY CONSENT FOR (YOUR NAME) TO TREAT
THEM WITH HYPNOSIS AND COMPLETE MIND THERAPY
...


DO FOLLOW YOUR THUMB WITH EYES TEST AND ANCHOR
THE CURE TO SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION
Here, you get the client to stand upright, feet together, left arm down by
their side, right arm stretched out in front of them and right hand clenched
into a fist, with their right thumb stuck up directly into the air
...
They are told to stare at

their thumb at all times, whilst doing this and indeed should tell you when
they have reached the point where it becomes uncomfortable to move any
further
...
The client is then told to resume their original position and then
told to close their eyes and keep their arm exactly where it is until you say
otherwise
...
However,
as anything is possible in their imagination, you want them to imagine
being able to move considerably further than before, both without
discomfort and with the greatest of ease and they are told to tell you when
they have gone further in their minds eye than they previously did in
reality
...
Now, (their name), believe it or
not, if you’ve used your powers of intelligence, imagination and
concentration effectively, then for you this will have become 100% total
reality
...
”
You then count to 3, they repeat it again for real and I guarantee you that
without fail, the client will be able to move considerably further this time
than they did the first time around and as they see with their own eyes,
their thoughts of but a few seconds ago become a physical reality, so they
come to believe as 100% total reality that the treatment you are about to
give them will work and so they are now 99% of the way to solving their
problem
...
, etc
...
You explain to the client
that you will mention areas of their body and that upon doing so, you want
them to physically tense up all the muscle groups in that body area, whilst
at the same time in their minds eye, imagining 2 pieces of rope tied
together in knots and that these knots represent the stresses, tensions, fears,
and upsets of days and weeks gone by, which are stored in the muscle
groups they are physically tensing
...
As they instantly untie, so as they become separate pieces of
rope, so in reality all muscles in their body becoming so limp, so loose, so
relaxed, so heavy and so tired
...
Then you proceed to do as just stated for the following
muscle groups in this order:
A

The feet and ankles

B

Lower leg area and knees

C

Upper leg area and hips

D

Stomach and abdomen

E

Chest area

F

The back and spine

G

Finger tips to wrists

H

Every muscle from wrist to elbows to shoulders

I

The shoulders and shoulder blades

J

The neck area

K

The jaw and cheek muscles

L

The eyelids and forehead

When you’ve gone through this list and the client, who is listening both to
your voice and the background music, has physically tensed up and then
physically relaxed all these muscle groups from head to toe, they will, I
assure you, feel genuinely relaxed in a physical way, especially as your
office will be nice and warm and the room will be dimly lit by only your
desk lamp at this point
...
As you go through the 12 point list of muscle groups,
you can link from one group to the next with a phrase such as, “with every
breath you take, every noise you hear and every word I say, you relax even
more
...
” This, along with the “standard
phrases” as detailed in the induction’s chapter earlier in this course, both
help to link nicely from one muscle group to the next and also help to
deepen both the physical and psychological levels of the clients relaxation
...
Having
gone through their entire body’s muscle groups, you then immediately ask
them to start counting backwards from 300 in their minds eye, as you
continue to suggest things to them and then link into the induction method
as explained in the verbal psychology section, being that of a “subliminal”
nature
...
The client being told that as you count backwards from 10
down to 1, so in their minds eye they will take another step down the
staircase they can now see and as this is a staircase of relaxation, they will
sink 100 times deeper with each step down they take
...


DEEPEN FURTHER BY IMAGE OF BED
Upon reaching the count of 1 with the staircase deepening, it is suggested
to the client that at the bottom of the staircase is a beautifully relaxing and
comfortable bed into which they are to climb, snuggle up and go fast to
sleep, allowing their mind to wander free, allowing your voice to become
but a distant sound as they go deeper and deeper to sleep
...
However, in order that the
work we do together today will be 100% successful in every way, we need
your subconscious mind to take you to a level of deep satisfying
relaxation, of both mind and body, which will be right for you
...
So I’d like you to…
...
They are told that in dreamland, when the blackboard is
blank they are instantly taken to a depth of relaxation where they can
achieve anything and then they are told to imagine rubbing their name out
from the blackboard, so that each chalk letter, one by one, is rubbed out
and as each letter disappears, so their level of relaxation doubles in every
way, until they rub out the last letter
...


EGO STRENGTHENING THERAPY
This is where, as detailed in an earlier section of the course, we praise the
clients ego, make them feel good about the work you are about to do
together and make them believe they are such a wonderful client, with
such good powers of intelligence, imagination and concentration, that their
success in achieving their goals and aims is 100% assured
...
(See answers to 16 pre-session questions)
...
As they continue to push their
finger and thumb firmly together, they are to notice how confident they
feel at that past time, they are to notice how calm and relaxed they feel,
how full of will power and ability to achieve anything they are and how, in
fact, life seemed so wonderful at the time
...
You then tell them that
any time from this moment forward, when they feel a little unsure about
continuing in their new life as (opposite of what their problem was) they
just need to press their finger and thumb together to make the ring of
confidence
...
This incidentally, is called anchoring, as
we have “anchored” a thought to a physical action

B

RULER TO 100% CONFIDENCE

C

RULER TO 100% WILLPOWER

D

RULER TO 100% SELF IMAGE/ESTEEM

E

RULER TO 100% RELEVANT TO PROBLEM

The ruler technique is to have the client imagine a ruler in their minds eye
and that upon this are the numbers from 1 to 100%
...
It
is if you like a measuring stick of confidence or of willpower or of self
esteem, or whichever is relevant at the time
...
When they have answered with a percentage, we tell them that they
need to be at 100% to achieve their aim with 100% success
...
You then have them imagine taking a hammer and a
nail and hammering the nail through the mercury mark at 100% and
through the measuring stick, so that their confidence levels are now
permanently locked in place at 100% and can never again fall below this
level
...
Finally the
ruler which, using your common sense, you make 100% relevant to each
client’s particular problem
...
Don’t forget that the more bizarre a mental image is, the more
effectively it will be acted upon
...

F

TV SET GET RID OF PAST VISUALISATION

Here, we get the client to imagine watching a TV set in their minds eye,
upon which they are watching themselves as they once were
...
So first, they
are to imagine turning the colour down so low that they can no longer see
the picture of themselves as they once were
...

Now that they can neither see nor hear how they once were, they are to
turn the TV set off and once switched off, they are to unplug it from the
wall, so it can no longer be fed any power to survive as it once was and
lastly as they can no longer see, hear or be as they once were, they are to
destroy the TV set in their minds eye, by blowing it up with a huge bomb
...


G MIRROR STARE TO INSTIL NEW FEELINGS/FUTURE AS
REALITY
Having got rid of the past, we now need to instil the future and the clients
new reality
...
They are to notice how good they feel within themselves, they
are to notice how proud they are feeling as they have now achieved their
goal and ambition
...
They are then to imagine turning a key in the
frame of the mirror, which freezes the reflection in place forever and just
so long as this image remains frozen in place so they will continue to be a

(here what the aim is)
...
Examples of direct suggestions are
contained within the script outlines given within the advanced
hypnotherapy chapter
...

Whereas clients who wish to do something they don’t currently do, must
be told they have started to do it, with the greatest of ease
...
So that by so doing, their behaviour is reversed to that they
desire and because the cause of the problem which is the pain and pleasure
circuit in their mind relevant to their problem has been reversed
...
Thus
getting the same end results within one 1 hour session
...

The 3 steps of pain/pleasure therapy are
1

Get the client to imagine how they were when they had the problem
and in their mind connect this to the most awful experience of their
life, in order that it becomes painful for the client to think about or
continue being as they once were, because it now has painful

associations with this awful real life event of the past
...
)
2

Get the client to imagine how they are now, without the problems of
the past and in their mind get them to connect this with the most
pleasurable experience of their entire life, so it becomes pleasurable
to continue with their new behaviour pattern
...


3

Have them think of the person they said they loved most and use the
example I gave earlier, of how if they had continued with their
problem, they would have ended up dead and/or pushing this loved
one away
...


J

REPEAT DIRECT SUGGESTIONS

Prior to implanting post hypnotic suggestion the direct suggestions are
repeated to the client once more
...
Also they will find
that each and every time they listen to the audio tape you will give them, it
will be just as, if not more effective, than if you were with them in the
room in person at the time of listening to it
...

On 2 – from this moment forward you will continue with you new
desirable lifestyle as an automatic reflex action as 100% total reality
...

As on 5 – every day in every way, things are getting better and better
...

As on 7 – almost as though each and every muscle group in your body is
being filled with energy, vitality, confidence and optimism
...

As on 9 – lighter and brighter, coming on up out of it
...

GIVE THEM TAPE ETC
...
In other words, the day after the
session they don’t, the next day they do and then it’s do a day and miss a
day for the next 28 days, as it takes 28 days for new habits to be formed
and concreted into the human mind
...
they will listen to it as instructed and B
...

SAY GOODBYE TO THEM
It’s then time to say goodbye to them and await arrival of next client
...

FOR;
*Habits, emotional problems, general nervous complaints etc
...

*Fears and Phobias

Here, instead of using direct suggestions twice, the first time you get the
client to imagine what they used to be scared of and then you have them
make it an object of ridicule
...
The more ridiculous and bizarre the mental
image is that you get them to imagine in order to make the original fear
trigger an object of ridicule, by far the more powerful it will be
...

The rest of the session remains the same
...
For example, mentally we
would take a football player through the full match in a matter of a few
minutes and as we did, we would have him imagine as reality scoring more
goals than ever before
...
This
works and to illustrate, think of Roger Bannister, who first ran the four
minute mile, until then no one had got close, but Roger believed he could
do it and so he made it his reality and guess what? Once other athletes had
seen Roger achieve something they once believed to be impossible, they
knew it could be done and within days of Roger having done it athletes the
world over found themselves able to run the four minute mile
...

*Pain control
Again the only change is that instead of direct suggestion, you instead run
through instilling the saliva leads to no pain trigger as detailed in the

Noesitherapy chapter
...

*Illness and disease
Instead of direct suggestion number one, the client is told to visualise a
rabbit in their minds eye in a field filled with 1000’s of carrots
...

They are to imagine the rabbit is so hungry and never loses his appetite and
he is rapidly eating up all the carrots, one by one and with each carrot the
rabbit eats, so in turn as 100% total reality, the cancer, AIDS virus or
whatever, is growing weaker and so in turn they are becoming healthier
and healthier
...
Then
they must imagine connecting a hose to a tap and aiming it at the fire so to
keep it cool
...
Or you can the
Noesitherapy fight/flight saliva method
...

*Allergies
Instead of direct suggestion on two occasions, the first time get your client
to visualise a Perspex screen across the room and see a clone of themselves
becoming “one”
...


2

The subconscious is abstract and is best reprogrammed through
images and not just words
...


4

Using their name helps a lot
...


6

The CMT session combines all the major areas of hypno/psycho
related subjects
...


Well, there you have it
...

Congratulations in getting to the end and may you have all the luck in the
world with your new venture
...
We will do the rest
...

Unless otherwise stated, all books on the following recommended reading
list are available mail order from:
The A
...
Book Co
...

Crown Buildings
Bancyfelin
Carmarthen
Dyfed
SA33 5ND
Tel
...
01379 676000
OR
Via most specialist bookstores
...
99
Hypnotherapy
Hypnotherapy by Dave Elman £23
...
50
Trance Formations by Richard Bandler and John Grinder £9
...
Zaro and others £13
...
95
Hypnotherapy Explained by David Lesser £10
...
95
Reframing (Bandler and Grinder) £9
...
00
Using Your Brain for a Change (R
...
99
Past Life Regression

Other Lives, Other Selves by Roger J
...
50
Cashing in on Past Life Regression by Richard Webster £29
...
95
Unlimited Power by Anthony Robbins £9
...
50 inc p&p
...
L
...
95
Noesitherapy
The Simple Secrets to the Power to Heal by John Howard £12
...
George’s Avenue, Northampton, NN2 6JA
Tel
...
99
Paul McKenna’s Hypnotic Secrets £8
...
99
The Magic of Mind Power by Duncan McColl £10
...
P
...
O
...
95
Magic Books by Post, 29 Hill Avenue, Bedminster, Bristol, BS1
...

04) Deepen further using get into bed and go to sleep visualization, again
detailed in chapter 21
...

06) Say the “Post Hypnotic” again of “AND JUST SLEEP NOW”
Then its time for step 07) – Ego strengthening Therapy:
As you relax more completely with every breath that you take, every noise
that you hear, every word that I say and every second that passes by, You
are now so deeply relaxed, so deeply asleep, that whatever I tell you to do,
you WILL do for your own good
...
Because from this moment forward I am
talking directly to your subconscious mind and as you relax more deeply
with each word I say and every thought that you think, so in turn every
suggestion that I give you, WILL for your own good become 100% Total
Reality
...
In fact your subconscious mind
WILL NOT allow you to break a promise to yourself, you can have 100%
faith that your subconscious mind will enable you to achieve everything
that I am suggesting to you with the greatest of ease
...
In fact you will find that something
you once thought may be so difficult to achieve will now become so
ridiculously easy, as you realize that from this moment forward, you can
equal the greatest achievements of life’s greatest achievers and that for
you, your innermost dreams can and have now become your 100% total
reality
...
You will notice that every
day in every way you find it so much easier to deal with events and
situations, which once would have bothered you greatly
...
Nothing bothers you as it once did and in fact you now
realize that just as all of the stresses, tensions, Worries, fears and
apprehensions of days, weeks, months and years gone by are leaving your
body and leaving your mind NOW! So you realize also that every day in
every way your life is getting better and better, your approach and attitude
to life is getting more relaxed, more positive and more constructive and in
turn your approach, attitude and response to other people, especially those

you care for, those you respect and those close to you, WILL BECOME far
more positive, far more relaxed and far more friendly and appreciative in
every way, shape and form
...
So from this moment forward as
an automatic reflex action you will find that you will send out positive,
peaceful, constructive and loving thoughts, actions and words to all those
around you and in turn these things will positively and beneficially be
reflected back to you tenfold with each second that passes by
...
Realizing now that just as you can and WILL now equal the
greatest achievements of life’s greatest achievers, so in turn you now
realize that no one person ever did it all alone and so from this moment
forward you will eagerly, happily and positively encourage those around
you to help in your aims, actions & desires
...
Just as you yourself are a wonderful, valuable and worthy person so
you now WILL realize from this moment forward, that the opinions of
others, especially those of people you respect, people you love and those
close to you are worth listening and responding to in a positive manner,
just as your opinions and thoughts WILL NOW BECOME and will remain
equally Honest, positive, constructive and worthwhile as all the stresses,
tensions, worries, fears and apprehensions of every day situations which
once would have bothered you have now become and will continue to be
but distant memories and things of the past, as from this moment forward
you will awaken each morning with an inner warm glow of confidence, a
renewed optimism to life, a more positive attitude to get things done and
every day in every way you will now realize that you have within you a
large inner reservoir of willpower, self-confidence, self-esteem and
patience which you can and you will draw upon as a 100% Total Reality
automatic reflex action whenever you find yourself in a situation which
once would have bothered you
...
You no
longer need, want, crave or desire to waste a single moment of your now
positively Happy, Healthy, Calm and relaxed lifestyle, instead you now
wish to and as a result WILL savor every moment, you now notice more
closely how enjoyable it is to be in the company of friends, those you
respect, Loved ones and others close to you
...
Your greatest achievement in life now being that you have
now become one of those rare few, but very talented and perceptive people
who is able to admit their own faults and by so doing grow stronger and
happier as an individual and as part of a Loving partnership, in short from
this moment forward to you the Past is the Past and what you now find is
most important to you is The Future, your positive, happy, healthy,
confident, relaxed Future made even more enjoyable, positive and
beneficial by those around you who are friends, those who Love you, those
who respect you and those who care about you which in turn you will
reflect back to them as you continue now to live your life like a mirror and
reflect to others the way you wish to be Loved for, Cared for, Respected
and assisted in your every day life, which from this moment forward is that
of a confident, peaceful, happy, healthy, relaxed, stress free, positive
thinking, Loving, caring and considerate worthwhile individual
...

Noticing now that the deeper you go, the better you feel and the better you
feel the deeper you will go with every breath that you take, every noise
that you hear and every word that I say, as you now allow your mind to
wander free as you continue to go deeper down into the world of your
dreams and the world of your imagination I want you to imagine and

remember that one time in your life when you felt more Happy, more
confident, more proud and on top of the world than you have ever done
before
...
Now I just want to notice how
good it feels to experience these positive and beneficial states of mind and
body and as you do realize now that whenever you need to renter this
special place in your every day life, whenever you are confronted with the
unexpected or those things which once would have bothered or concerned
you then now as an automatic reflex action all you need do is push
together the tip of your forefinger of the right hand together with the tip of
your thumb and instantly this will make your ring of confidence, your ring
of willpower, your ring of self-esteem and your ring of patience that will
instantly enable you to remain as the Calm, Confident, Happy, Healthy,
Relaxed and Loving individual that you have now become and will
continue to be from this moment forward
...
As you relax deeper and deeper with each
second that passes by and every word that I say
...

Realizing now that the personal attributes of self-confidence, Willpower,
Positive Self-esteem, Patience and Trust are the only attributes that any
individual needs in every day life to remain as a Confident, Happy,
Healthy, Relaxed and Loving person, Just as you have now become and
continue to be as you live your stress free lifestyle every day in every way
getting better and better
...
As you relax more completely with each second
that passes by I want you to notice the level that the mercury is currently at

and then realize that if we raise the level to 100% then any and all
problems you may once have had in your life will no longer ever be able to
bother you or effect you and as you realize this as 100% Total Reality I’d
like you to imagine heating up the mercury in the thermometer with a
lighter or a hot flaming candle so that the mercury gets hotter and hotter, so
hot in fact that it starts to rise up inside the thermometer
...
Realizing now that in order to feel this confident forever we need
to fix the mercury in place at 100% so imagine now in your minds eye that
you have a hammer and a nail and that you are now hammering the nail
through the thermometer and through the mercury at the 100% level and
rather than leaking out the mercury is now being fixed, solidly,
permanently in place so that from this moment forward your levels of selfconfidence, Will Power, self-esteem, Patience and Trust are now fixed at
100% enabling you to live your life as the Happy, healthy, Confident,
Relaxed, Calm, Loving & trusting individual that you have become and
now continue to be as all areas of your life benefit immensely from these
improvements every day in every way
...
And as you realize this its time to turn down
the volume on the TV so imagine doing this now, then just imagine turning
down the Colour and contrast so that the image of how you once were
disappears completely and now as we realize that image has gone forever,

we no longer need the TV set switched on so imagine turning it off, yes
that’s perfect and now as you relax more just imagine unplugging the TV
set from the wall and as you do realizing that you yourself have now said
goodbye completely to the past and how you once were as finally just
imagine blowing up the TV set with a large bomb, go on that’s it just see it
being blown up and realize now that these things can Never, ever bother
you again now or any time in the future as you relax more with each
second that passes by and every breath that you take
...
Notice how happy and confident
you feel about yourself, notice how good it feels to look in the mirror and
see yourself exactly as you have on many occasions dreamed yourself to
be, notice how much happier you now feel about yourself and as a result
how much happier you feel around those you love and how easy it has now
become to be open, honest and candid about those things which once
bothered you before you became this image of beauty, happiness,
confidence and contentment that you now see before you in your minds
eye and then as you continue to breath deeply and regularly realizing now
that this is no longer a dream, this is in fact 100% Total Reality, it is in fact
your New reality and is indeed the person you have now become and will
continue to be from this moment forward, as you go deeper, the better you
feel the deeper you go and the deeper you go the better you will feel
...
Making others happy makes you happy and seeing
others sad makes you sad as you now live your life like a mirror and give
out that which you want reflected back to you
...
Each and
every time you consent for me to help you re-enter this relaxing and
beneficial state you will re-enter this state with the greatest of ease and the
very moment that I say “AND SLEEP NOW” that very moment that I say
“AND SLEEP NOW” you will instantly and rapidly re-enter this state, and
each and every time you re-enter this state it will be 100 times more
relaxing, deeper and enjoyable for you in every way, shape and form
...

15) – AWAKEN FROM TRANCE (IF DAY) OR SEND OFF TO
SLEEP IF ON TAPE AT NIGHT
...

On 1, Everything I have suggested remaining with you and growing

stronger in every way
...

On 3, Realizing now how much better you feel, how proud you feel about
yourself for allowing yourself to come to terms with the problems you
once had that no longer bother you
...

On 6, Normal feelings now returning to each and every muscle group in
your body as everything I have suggested is now permanently burnt deep
into your subconscious mind
On 7, Realizing now that at a conscious Level only, when you awaken in a
few moments time you will remember to forget and forget to remember
everything that has been suggested to you, instead allowing it all to be
stored to your subconscious mind who will ensure that you act upon it all
as an automatic reflex action in your every day life
...


Healthy, Calm and relaxed
As on 9, Coming on up out of it, Lighter and brighter
And on 10, Open your eyes wakey wakey rise and shine
...

Jonathan Royle, both of which are available on Amazon
...
UltimateHypnosisCourse
...
EliteHypnosisBootcamp
...
MagicalGuru
...
Not
only are we self-employed (and therefore able to dictate our own hours,
projects, salary and working conditions) but we are also able to change the
lives of ordinary people, every day
...

In fact, if you had a penny for every time you’d had these requests, you’d
probably be able to retire, financially free, and simply enjoy the rest of
your life on a yacht in the Bahamas
...

I think that all of us have some kind of ‘dream’ or some big goals which,
right now, you may think will never be fulfilled
...

Perhaps you’re looking for that paradise beach lifestyle
...

Whatever it is that motivates you to be successful and whatever you envision as true ‘success’, in this chapter I want to empower you and give you
the tools that you need to ‘make it happen’
...

2

Would you agree?
Well, there is one fundamental ‘flaw’ with this business model which is
limiting you from achieving both of those things to their fullest potential
...

Unless you’re charging many thousands of dollars and treating high-end
celebrities or business people, chances are you’re probably not seeing the
kind of dream income that you desired
...


So, without the capital and the business experience to open up a chain of
top-notch hypnotherapy practices around the world, chances are your
dreams of million dollar mansions are going to remain a far-flung hope
...


Imagine if you could be at the beach, in your local coffee shop, browsing
the designer high street stores or on a 5* vacation and STILL be able to
treat more clients that you ever dreamt possible
...
but it isn’t anymore, thanks to an incredible tool
...

We now live in a world of digital publishing and internet marketing, where
literally anything you need is available at the push of a button
...

As hypnotists, we are in the perfect position to do exactly the same
...

A couple of years ago, I made the decision that I wanted to raise my fees,
work less and make more money
...

I soon stumbled across something golden
...


Let’s face it, there are literally BILLIONS of people around the world who
need our help in SOME way, but there’s no way we can get them all into
our offices for a hypnotherapy session
...

I’m sure you’ve seen those ‘big-gun’ hypnotists with their best-selling
books and audio programs in your favorite high-street book store, right?
Well the truth is that a lot of physical book publishers are worried right
now, as more and more people are turning to the Internet to solve their
problems
...

Let’s run some numbers
...
If you could sell 10 copies per day, that’s $670 in your pocket
...

That’s with just ONE product
...
?Or
10?
I call this ‘Passive Hypnosis Profits’
...
and it did
...
2million in online sales of
this kind of information product
...

Let me tell you, when you have an automated online system selling your
hypnotherapy products and generating hundreds or thousands of dollars
per day in hands-free income, it’s an incredible feeling
...

The truth is, the more money you have, the more resources you have to further spread your skills and help even more people - which, in turn, makes
even more money
...

Step #1: Choose a topic for your product
This is the simple part
...

It could be anything from smoking cessation or weight loss to phobia cures
and stress/anxiety
...

Perhaps there is a particular problem which you’ve had a great success rate
with, or something you have noticed is requested a lot
...

Once you’ve chosen one, you can move on
...
Why?
It’s usually because the thought never crosses their mind or they don’t
think they can
...

Think about it this way
...
which
is then instantly gone forever
...

Now, imagine if you were to purchase a simple, cheap $30 USB microphone for your computer or hire a local, basic recording studio for an hour,
and you were to do a full hypnotherapy session
...

Yes, actually sit down and run an entire session as if your client were there
in front of you, but record it all onto a microphone
...
Simply save it as an MP3 and you’re done
...

Your product could be as simple as a 60-minute audio file or as complicated as an entire multimedia program consisting of books, worksheets,
videos, audios, etc
...

Never thought you could make a hit-selling product? You just learned how
to do it in as little as an hour
...

Your online sales system will consist of a few different parts:
Sales page - this is a simple web page, which consists of some simple
graphics and either a long, scrolling sales letter or a sharp, snappy sales
video to sell the visitor on the benefits of your product
...

1

Order form - this page enables your customers to actually send you
some money for your product
...
Fortunately, with companies such as
ClickBank, PayPal and JVZoo, who will actually handle your payments
for you, this is really pretty easy
...

13 Download page - this is where your customers will be returned after
they have purchased your product
...

This kind of website is often referred to in the internet marketing as a
‘minisite’
...

If you turn to Google and search for ‘Minisite Designer’, you’ll find a ton
of really talented people who can create your entire minisite out for you,
while you just sit back and put the individual pieces together
...

Step #4: Start driving traffic
With your product and sales process online, you simply need to flood it
with traffic
...

There are literally dozens of ways that you can get traffic to your site, but
my personal favorite is to find affiliates and have them promote your
product for you
...
For example, if you have created a ‘stop smoking’ product, then you could search for blogs, product
creators, mailing list owners and experts to promote your product to their
followers and fans
...
If anyone buys it, they receive a commission from the
sale
...

It’s like having an army of sales people working for you all day, every day,
and you only have to pay them when they make you money first
...

Once your system is ready to go, your entire job becomes simply finding
and recruiting new affiliates who can promote your product on a daily
basis
...
Even if you only bring 1 new affiliate onboard each day, that can be enough to generate thousands of sales per
month
...

So what do you do next? That’s easy, you do it again with a new product in
a new niche market
...

Each time you do it, you’ll add a new product to your collection and bump
up your potential income
...

Plus, the more you do this, the better and faster you’ll become
...

If your products sell for, say, $47 and convert at around 5%, if you get 100
visitors to those sales pages every day (this is not an unrealistic figure at
all!) then you’ll be making 5 sales at $47 = $235 per day
...
Imagine the damage you could do
with FIVE or TEN products!
The truth is that the entire world is shifting rapidly to this new, digital marketplace
...


Some people will be buying those products and others will be selling them
...
Please don’t limit your opportunities to do this on a global scale
...

I have done it
...
and you can do it too
...
passivehypnosisprofits
...
elitehypnosisbootcamp
...
EliteHypnosisBootcamp
...
youtube
...
youtube
...
facebook
...
royle
And

https://twitter
...
hypnotic-consultants
...
uk/
To Contact Me Personally For One To One Training Or To Book Me To
Present A Training Seminar In Your Area

www
...
com

Secrets of Stage Hypnosis – Street Hypnotism Hypnotherapy – NLP – Complete Mind Therapy
And Marketing For Hypnotists

Compiled By: Dr
...
Jonathan Royle
www
...
com
www
...
com
www
...
com
www
...
net
VERY SILENTLY I CREPT FORWARD, I HEARD A SNARLING GRUNTING SOUND FROM
ABOVE ME, NOW I LOOKED UPWARDS, THERE WAS THE TIGER, ITS MOUTH OPEN
WIDE SHOWING LARGE TEARING FANGS, THE BLACK PATCHES ON THE ROOF OF ITS
MOUTH STOOD OUT WITH STARTLING CLARITY, WITHOUT ANOTHER SOUND, IT
LEAPT DOWN TOWARDS ME, I CROUCHED LOWER, AND IT PASSED OVER ME,
BEFORE THE TIGER COULD TURN, I LEAPT ONTO ITS BACK, CIRCLED ITS THROAT
WITH MY LEFT ARM, AND RAISED MY RIGHT ARM WITH THE LONG DAGGER IN IT,
VERY HIGH, READY TO STRIKE INTO THE TIGERS JUGULAR
...

THAT MOST IMPORTANT LESSON WAS BEFORE YOU HAD EVEN
STARTED TO READ THE BOOK

---